# HMH Go Math

## Money and Time Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 Answer Key Pdf

Go Math Grade 2 Ch 7 Money and Time Answer Key is designed to build knowledge when they are not in class. Our experts have developed a comprehensive suite of Go Math Resources in a simple and easy-to-understand language. We believe in building deep, lasting understanding rather than simply mugging up the concepts, and that every child has unlimited potential and is capable of greatness. Just tap on the quick links available to access the Topicwise HMH Go Math Grade 2 Ch 7 Answer Key.

Money and Time Concepts

Lesson: 1 Dimes, Nickels, and Pennies

Lesson: 2 Quarters

Lesson: 3 Count Collections

Lesson: 4 Show Amounts in Two Ways

Lesson: 5 One Dollar

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson: 6 Amounts Greater Than $1 Lesson 7.7 Problem Solving • Money Lesson: 8 Time to the Hour and Half Hour Lesson: 9 Time to 5 Minutes Lesson: 10 Practice Telling Time Lesson: 11 A.M. and P.M. ### Money and Time Show What You Know Order Numbers to 100 on a Number Line Write the number that is just before, between, or just after. Question 1. Answer: 57 Question 2. Answer: 25 Skip Count by Fives and Tens Question 3. Count by fives. Write how many in all. _________ _____ paints in all Answer: 5,10,15,20,25 5+5+5+5+5= 25 So, there are 25 paints in all Question 4. Count by tens. Write how many in all. ________ ____ paints in all Answer: 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 10+10+10+10+10=50 So, there are 50 paints in all Time to the Hour Write the time shown on the clock. Question 5. Answer: 11’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 11 and the minutes hand is on 12. So, the time is 11:00 Question 6. Answer: 5’o clock Explanation : The hours hand is on the 5 and the minutes hand is on 12. So, the time is 5:00 ### Money and Time Vocabulary Builder Visualize It Fill in the graphic organizer. Show ways to count on. Answer: Understand Vocabulary Write the missing numbers in each counting pattern. Question 1. Count by ones. 40, ____, ____, ____, 44, ___, 46, ____ Answer: 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 Question 2. Count by fives. 10, 15, ___, ___, ___, 35, ___, ____ Answer: 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45. Question 3. Count by tens. 20, ___, ___, 50, ___, ____, 80, ___ Answer: 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90. ### Money and Time Game 5 and 10 Count Materials Play with a partner. 1. Spin the pointer on for your starting number. Put your cube on that number. 2. Spin the pointer. Count on by that number two times. 3. Take turns. The first player to get to 100 wins. Play again. ### Money and Time Vocabulary Cards ### Money and Time Vocabulary Game DIRECTIONS 2 to 4 players. Take turns to play. • To take a turn, toss the numbered cube. Move that many spaces • Follow the directions for the space you land. • First player to reach FINISH wins. MATERIALS 1 connecting cube per player • 1 number cube • 1 set of clue cards The Write Way Reflect Choose one idea. Write about it in the space below. • Write and draw to explain the following amount as if you were talking to a young child. Use another sheet of paper for your drawing.$1.36
• What time is it now? Use at least three of these terms in your answer.
A.M. midnight minute noon P.M. quarter past
Write at least three things you know about money.
_________________________
_________________________

### Lesson 7.1 Dimes, Nickels, and Pennies

Essential Question How do you find the total value of a group of dimes, nickels, and pennies?

Listen and Draw

Sort the coins. Then draw the coins.

– Dime = 10 cents

– Nickle = 5 cents

– penny = 1 cent

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES

A nickel has the same value as how many pennies? Explain.
1 nickel = 5 cents
1 penny = 1 cents
Which means
1+1+1+1+1 = 5
5 cents = 5 pennies
So, A nickel has the same value a 5 pennies.

Share and Show

Count on to find the total value.
Question 1.

Explanation:
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 4 nickels = 5+5+5+5= 20 cents
5 cents and 1 cent
Total value of coins = 20+5+1=26 ¢

Explanation:
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 20 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 10cents
and 5 cents
Therefore, Total value of coins = 20+10+5=35¢

Count on to find the total value.
Question 3.

Explanation:
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 6 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10+10=60¢
Therefore, the total value is 60¢.

Question 4.

Explanation:
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means 5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5= 25¢
and 5 cents
Total = 25¢+5¢
Therefore, the total value is 30¢

Question 5.

Explanation:
1dime = 10 cents
This means, 3 dimes = 30 cents
1 nickels = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 10 cents
and 5 cents
Total : 30+10+5 = 45
Therefore, the total value = 45¢

Question 6.

Explanation:
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels = 10cents
3 pennies = 3 cents and 5 cents
Total : 10+3+5 = 18
Therefore, the total value is 18¢

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Maggie had 5 nickels. She gave 2 nickels to her sister. What is the total value of the nickels that Maggie has now?

Explanation:
Given , Maggie had 5 nickels
The number of nickels she gave to her sister =2
Leftover nickel coins = 5-2 = 3
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 3 nickels = 5+5+5= 15
The total value of the nickels that Maggie has now =15¢

Problem Solving • Applications

Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 8.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Analyze
Jackson has 4 pennies and 3 dimes. How much money does Jackson have?

Explanation :
4 pennies = 4 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 3 dimes = 30 cents
Total : 4 +30 = 34
The total money Jackson have = 34¢

Question 9.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Use Models Draw two ways to show 25¢. You can use dimes, nickels, and pennies.
25cents can be shown as
2 dimes , 1 nickel
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10= 20
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 20+5 = 25 ¢

Another way :
25 cents can be shown as 1 dime 2 nickel and 5 pennies
1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels= 5+5= 10
5 pennies = 5 cents
Total value : 10+10+5 = 25

Question 10.
THINK SMARTER
Sue has 40¢. Circle coins to show this amount.

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Draw pictures of five coins, using dimes, nickels, and pennies. Ask your child to find the total value.

### Dimes, Nickels, and Pennies Homework & Practice 7.1

Count on to find the total value.
Question 1.

Explanation :
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 20 cents
and 4 cents
Total : 20+4 = 24
Therefore, the total value = 24cents

Question 2.

Explanation :
2 five cents and 3 cents
5+5+3 = 13 cents
Therefore, the total value of coins = 13 cents

Explanation:
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 20 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 3 cents
Total : 20+5+3 = 28
Therefore, the total value of coins is 28 cents

Problem Solving
Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 4.
Aaron has 5 dimes and 2 nickels. How much money does Aaron have?
________

Explanation :
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 5 dimes = 50 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels = 10 cents
Total : 50+10 = 60 cents
Therefore, the total value of coins = 60 cents

Question 5.
WRITE
Draw three dimes, 1 nickel, and 2 pennies. Describe how to count on to find the total value of this group of coins.
_____________

Explanation:
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 3 dimes = 10+10+10= 30 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 2 pennies = 2 cents
Total value of coins = 30+5+2 = 37 cents

Lesson Check
Question 1.
What is the total value of this group of coins?
______

Explanation :
1 dime = 10 cents
2 five cents = 5+5= 10
and 1 cent
Total value of coins = 10+10+1 = 21 ¢

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Hayden is building toy cars. Each car needs 4 wheels. How many wheels will Hayden use to build 3 toy cars?
______ wheels
Total number of toy cars = 3
Given that, each car needs 4 wheels
Now, The number of wheels Hayden use to 3 toy cars =
4+4+4 = 12
Therefore , Hayden will use 12 wheels to build 3 toy cars.

Question 3.
What is the value of the underlined digit?
429 _____
Four hundred twenty nine
The underlined digit is 4
The value of 4 is hundred

Question 4.
Lillian is counting by fives. What numbers did she say next?
40, ___, ____, ___, ____
40, 45, 50, 55, 60.

Question 5.
Sophie has 12 grapes in her lunch bag. She shared 7 grapes with her sister. How many grapes does she have?
12 – 7 = ______
Given , the number of grapes in her lunch bag = 12
The number grapes she shared =7
12 – 7 = 5
Therefore, the number of games she have = 5

### Lesson 7.2 Quarters

Essential Question How do you find the total value of a group of coins?

Listen and Draw

Sort the coins. Then draw the coins.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Describe how the value of a quarter is greater than the value of a dime.
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
The value of a quarter is 15 cents greater than the value of a dime

Share and Show

Count on to find the total value.
Question 1.

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
This means, 2 quarters = 25+25= 50
Therefore, the total value of coins = 50 ¢

Go Math Second Grade Pdf Chapter 7 Lesson 7.2 Answer Key Question 2.

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75
1 dime = 10 cents and
1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 75+10+1 = 86
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 86 ¢

Question 3.

Explanation:
1 quarter =  25 cents
Which means , 2 quarters = 25 +25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents and
2 pennies = 2 cents
Total : 50+5+2 = 57
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 57¢

Count on to find the total value.
Question 4.

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
4 quarters = 25+25+25+25= 100
Therefore, the total value of coins = 100¢

Question 5.

Explanation :
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which mean, 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10= 40
Total : 25+40= 65
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 65¢

Question 6.

Explanation :
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means , 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 4 nickels = 5+5+5+5+ = 20
Total : 50+20= 70
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 70¢

Question 7.

Explanation :
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels= 5+5+ = 10
3 pennies = 3 cents
Total : 25+10+3 = 38
Therefore, the value of coins = 38¢

Draw and label a coin to solve.
Question 8.
THINK SMARTER
Ed’s coin has the same value as a group of 5 pennies and 4 nickels. What is his coin?

Explanation :
1 penny = 1 cent
Which means , 5 pennies = 5 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 4 nickels = 5+5+5+5= 20
Total : 5 +20
We know that , 1 quarter = 25 cents
Therefore, His coin is a quarter coin .

Problem Solving • Applications

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Make Connections
Read the clue. Choose the name of a coin from the box to answer the question.

Question 9.
I have the same value as 5 pennies.
What coin am I?
________
5 pennies =5 cents
We know that , 1 nickel = 5 cents
So, I am a nickel coin.

Question 10.
I have the same value as 25 pennies.
What coin am I?
_________
1 penny = 1 cent
25 pennies = 2 cents
We know that , 1 quarter = 25 cents
Therefore , I am a quarter coin .

Question 11.
I have the same value as 2 nickels.
What coin am I?
_________
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
We know that 1 dime = 10 cents
Therefore, I am a dime coin.

Question 12.
I have the same value as a group of 5 nickels.
What coin am I?
_________
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5 =25 cents
1 quarter = 25 cents
So , I am a quarter coin .

Question 13.
THINK SMARTER
Tom gives these coins to his brother.

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means , 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
3 dimes = 5+5+5= 15
Total: 50+15 = 65 cents
Therefore, tom gives his brother 65 cents

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child draw two quarters, two dimes, and two nickels, and then find the total value.

### Quarters Homework & Practice 7.2

Count on to find the total value.
Question 1.

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 =10
Total :
25+20+10 = 55
Therefore, the value of coins = 55¢

Question 2.

Explanation :
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 3 nickels = 5+5+5=15
1 penny = 1 cent
Total: 50+15+1=66
Therefore, the total value of coins = 66¢

Problem Solving
Read the clue. Choose the name of a coin from the box to answer the question.

Question 3.
I have the same value as a group of 2 dimes and 1 nickel. What coin am I?
_________

Explanation:
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 20 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Total value of coins = 20 +5 = 25 cents
We know that, 1 quarter = 25 cents
So, I am a quarter coin.

Grade 2 Go Math Topic 7 Lesson 7.2 Answer Key Question 4.
WRITE
Draw 1 quarter, 1 dime, and 4 pennies. Describe how to count to find the total value of this group of coins.

Explanation :

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
4 pennies = 4 cents
Total value of coins = 25+10+4 = 39

Lesson Check
Question 1.
What is the total value of this group of coins?

_________

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 =50
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5= 10
1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 50+10+1
Therefore, the total value of coins = 61¢

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Circle the odd number.
8 14 17 22
8 , 14 are the odd numbers

Question 3.
Kai scored 4 points and Gail scored 7 points. How many points did they score altogether?
4 + 7 = ______ points
Given,
The points scored by kai = 4
The points scored by Gail = 7
The points that they score altogether = 4+7 = 11 points.

Question 4.
There were 382 chairs in the music hall. Write a number greater than 382.
_______
383 is greater than 382.

Question 5.
Write the number 61 using words.
________

### Lesson 7.3 Count Collections

Essential Question How do you order coins to help find the total value of a group of coins?

Listen and Draw

Line up the coins from greatest value to least value. Then draw the coins in that order.

>>>

Quarter> dime> nickel > penny

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Describe how the values of the different kinds of coins compare.
The values of the coins are compared with cents
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel= 5 cents and
1 penny = 1 cent

Model and Draw

Order the coins from greatest value to least value.
Then find the total value.

1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25 +25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
and 2 pennies = 2 cents
Total: 50 + 10 +2 = 32
Therefore, the total value of coins 62¢

Share and Show

Draw and label the coins from greatest to least value. Find the total value.
Question 1.

_______

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
2 pennies = 2 cents
Total : 25 +10+2 = 37
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 37 ¢

Question 2.

_______

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 20 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 25+20+5+1 = 51
Therefore ,  the total value of coins = 51¢

Question 3.

_______

1quarter = 25 cents
Which means ,2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents and
1 nickel = 5 cents
Total: 50+10+5 =65
Therefore the total value of coins = 65¢

Draw and label the coins from greatest to least value. Find the total value.
Question 4.

______

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 3 dimes = 10+10+10= 30
Total :25+30 = 55
Therefore, the total value of coins  55¢

Question 5.

_______

1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means ,2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
and 2 pennies
Total : 50+10+2 = 62
Therefore, the total value of coins = 62¢

Question 6.

_______

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
Total : 25+10+10 =45 cents
Therefore, the total value of coins =45¢

Question 7.

_______

1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25= 50
1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
Total : 50+10+10 = 70
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 70¢

Question 8.
GO DEEPER
Andy has only quarters and nickels. The total value of his coins is 75¢. What coins could Andy have?
______ quarters _____ nickels
Answer: 75¢ can be shown by using only quarters and nickels as 2 quarters 5 nickels

Explanation :
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5= 25
Total: 50+25 = 75 ¢
Therefore, Andy has 2 quarters and 5 nickels.

Problem Solving • Applications

Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 9.
THINK SMARTER

He spent 1 quarter. How much money does he have now?
______

Explanation :
Total value of coins = 46¢
After spending a quarter
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 4 nickels = 5+5+5+5= 20 cents
and 1 penny = 1 cent
46 – 25 = 21¢
Therefore, the leftover money = 21¢

Question 10.
Rachel has 2 quarters, 3 dimes, and 1 nickel in her bank. How much money is in Rachel’s bank?
_______

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means 2 quarters =25+25 =50
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10 = 30
1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+30+5 = 85¢
Therefore, the amount Rachels has in his bank = 85¢

Question 11.
GO DEEPER
Blake has only nickels and dimes. He has double the number of nickels as dimes. The total value of his coins is 60¢. What coins does Blake have?
______ nickels _____ dimes
Answer: 6 nickels and 3 dimes

Explanation :
Given,
Rachel has double the number of nickels and dimes
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 6 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5+5= 30 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 3 dimes = 10+10+10 = 30 cents
Total : 30+30= 60¢
Therefore, Rachel has 3 dimes and 6 nickels.

Question 12.
THINK SMARTER
Malik has these coins in his pocket. What is the total value of the coins?

Explanation :
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10 cents
Total : 40+10 = 50
Therefore, the total value of coins Malik had = 50¢

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child draw and label coins with a total value of 32¢.

### Count Collections Homework & Practice 7.3

Draw and label the coins from greatest to least value. Find the total value.
Question 1.

________

1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10 cents and
2 pennies = 2 cents
Total : 10+10+2 = 22
Therefore, the total value f the coins = 22¢

Question 2.

_________

1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+20+5 = 75
Therefore, total value of the coins = 75¢

Problem Solving
Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 3.
Rebecca has these coins. She spends 1 quarter. How much money does she have left?

Firstly, Rebecca has 2 quarters , 1 dime, 1 nickel and 1 penny
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents and
1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 50+10+5+1 = 66¢
Given that,
she spends 1 quarter which means, 25 cents
Now, 66¢ – 25¢ = 41¢
Therefore, the leftover money is 41¢

WRITE
Draw 2 dimes, 1 nickel, and 2 quarters. Describe how to order and then count to find the total value of the coins.
_______

Explanation:

We have to order coins on the basis of cent values
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+20+5 = 75¢
Therefore, the total value of the coins = 75¢

Lesson Check
Question 1.
What is the total value of this group of coins?

_______

Explanation:

1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 cents
and 2 pennies = 2 cents
Total : 25 + 20 +2 = 47
Therefore, the total value of the coins is 47¢

Spiral Review
Question 2.
What number is 100 more than 562?
_____
Answer: The number 100 more than 562 is 662

Question 3.
Describe 58 as a sum of tens and ones.
______
Answer: 58 can be shown in sum of tens and once as
50 + 8  = 58

Question 4.
Pete helps his grandmother gather pecans. He finds 6 pecans on his left and 3 on his right. How many pecans did Pete find altogether?
6 + 3 = _____ pecans
The number of pecans Pete finds on his left side = 6
The number of Pecans Pete finds on his right side = 3
Total number of Pecans Pete find altogether =
6 + 3 = 9
Therefore, total number of pecans = 9

Question 5.
What number do the blocks show?

______
The first and second figures have 100 blocks
The 3 single line contains 10+10+10 = 30 blocks
and 4 blocks
Total number of blocks = 100+100+10+10+10+1+1+1+1 = 234
Therefore, Total number of blocks = 234

### Lesson 7.4 Show Amounts in Two Ways

Essential Question How do you choose coins to show a money amount in different ways?

Listen and Draw

Show the amount with coins. Draw the coins.
Write the amount.

1 quarter = 25 cents and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total value = 26¢
Another way:
26¢ can also be shown as 2 dimes 1 nickel and 1 penny

1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 20+1 = 26 ¢

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Can you show 10¢ with 3 coins? Explain how you know.
Answer: No, it is not possible to show 10¢ with 3 coins because

Share and Show

Use coins. Show the amount in two ways.
Draw and label the coins.
Question 1.
61¢
61 ¢ can be shown as 2 quarters 1 dime and 1 penny
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25= 50
1  dime = 10 cents
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 50+10+1= 61¢

Another way:
61¢ can also be shown as 6 dimes and 1 penny
1 dime = 10 cents
and 6 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 60+1 = 61¢

Question 2.
36¢
36 cents be shown as 3 dimes 1 nickel and 1 penny
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 30+5+1 = 36¢

Another way :
36¢ can also be shown as 1 quarter 1 dime and 1 penny
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total : 25+10+1 = 36¢

Use coins. Show the amount in two ways.
Draw and label the coins.
Question 3.
55¢
55 cents can be shown as 2 quarters and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 25+25 = 50 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+5 = 55 cents

Another way:
55 cents can also be shown as 5 dimes and 1 nickel
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 5 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10 = 50
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+5 = 55

90¢
90 cents can be shown as 3 quarters 1 dime and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75
1 dime = 10 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 75+10+5 = 90

Another way:
90 can also be shown as 2 quarters and 4 dimes
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
and 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40
Total: 50+40 = 90 cents

Question 5.
75¢
75¢ can be shown as 3 quarters
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 cents

Another way :
75 cents can also be shown as 2 quarters 2 dimes and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total: 50+20+5 = 75 cents

Question 6.
THINK SMARTER
Teresa has 42¢. She has no dimes. Draw to show what coins she might have.

42¢ can be shown as 1 quarter 3 nickels and 2 pennies
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 3 nickels = 15 cents
2 pennies = 2 cents
Total value of coins = 25 +15+ 2 = 42

Problem Solving • Applications

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Model with Mathematics
Use coins to solve.
Question 7.
Lee buys a pen for 50¢. Draw coins to show two different ways to pay 50¢.
50 cents can be shown as:
2 quarters
1 quarter = 25cents
Which means , 2 quarters = 25 +25 = 50 ¢

Another way :
50 cents can be shown as 5 dimes
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means ,
5 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10 = 50

Question 8.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Make Sense of Problems
Delia used 4 coins to buy a book for 40¢. Draw coins to show two ways to pay 40¢ with 4 coins.
40¢ can be shown as 4 dimes
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means ,
4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40

Another way :
40 cents can also be shown in 4 coins as 1 quarter 3 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means ,
3 nickels = 15 cents
Total value = 25 +15 = 40 cents

Question 9.
THINK SMARTER
Fill in the bubble next to all the groups of coins with a total value of 30¢.

2 nickels and 2 dimes
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means , 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10cents
1 dime =10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 cents
Total value = 10 +20 = 30 ¢.

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • With your child, take turns drawing different collections of coins to show 57¢.

### Show Amounts in Two Ways Homework & Practice 7.4

Use coins. Show the amounts in two ways.
Draw and label the coins.
Question 1.
39¢
39 cents be shown as 1 quarter 1 dime 4 pennies.
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
4 pennies = 4 cents
Total value = 25+10+4 = 39 cents

Another way :
39 cents can be shown as 3 dimes , 1nickel and 4 pennies
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means ,
3 dimes = 10 +10+10= 30
1 nickel = 5 cents
4 pennies = 4 cents
Total value = 30+5+4 = 39 cents

Question 2.
70¢
70 cents can be shown as 2 quarters and 2 dimes
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
Total : 50+20= 70 cents

Another way:
70 cents can also be shown as 1 quarter 4 dimes and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 25 + 40 + 5 = 70 cents

Problem Solving
Question 3.
Madeline uses fewer than 5 coins to pay 60¢. Draw coins to show one way she could pay 60¢.
60¢ can be shown in fewer than 5 coins 2 quarters and 1 dime
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25  50
and 1 dime = 10 cents
Total : 50 + 10 = 60¢

Go Math 2nd Grade Chapter 7 Review Test Question 4.
WRITE
Draw coins in two ways to show 57¢. Describe how to choose the coins for each way.
57 ¢ can be shown as 2 quarters 1 nickel and  2 pennies
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
and 2 pennies = 2 cents
Total : 50+5+2 = 57 ¢

Another way :
57 cents can also be shown as 5 dimes, 1 nickel and 2 pennies
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 5 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents and
2 pennies = 2 cents

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Circle the group of coins that has the same total value.

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Write the number 31 as a sum of tens and ones.
2 tens ____ ones
The number 31 can be shown as a sum of tens and once as
3 tens and 1 once or 30+1 = 31

Question 3.
Write 13 tens as a sum of hundreds and tens.
_____ hundreds ______ tens

Answer: 13 x 10 = 130
can be written as 100+30
1 hundreds and 3 tens

Question 4.
What is the value of the underlined digit?
28 _____
The value of the underlined digit is once
The underlined digit in one place is 8

Question 5.
Baylie’s softball team scored 5 runs in the first inning and 6 runs in the second inning. How many runs did her team score?
5 + 6 = ______ runs
5+6 = 11
Therefore, the total number of runs her team scored = 11

### Lesson 7.5 One Dollar

Essential Question How can you show the value of one dollar with coins?

Listen and Draw

Draw the coins. Write the total value.
________
$1 is equal to 100 cents 100¢ can be shown as 3 quarters 2 dimes and 1 nickel 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 ¢ 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20¢ and 1 nickel = 5 cents Total : 75+20+5 = 100¢ Therefore, 3 quarters, 2 dimes and 1 nickel have a value of$1.00

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
How many pennies have the same value as 80¢? Explain.

Explanation:
1 penny = 1 cent
So, 80 pennies = 80¢
Therefore, 80 pennies have the same value as 80¢

Share and Show

Draw the coins to show $1.00. Write the total value. Question 1. nickels Answer: 20 Explanation :$1 = 100 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
20 nickels = 100 cents

Question 2.
quarters
________

Explanation :
$1 = 100 cents 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means , 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25 = 100 Question 3. dimes ________ Answer: 10 Explanation:$1 = 100 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 10 dimes = 100 cents

Circle coins to make $1.00. Cross out the coins you do not use. Question 4. Answer: Question 5. Answer: Question 6. GO DEEPER Warren shows$1.00 using only two kinds of coins. Draw and label coins he could use.
$1 = 100 cents 100 cents can be shown in two kinds of coins as 3 quarters and 5 nickels 1 quarter =25 cents Which means , 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 1 nickel = 5 cents Which means ,5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5= 25 Total value = 75+25 = 100 Question 7. THINK SMARTER Sara has these coins. Draw more coins to show$1.00.

The given coins are 1 quarter , 1 dime and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 25+10+5 = 35
$1 is equals to 100 cents 100 cents – 35 cents = 65 cents We need 65 cents more to make$1
65 cents can be shown as 2 quarters  1 dime and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 50+10+5 = 65
Therefore, we need 2 quarters  1 dime and 1 nickel more to make $1 TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child draw a group of coins to show$1.00.

### One Dollar Homework & Practice 7.5

Circle coins to make $1.00. Cross out the coins you do not use. Question 1. Answer: Question 2. Answer: Problem Solving Question 3. Draw more coins to show$1.00 in all.

$1 = 100 cents 2 quarters = 25+25= 50 cents We need 50¢ more to make$1.00
50¢ can be shown as  5 dimes

Go Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 7 Review/Test Answer Key Question 4.
WRITE
Draw coins to show one way to make $1.00 using only nickels and quarters. Answer:$1 = 100 cents
$1 can be shown by using only nickels and quarters =3 quarters and 5 nickels 1 quarter is equal to 25 cents Which means , 3 quarters = 25+25+25+= 75 1 nickel= 5 cents Which means , 5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5= 25 Total value = 75+25= 100 Lesson Check Question 1. Which group of coins has a value of$1.00?

$1 = 100 cents 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means , 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25= 100 cents Spiral Review Question 2. Write 692 using words. ________ Answer: 692= Six hundred ninety two Question 3. Keith ate 7 almonds, then ate 7 more. Is the total number of almonds even or odd? 7 + 7 = ______ almonds _______ Answer: 7+7 = 14 Therefore , the total number of almonds is even Question 4. What is the total value of 1 quarter and 3 nickels? _________ Answer: 40 cents Explanation: 1 quarter = 25 cents 1 nickel = 5 cents Which means , 3 nickels = 5+5+5= 15 Total value = 25+ 15= 40 cents Therefore, the value of 1 quarter and 3 nickels = 40 cents. Question 5. Kristin is counting by tens. What numbers does she say next? 230, _____, _____, ______ Answer: 230, 240, 250, 260. ### Money and Time Mid-Chapter Checkpoint Concepts and Skills Count on to find the total value. Question 1. Answer: 28¢ Explanation: 1 dime= 10 cents Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10= 20 1 nickel = 5 cents and 3 pennies = 3 cents Total :20+5+3 Therefore, the total value of the coins = 28¢ Question 2. Answer: 76¢ Explanation: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means , 2 quarters = 25+25= 50 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 1 nickel = 5 cents and 1 penny = 1 cent Total : 50+20+5+1 = 76 Therefore, the total value of the coins = 76¢ Use coins. Show the amount in two ways. Draw and label the coins. Question 3. 31¢ Answer: 31cents can be shown as 1 quarter, 1 nickel and 1 penny 1 quarter = 25 cents 1 nickel = 5 cents and 1 penny =1 cent Total value = 25+5+1=31 Another way : 31 cents can be shown as 3 dimes , 1 penny 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10=30 and 1 penny = 1 cent Total : 30 =1 = 31 cents Question 4. THINK SMARTER Mary used these coins to buy a folder. What is the total value of these coins? Answer: 60¢ Explanation: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means , 2 quarters = 25+25=50 1 nickel= 5 cents Which means, 2 nickels= 5+5 = 10 Total : 50+10 =60 Therefore, the total value of the money = 60¢ ### Lesson 7.6 Amounts Greater Than$1

Essential Question How do you show money amounts greater than one dollar?

Listen and Draw

Draw and label the coins.
Write the total value.
_______
total value

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Use Repeated Reasoning
Explain how you found the total value of the coins in the coin bank.

Share and Show

Circle the money that makes $1.00. Then write the total value of the money shown. Question 1. __________ Answer: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 1 nickel = 5 cents, 1 penny = 1 cent and one$1 bill
Total value : $1+50+5+1 =$1.56

________

1 quarter = 25 cents
Total value : 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25 = 100
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10 = 30
Total : 100+30 = 130
Therefore, total value of money = 130

Circle the money that makes $1.00. Then write the total value of the money shown. Question 3. _______ Answer: The given coins are 4 quarters 1 dime and 1 nickel 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25 = 100 1 dime = 10 dime and 1 nickel = 5 cents Total : 100+10+5 =$1.15
Therefore, the total value of coins = $1.15 Question 4. Answer:$1 bill= 100 cents
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10 = 30
1 nickel = 5 cents and
1 penny = 1 cents
Total value : 100+ 50+30+5+1 = $1.86 Question 5. _______ Answer: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 3 dimes = 10+10+10 = 30 and 1 nickel = 5 cents Total : 75 + 30 + 5 =$1.10
Therefore, the total amount of money = $1.10 Go Math 2nd Grade Lesson 7.6 Answer Key Question 6. THINK SMARTER Martin used 3 quarters and 7 dimes to pay for a kite. How much money did he use? _______ Answer: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 7 dimes= 10+10+10+10+10+10+10 = 70 Total value = 75+70 = 145 cent Therefore, the total value of money =$1.45

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 7.
GO DEEPER
Pam has fewer than 9 coins. The coins have a total value of $1.15. What coins could she have? Draw the coins. Then write a list of her coins. Answer:$1.15 can be shown in fewer than 9 coins as
4 quarters , 1 dime and 1 nickel
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25 = 100
1 dime = 10 dime
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total : 100+10+5 = $1.15 Therefore, the total value of coins =$1.15

Question 8.
THINK SMARTER+
Jason put this money in his bank.

Answer: Jason put a total of $1.35 in his bank TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • With your child, take turns drawing coins or a$1 bill and coins with a total value of $1.23. ### Amounts Greater Than$1 Homework & Practice 7.6

Circle the money that makes $1.00. Then write the total value of the money shown. Question 1. _________ Answer: The total value of the money shown is 1 quarter = 25 cents 1$1 bill , 1 dime = 10 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total value : $1 +25+10+5 =$1.40

Question 2.

__________

The total value of money shown :
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 25+25+25 = 75
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
and 1 cent
Total : 75+20+10+1 = 166  cents or $1.16 Problem Solving Solve. Write or draw to explain. Question 3. Grace found 3 quarters, 3 dimes, and 1 nickel in her pocket. How much money did she find? ________ Answer:$1.10

Explanation:
1 quarter= 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 75 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 3 dimes = 30 cents
and 1 nickel = 5 cents
Total :75+30+5=110
So the total value of the money = $1.10 Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 Answer Key Question 4. WRITE Write about how to use the dollar sign and decimal point to show the total value of 5 quarters. Answer: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 5 quarters = 25+25+25+25+25 = 125 cents 125 cents can be written as$1.25

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Julie has this money in her bank. What is the total value of this money?

________
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 dime = 10 cents and
one $1 bill Total value :$1 +25+10 = $1.35 Therefore, total value in Julie bank =$1.35

Spiral Review
Question 2.
There are 79 squash plants and 42 pepper plants in Julia’s garden. How many vegetable plants are in Julia’s garden altogether?

7 9
+  4 2
__________
1 2 1

Therefore, the total number of plants in Julia’s garden are 121

Question 3.
What is the difference?

6 1
–  2 7
______
3 4

Question 4.
What number is 100 less than 694?
_________

Question 5.
Write an addition fact that has the same sum as 6 + 5.
10 + ______

### Lesson 7.7 Problem Solving • Money

Essential Question How does acting it out help when solving problems about money?

Kendra gave 2 dimes, 2 nickels, 1 quarter, and two $1 bills to her sister. How much money did Kendra give her sister? Unlock the Problem Show how to solve the problem. Draw to show the money that Kendra used. Kendra gave her sister _________ Answer: 1 dime = 10 cents Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 1 nickel = 5 cents Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10 1 quarter = 25 cents and two$1 bills
Total value of money = $1+$1 +20+10+25 = $2.55 Therefore, Kendra gave her sister =$2.25

HOME CONNECTION • Your child used play money to act out the problem. Representing problems with materials can be a useful strategy for children to use to solve problems.

Try Another Problem

Use play coins and bills to solve.
Draw to show what you did.
Question 1.
Jacob has two $1 bills, 2 dimes, and 3 pennies in his pocket. How much money does Jacob have in his pocket? _________ Answer: two$1 bills = $1+$1 = $2 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20 and 3 pennies = 3 cents Total value :$2+20+3 = $2.23 Question 2. Amber used 2 quarters, 1 nickel, 1 dime, and three$1 bills to buy a toy. How much money did Amber use to buy the toy?
__________
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
1 dime = 10 cents and
three $1 bills =$1+$1+$1 = $3 Total value : 50+5+10+$3 = $3.65 MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES Explain how you found the amount of money in Jacob’s pocket. Answer: The total value of the money is find in his pockets Share and Show Use play coins and bills to solve. Draw to show what you did. Question 3. Val used 3 quarters, 2 nickels, 2 pennies, and one$1 bill to buy a book. How much money did Val use to buy the book?
__________
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
2 pennies = 2 cents
and $1 bill Total value of money = 75+10+2 +$1= $1.87 Therefore, the amount Val used to buy the book =$1.87

Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 Test Question 4.
Derek has two $1 bills, 2 quarters, and 6 dimes. How much money does he have? ___________ Answer: Two$1 bills = $1 +$1 = $2 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 6 dimes = 10+10+10+10+10+10 = 60 cents Total value =$2 +50+60 = $3.10 Question 5. THINK SMARTER Katy has 3 quarters, 2 nickels, 2 dimes, and 3 pennies. How many more pennies does she need to have$1.10?

________ more pennies
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
and 3 pennies = 3 cents
Total value = 75+10+20+3 = $1.08 To make$1.10 we need two more pennies

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 6.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Make Sense of Problems
Victor has some dollar bills, some quarters, and some nickels. Draw and label dollar bills, quarters, and nickels to show $2.25. Answer: one$1 bill ,
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means , 4 quarters = 25+25+25+25 = 100
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 5 nickels = 5+5+5+5+5= 25
Total value : $1+100+20 =$2.25

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Ross used 3 quarters, 4 dimes, 3 nickels, and 5 pennies to buy a card. How much money did Ross use to buy the card? Draw to show how you solve the problem.

1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 =75 cents
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means, 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 3 nickels = 5+5+5 =15
and 5 pennies = 5 cents
Total : 75+40+15+5 = 135 cents
Therefore, the total value of money Ross used to buy the card = $1.35 TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Ask your child to explain how he or she solved one problem in this lesson. ### Problem Solving • Money Homework & Practice 7.7 Use play coins and bills to solve. Draw to show what you did. Question 1. Sara has 2 quarters, 1 nickel, and two$1 bills.
How much money does Sara have?
_________
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
and two $1 bills =$1+$1 =$2
Total value : $1+$1 +50+5 = $2.55 Question 2. Brad has one$1 bill, 4 dimes, and 2 nickels in his bank. How much money does Brad have in his bank?
__________
$1 bill, 1 dime = 10 cents Which means, 4 dimes = 10+10+10+10 = 40 and 1 nickel = 5 cents Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10 Total :$1+40+10 = $1.50 Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 Test Pdf Question 3. Mr. Morgan gives 1 quarter, 3 nickels, 4 pennies, and one$1 bill to the clerk. How much money does Mr. Morgan give the clerk?
__________
1 quarter = 25 cents
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 3 nickels = 5+5+5 = 15
4 pennies = 4 cents
and $1 bill Total :$1 + 25+15+4 = $1.44 Question 4. WRITE Write or draw to explain how you would find the total value of two$1 bills and 3 quarters.

Two $1 bills =$1+$1 =$2
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75
Total = $2 +75 =$2.75
Therefore, the total value of money =$2.75 Lesson Check Question 1. Lee has two$1 bills and 4 dimes. How much money does Lee have?
________

4 dimes = 40 cents and $1 bill The total value of money =$1.40

Question 2.
Dawn has 2 quarters, 1 nickel, and one $1 bill. How much money does Dawn have? __________ Answer: 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 2 quarters = 50 cents 1 nickel = 5 cents and$1 bill
Total value of money is $1.55 Spiral Review Question 3. What is the value of the underlined digit? 56 ______ Answer: The value of underlined digit 6 is once Question 4. Cecilia collected 342 pennies for her class’s penny drive. Marked collected 243 pennies. Use <, >, or = to compare. Who collected more? 342 ____ 243 ________ collected more. Answer: 342 > 243 Cecilia have collected more. Question 5. Brooke’s dog has 15 treats. Then he ate 8 of them. How many treats does he have left? 15 – 8 = _______ Answer: 15 – 8 = 7 Therefore, the number of treats he left = 7 Question 6. What is the next number in this pattern? 225, 325, 425, 525, ______ Answer: 625 ### Lesson 7.8 Time to the Hour and Half Hour Essential Question How do you tell time to the hour and half hour on a clock? Listen and Draw Draw the hour hand to show each time. 2 hours 30 minutes 2 hours 50 minutes 5 hours 5 minutes 7 hours 25 minutes MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES Communicate Describe where the hour hand points to show half past 4:00. Answer: The time half past 4:00 is 4: 30 The hours hand is between 4 and 5 nd the minutes hand is on 6 , Which means 30 minutes. The time is 4:30 Share and Show Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 1. Answer: The time is 1:00 As the hours hand on 1 and the minutes hand is on 12 . So, the time is 1 :00 Question 2. Answer: 8 hours 30 minutes As the hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 6 .Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 30 minutes Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 Pdf Question 3. Answer: 3 hours 30 minutes As the hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 6 .Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 30 minutes On Your Own Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 4. Answer: 9 hours 30 minutes As the hours hand is between 9 and 10 and the minutes hand is on 6 .Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 9 hours 30 minutes Question 5. Answer: 12 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 12 and 1 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 12 hours 30 minutes Question 6. Answer: 6’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 6 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 6 hours or 6:00 Question 7. Answer: 4’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 4 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 4 hours or 4:00 Question 8. Answer: 11 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 11 and 12 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 11 hours 30 minutes Question 9. Answer: 5 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 5 and 6 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 5 hours 30 minutes Question 10. THINK SMARTER Look at the time. Draw the hour hand and the minute hand to show the same time. Answer: 7:30 2:00 11:00 Problem Solving • Applications Question 11. MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Make Connections Allie eats lunch when the hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12, and the minute hand points to the 6. When does Allie eat lunch? Show the time on both clocks. How do you know what time to write in the digital clock? Explain. _______________________ _________________________ Answer: The hour hand points halfway between the 11 and the 12, and the minute hand points to the 6. The time Allie eats lunch is 11:30 Question 12. THINK SMARTER Match the clocks that show the same time. Answer: TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child describe what he or she knows about a clock face. ### Time to the Hour and Half-Hour Homework & Practice 7.8 Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 1. Answer: 3’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 3 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 3 hours or 3:00 Question 2. Answer: 10 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 10 and 11 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 10 hours 30 minutes Question 3. Answer: 4’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 4 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 4 hours or 4:00 Problem Solving Question 4. Amy’s music lesson begins at 4:00. Draw hands on the clock to show this time. Answer: The hours hand is on 4 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 4:00 Question 5. WRITE Draw a clock to show the time as 2:30. Describe how you decided where the clock hands should point. ______________________ ______________________ Answer: The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 6 .Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 2 hours 30 minutes . Lesson Check Question 1. What is the time on this clock? _____ Answer: 3 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 30 minutes Question 2. What is the time on this clock? ______ Answer: 6’o clock Explanation: The hours hand is on 6 and the minutes hand is on 12 So, the time is 6 hours or 6:00 Spiral Review Question 3. Rachel has one$1 bill, 3 quarters, and 2 pennies. How much money does Rachel have?
________
Answer: $1.77 Explanation: 1$1 bill
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 3 quarters = 25+25+25=75
and 2 pennies = 2 cents
Total $1 +75+2 =$1.77
Therefore, the total value of the money = $1.77 Question 4. Write <, >, or = to compare 260 and 362. 260 _____ 362 Answer: 260 < 362 Question 5. What number is shown with these blocks? ______ Answer: 215 There are 2 hundred blocks and 1 ten block and 5 one block Question 6. Circle any even numbers. 1 3 4 5 Answer: 4 – Even number ### Lesson 7.9 Time to 5 Minutes Essential Question How do you tell and show time to five minutes? Listen and Draw Draw the hour hand and the minute hand to show the time. Answer: MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES Describe where the minute hand points to show half past the hour. Answer: The minute’s hand points to 6 Which means, 30 minutes or half past Share and Show Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 1. Answer: 3 hours 25 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 5, which means 25 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 25 minutes Question 2. Answer: 9 hours 5 minutes Explanation: The hour’s hand is between 9 and 10 and the minutes hand is on 1, which means 5 minutes So, the time is 9 hours 5 minutes Question 3. Answer: 11 hours 40 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 11 and 40 and the minutes hand is on 8 , which means, 40 minutes So, the time is 11 hours 40 minutes Question 4. Answer: 12 hours 50 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 12 and 1 and the minutes hand is on 10 , which means, 50 minutes So, the time is 12 hours 50 minutes Question 5. Answer: 7 hours 15 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 3 , which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 15 minutes Question 6. Answer: 5 hours 55 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 5 and 6 and the minutes hand is on 11 , which means, 55 minutes So, the time is 5 hours 55 minutes On Your Own Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 7. Answer: 6 hours 40 minutes or 6:40 Explanation: The hours hand is between 6 and 7 and the minutes hand is on 8 , which means, 40 minutes So, the time is 6 hours 40 minutes Question 8. Answer: 9 hours 20 minutes or 9: 20 Explanation: The hours hand is between 9 and 10 and the minutes hand is on 4 , which means, 20 minutes So, the time is 9 hours 20 minutes Question 9. Answer: 4 hours 30 minutes or 4:30 Explanation: The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 30 minutes Question 10. Answer: 2 hours 45 minutes or 2: 45 Explanation: The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 9 , which means, 45 minutes So, the time is 2 hours 45 minutes Question 11. Answer: 10 hours 10 minutes or 10 :10 Explanation: The hours hand is between 10 and 11 and the minutes hand is on 2 , which means, 10 minutes So, the time is 10 hours 10 minutes Question 12. Answer: 8 hours 35 minutes or 8:35 Explanation: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 7 , which means, 35 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 35 minutes MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Use Models Look at the time. Draw the minute hand to show the same time. Question 13. Answer: Question 14. Answer: Question 15. Answer: Problem Solving • Applications Draw the clock hands to show the time. Then write the time. Question 16. THINK SMARTER My hour hand points between the 8 and the 9. In 35 minutes it will be the next hour. What time is it? Answer: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 5. Which means, 25 minutes Also in 35 minutes , it will be 1 hour So, the time is 8 hours 25 minutes Question 17. GO DEEPER Mr. Brady fixes broken computers. Look at the start and finish times for his work on one computer. How many minutes did he work on the computer? _______ minutes Answer: 60 minutes Explanation: Given that , Mr. Brady fixes broken computers. The time he starts the work = 4:00 The time he finishes the work = 5: 00 The time difference between 1 hour is 60 minutes Therefore, the time he took to fix the computer = 60 minutes Question 18. THINK SMARTER Angel eats lunch at 12:45. Angel spent 10 minutes eating lunch. Draw the minute hand on the clock to show when Angel finished eating. Write the time. ___ : ____ Answer: Given that, Angel eats lunch at 12 :45 She spend 10 minutes to eat 10 minutes after 12 :45 means 12:55 Therefore, Angel completes her lunch at 12:55 TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child draw a large blank clock face and use two pencils as clock hands to show some different times. ### Time to 5 Minutes Homework & Practice 7.9 Look at the clock hands. Write the time. Question 1. Answer: 8 hours 15 minutes or 8: 15 Explanation: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 3 , which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 15 minutes Question 2. Answer: 2 hours 40 minutes or 2:40 Explanation: The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 8 , which means, 40 minutes So, the time is 2 hours 40 minutes Question 3. Answer: 5 hours 55 minutes or 5: 55 Explanation: The hours hand is between 5 and 6 and the minutes hand is on 11 , which means, 55 minutes So, the time is 5 hours 55 minutes Problem Solving Draw the minute hand to show the time. Then write the time. Question 4. My hour hand points between the 4 and the 5. My minute hand points to the 9. What time do I show? Answer: The time is 4: 45 The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 9 . Which means, 45 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 45 minutes. Question 5. WRITE Draw a clock showing 2:50. Explain how you know where the clock hands point. Answer: The clock shows the time 2 : 50 The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 10 .Which means, 50 minutes The time is 2 hours 50 minutes . Lesson Check Question 1. What is the time on this clock? Answer: 8 hours 5 minutes or 8: 05 Explanation: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 1 , which means, 5 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 5 minutes Question 2. What is the time on this clock? Answer: 7 hours 20 minutes or 7:20 Explanation: The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 4, which means, 20 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 20 minutes Spiral Review Question 3. What is the sum? 1 + 6 + 8 = _____ Answer: 15 Question 4. Which number has the same value as 30 tens? ______ Answer: 300 Go Math Lesson 7.9 2nd Grade Answer KeyQuestion 5. Steven has 3 rows of toys. There are 4 toys in each row. How many toys are there? _____ toys Answer: Given that , Steven has 3 rows of toys There are 4 toys in each row Total number of toys 4+4+4 = 12 Therefore, the total number of toys = 12 Question 6. Jill has 14 buttons. She buys 8 more buttons. How many buttons does Jill have? Answer: Given, The total number of buttons Jill have = 14 Also, she has 8 more buttons Now, total buttons = 14 + 8 = 22 Therefore, the total number of buttons = 120 ### Lesson 7.10 Practice Telling Time Essential Question What are the different ways you can read the time on a clock? Listen and Draw Write the times on the digital clocks. Then label the clocks with the children’s names. 1. 11 hours 45 minutes – 11: 45 2. 3 hours 25 minutes – 3 :25 3. 7 hours 15 minutes – 7:15 4. 6 hours 10 minutes – 6:10 MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES Where would the minute hand point to show 15 minutes after the hour? Explain. Answer: The minutes hand should point on 3 to show 15 minutes after the hour. Share and Show Draw the minute hand to show the time. Write the time. Question 1. 15 minutes after 1 Answer: 15 minutes after 1 The time is 1 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 1 and 2 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 1 hours 15 minutes Question 2. half past 9 Answer: Half past 9 means 30 minutes after 9 The time is 9 hours 30 minutes The hours hand is between 9 and 10 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 9 hours 30 minutes Question 3. quarter past 5 Answer: Quarter past 5 means 15 minutes after 5 The time is 5 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 5 and 6 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 5 hours 15 minutes Question 4. quarter past 10 Answer: Quarter past 10 means 15 minutes after 10 The time is 10 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 10 and 11 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 10 hours 15 minutes Question 5. 40 minutes after 3 Answer: 40 minutes after 3 means, 3:40 The time is 3 hours 40 minutes The hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 8. Which means, 40 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 40 minutes Question 6. half past 7 Answer: Half past 7 means 30 minutes after 7 The time is 7 hours 30 minutes The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 30 minutes On Your Own Draw the minute hand to show the time. Write the time. Question 7. 15 minutes after 11 Answer: 15 minutes after 11 means, 11:15 The time is 11 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 11 and 12 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 11 hours 15 minutes Question 8. quarter past 4 Answer: Quarter past 4 means 15 minutes after 4 The time is 4 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 15 minutes Question 9. 25 minutes after 8 Answer: 25 minutes after 8 The time is 8 hours 25 minutes The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 5. Which means, 25 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 25 minutes Question 10. 10 minutes after 6 Answer: 10 minutes after 6 means 6: 10 The time is 6 hours 10 minutes The hours hand is between 6 and 7 and the minutes hand is on 2. Which means, 10 minutes So, the time is 6 hours 10 minutes Question 11. half past 2 Answer: Half past 2 means 30 minutes after 2 The time is 2 hours 30 minutes The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 2 hours 30 minutes Question 12. 45 minutes after 3 Answer: 45 minutes after 4 means, 4: 45 The time is 4 hours 45 minutes The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 9. Which means, 45 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 45 minutes Question 13. 5 minutes after 7 Answer: 5 minutes after 7 means 7:05 The time is 7 hours 5 minutes The hours hand is between7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 1. Which means, 5 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 5 minutes Question 14. 30 minutes after 12 Answer: 30 minutes after 12 The time is 12 hours 30 minutes The hours hand is between 12 and 1 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 12 hours 30 minutes Question 15. quarter past 10 Answer: Quarter past 10 means 15 minutes after 10 The time is 10 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 10 and 11 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 10 hours 15 minutes Problem Solving • Applications Question 16. THINK SMARTER Lily eats lunch at quarter past 12. Meg eats lunch at 12:30. Katie eats lunch at 12:15. Which girls eat lunch at the same time? _______ and _______ Answer: Given that, Lily eats lunch at quarter past 12 which also means 30 minutes after 12, 12: 30 Meg eats lunch at 12: 30 and Katie eats lunch at 12: 15 Therefore, Lily and Meg eat lunch at the same time . Question 17. MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Explain Soccer practice starts at 4:30. Gabe arrives at soccer practice at 4:15. Does he arrive before or after practice starts? Explain. ____________________ ____________________ Answer: Given that, Soccer practice starts at 4: 30 and Gabi arrives practice at 4: 15 So, Gabi arrives 15 minutes before the soccer practice starts. Question 18. THINK SMARTER What time is shown on the clock? Fill in the bubble next to all the ways to write or say the time. Answer: The hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 5 . Which means, 25 minutes So the time is 3 : 25 or 25 minutes after 3 1. 3: 25 2. 25 minutes after 3 TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Name a time to 5 minutes. Ask your child to describe where the clock hands point at this time. ### Practice Telling Time Homework & Practice 7.10 Draw the minute hand to show the time. Write the time. Question 1. quarter past 7 Answer: Quarter past 7 means 15 minutes after 7 The time is 7 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 15 minutes Question 2. half past 3 Answer: Half past 3 means 30 minutes after 3 The time is 3 hours 30minutes The hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 30 minutes Question 3. 50 minutes after 1 Answer: 50 minutes after 1 means 1 hour 50 minutes The time is 1 hours 50minutes The hours hand is between 1 and 2 and the minutes hand is on 10. Which means, 50 minutes So, the time is 1 hours 50 minutes Question 4. quarter past 11 Answer: Quarter past 11 means 15 minutes after 11 The time is 11 hours 15 minutes The hours hand is between 11 and 12 and the minutes hand is on 3. Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 11 hours 15 minutes Problem Solving Draw hands on the clock to solve. Question 5. Josh got to school at half past 8. Show this time on the clock. Answer: Half past 8 means, 30 minutes after 8 The time Josh got to school is 8 hours 30 minutes As the hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 6. Which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 30 minutes Question 6. WRITE Write the time 8:30. Then write this time in two other ways, using words. ______________ ________________ Answer: The time is 8:30 = Half past 8 8 :30 – 8 hours 30 minutes Lesson Check Question 1. Write the time on this clock using words. Answer: The time is six hours fifteen minutes or quarter past 6 Spiral Review Question 2. What is the value of this group of coins? Answer: 46 cents Explanation: 1 quarter = 25 cents 1 dime = 10 cents Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10=20 1 penny = 1 cents Total : 25+20+1 = 46 cents Therefore, the total value of the coins = 46 cents Question 3. What time is shown on this clock? ________ Answer: 7:15 Explanation : The hours hand is between 7 and the minutes hand is on 3 ,Which means 15 minutes So ,the time is 7 hours 15 hours. Question 4. Write six hundred forty-seven using numbers. ______________ Answer: 647 – Six hundred forty-seven ### Lesson 7.11 A.M. and P.M. Essential Question How do you use A.M. and P.M. to describe times? Listen and Draw Draw the clock hands to show each time. Then write each time. Answer: The time is 7 hours 15 minutes a.m. As the hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 3 Which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 15 minutes a.m. The time is 3 hours 45 minutes p.m. As the hours hand is between 3 and 4 and the minutes hand is on 9 .Which means, 45 minutes So, the time is 3 hours 45 minutes . MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES Describe some activities that you do in both the morning and in the evening. Answer: The activities that we do in both the morning and in the evening are 1. Reading 2. Exercise/meditation 3. Brushing teeth 4. Taking bath Share and Show Write the time. Then circle a.m. or p.m. Question 1. eat breakfast Answer: 7:15 a.m. 7 hours 15 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 3 , which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 7 hours 15 minutes Question 2. go to art class Answer: 1:40 p.m. 1 hours 40 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 1 and 2 and the minutes hand is on 8 , which means, 40 minutes So, the time is 1 hours 40 minutes Question 3. do homework Answer: 4:30 p.m. 4 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 30 minutes Question 4. arrive at school Answer: 8: 25 a.m. 8 hours 25 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 5 , which means, 25 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 25 minutes On Your Own Write the time. Then circle a.m. or p.m. Question 5. go to the library Answer: 2:50 p.m. 2 hours 50 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 2 and 3 and the minutes hand is on 10 , which means, 50 minutes So, the time is 2 hours 50 minutes Question 6. go to science class Answer: 10:30 a.m. 10 hours 30 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 10 and 11 and the minutes hand is on 6 , which means, 30 minutes So, the time is 10 hours 30 minutes Question 7. eat lunch Answer: 11:45 a.m. 11 hours 45 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 11 and 12 and the minutes hand is on 9 , which means, 45 minutes So, the time is 11 hours 45 minutes Question 8. look at the moon Answer: 8: 15 p.m. 8 hours 15 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 8 and 9 and the minutes hand is on 3 , which means, 15 minutes So, the time is 8 hours 15 minutes Question 9. THINK SMARTER Use the times in the list to complete the story. Don got to school at _______. His class went to the library at _____. After school, Don read a book at _____. Answer: Don got to school at 8 : 30 a.m. His class went to the library at 10:15a.m. After school, Don read a book at 3:20p.m. Problem Solving • Applications Question 10. GO DEEPER Some times are shown on this time line. Write a label for each dot that names something you do at school during that part of the day. At what times would you say the dots are placed on the time line? _____ and _____ Answer: 8:00 a.m. – Yoga class 10:00 a.m. – Project work Noon – Eat lunch 2:00 p.m. – Music class 4: 00 – Games 1. 9: 00 a.m. 2. 1:00 p.m. Question 11. THINK SMARTER+ The clock shows the time Jane goes to recess. Write the time. Then circle a.m. or p.m. Recess lasted one hour. Write the time recess was over. Write a.m. or p.m. _______________ Answer: The clock sows the time is 11: 30 a.m. As the hours hand is between 11 and 12 and the minutes hand is on 6 Which means, 30 minutes So , the time is 11 hours 30 minutes a.m. Given that, Recess lasted one hour . So, the time recess was over is 12 : 30 p.m. TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Name some activities and times. Have your child say a.m. or p.m. for the times. ### A.M. and P.M. Homework & Practice 7.11 Write the time. Then circle A.M. or P.M. Question 1. walk the dog Answer: 4 hours 40 minutes p.m. Explanation: The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 8 .Which means 40 minutes So the time is 4:40 p.m. Question 2. finish breakfast Answer: 7 hours 30 minutes A.m. Explanation : The hours hand is between 7 and 8 and the minutes hand is on 6 . Which means , 30 minutes So, the time is 7 : 30 a.m. Problem Solving Use the list of times. Complete the story. Question 3. Jess woke up at _____. She got on the bus at _____ and went to school. She left school at _______. Answer: Jess woke up at 7:00 A.m. She got on the bus at 8:30 A.m. and went to school . She left the school at 3:15 p.m. Question 4. WRITE List two school activities that you do in the morning and two school activities that you do in the afternoon. Write times for these activities using A.M. and P.M. ___________________ __________________ Answer: Morning activities: a. Yoga class – 8:30 a.m. b. Art class – 11:45 a.m. Evening activities a. Drawing time : 3:30 p.m. b. Music class : 5:00 p.m. Lesson Check Question 1. The clock shows when the soccer game ended. What time was it? _______ Answer: 4 hours 50 minutes Explanation: The hours hand is between 4 and 5 and the minutes hand is on 10 ,Which means 50 minutes So, the time is 4 hours 50 minutes Question 2. The clock shows when Dad gets up for work. What time is it? _______ Answer: 6 hours 10 minutes Explanation : The hours hand is on 6 and the minutes hand is on 2 .Which means, 10 minutes So, the time is 6 hours 10 minutes . Spiral Review Question 3. What coin has the same value as 25 pennies? Draw your answer. Answer: Quarter Explanation: 1 penny = 1 cent Which means , 25 pennies = 25 cents We know that 1 quarter = 25 cents So, the coin is a quarter coin. Question 4. Describe 72 as a sum of tens and ones. ____ + ____ Answer: 72 can be shown in tens as 70 and once as 2 Total : 70 + 2 = 72 Question 5. At the beginning of the school year there were 437 2nd graders at Woods Elementary. Over the course of the year,24 students joined. How many 2nd graders are there at the end of the year? Answer: 4 3 7 + 2 4 _______ 4 6 1 Therefore, the number of 2nd graders are there at the end of the year = 461 Question 6. What time is quarter past 3? _______ Answer: 3 : 15 quarter past means 15 minutes after 3 So the time is 3 hours 15 minutes. ### Money and Time Review/Test Question 1. Andrea pays$2.15 for a jump rope. Fill in the bubble next to all the ways that show $2.15. Answer: 1. two$1 bills , 1 dime and 1 nickel = $2.15 2. one$1 bill, 3 quarters and 4 dimes = $2.15 Question 2. The clock shows the time Michael eats breakfast. Write the time. Circle a.m. or p.m. Tell how you knew whether to select a.m. or p.m. Answer: 7:10 a.m. The time is 7 hours 10 minutes as the hours hand is on 7 and the minutes hand is on 2, Which means 10 minutes And also breakfast is consumed in morning time So, the time is 7: 10 a.m. Question 3. Fill in the bubble next to all the groups of coins with a total of 60¢. Answer: 1. Yes, because 2 quarters = 50¢ , 1 dime= 10¢ ; Total = 60¢ 2. Yes, because 1 quarter = 25 ¢,2 dimes = 20¢ and 3 nickels = 15¢ ;Total = 60¢ 3. No, because 5 dimes = 50¢, 1 nickel = 5¢ 6 pennies = 6 cents ;Total = 61¢ 4. No, because 4 nickels = 20¢ , 20 pennies = 20 cents ;Total = 40¢ Question 4. GO DEEPER Tess gave Raul these coins. Tess says she gave Raul$1.00. Is Tess correct? Explain.

_______________________
______________________

Explanation:
$1 = 100 cents The value of the coins she gave = 1 quarter = 25 cents Which means, 2 quarters= 25+25 = 50 and 1 dime = 10 cents Total : 50 + 10 = 60 So, the value of coins she gave to Raul = 60¢ Therefore, Tess is wrong . Question 5. Write the time that is shown on this clock. Answer: 8 hours 5 minutes Explanation : The hours hand is on 8 and the minutes hand is on 1 which means, 5 minutes So, the time is 68 hours 5 minutes Question 6. What time is shown on the clock? Fill in the bubble next to all the ways to write or say the time. Answer: The time in the given clock is 4 hours 35 minutes It can be shown as 4 : 35 It can also be written as 35 minutes past 4 Question 7. THINK SMARTER+ Alicia has this money in her pocket. Answer:$1.70

Explanation:
1 dollar = 100 cents
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 dime = 10 cents
Which means , 2 dimes = 10+10 = 20
Total value of money = 100+50+20 = 170 cents
Is can be shown as $1 .70 Therefore, Alicia has a total of$1.70 in her pocket.

Question 8.
Kate’s father gave her these coins. Write the value of the coins. Explain how you found the the total value.

_________________________
_________________________

Explanation:
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means, 2 quarters = 25+25 = 50
1 nickel = 5 cents
Which means, 2 nickels = 5+5 = 10
and 1 penny = 1 cent
Total value of coins = 50+10+1 = 61¢

Question 9.
Write the times the clocks show.

1. 4 hours 30 minutes
2. 7 hours 30 minutes
3. 5 ‘o clock

Question 10.
Ben has 30¢. Circle coins to show this amount.

Question 11.
Mia buys apples that costs 76¢.
Draw and label coins to show a total value of 76¢
76¢ can be shown as 3 quarters and 1 penny
1 quarter = 25 cents
Which means , 3 quarters = 25+25+25 = 75
And 1 penny = 1 cents
Total : 75+1 = 76¢

Conclusion:

Get step by step explanation for all the questions in a simple manner from Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 7 Money and Time. All the answers seen in HMH Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 7 are prepared by the math experts. Make use of the links and score good marks in the exams.

## Divide Whole Numbers Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 2 Answer Key Pdf

Apply the math to real-time examples by learning the tricks using HMH Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key. The quick way of solving math problems will help the students to save time. So, students can practice more questions utilizing the time properly. If you want the best way of learning then you must use Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 2 Divide Whole Numbers Answer Key.

Lesson 1: Place the First Digit

Lesson 2: Divide by 1-Digit Divisors

Lesson 3: Investigate • Division with 2-Digit Divisors

Lesson 4: Partial Quotients

Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Lesson 5: Estimate with 2-Digit Divisors

Lesson 6: Divide by 2-Digit Divisors

Lesson 7: Interpret the Remainder

Lesson 9: Problem Solving • Division

Review/Test

### Place the First Digit – Share and Show – Page No. 63

Divide.

Question 1.
3)$$\overline { 579 }$$
_____

193

Explanation:
Divide integers 57/3 = 19
Multiply 19 x 3 = 57; Subtract 57 – 57 = 0
Write down 9 and divide integers 9/3 = 3.
Multiply 3 x 3 = 9. Subtract 9 – 9 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 2.
5)$$\overline { 1,035 }$$
_____

207

Explanation:
Divide integers 10/5 = 2
Multiply 2 x 5 = 10; Subtract 10 – 10 = 0
Write down 35 and divide integers 35/5 = 7.
Multiply 7 x 5 = 35. Subtract 35 – 35 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Go Math Book 5th Grade Place The First Digit Lesson 2.1 Question 3.
8)$$\overline { 1,766 }$$
_____ R _____

220 R 6

Explanation:
Divide integers 17/8 = 2
Multiply 2 x 8 = 16; Subtract 17 – 16 = 1
Write down 16 and divide integers 16/8 = 2.
Multiply 2 x 8 = 16. Subtract 16 – 16 = 0.
Write down 6; 6 < 8. There are not enough tens
So, the remainder is 6

Divide.

Question 4.
8)$$\overline { 275 }$$
_____ R _____

43 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 27/8 = 3
Multiply 8 x 3 = 24; Subtract 27 – 24= 3
Write down 3 and divide integers 35/8 = 4.
Multiply 8 x 4 = 32. Subtract 35 – 32 = 3.
The remainder is 3.

Question 5.
3)$$\overline { 468 }$$
_____

155 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 46/3 = 15
Multiply 3 x 15 = 45; Subtract 46 – 45= 1
Write down 18 and divide integers 18/3 = 5.
Multiply 3 x 5 = 15. Subtract 18 – 15 = 3.
The remainder is 3.

Question 6.
4)$$\overline { 3,220 }$$
_____

805

Explanation:
Divide integers 32/4 = 8
Multiply 4 x 8 = 32; Subtract 32 – 32 = 0
Write down 20 and divide integers 20/4 = 5.
Multiply 4 x 5 = 20. Subtract 20 – 20= 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 7.
6)$$\overline { 618 }$$
_____

103

Explanation:
Divide integers 61/6 = 10
Multiply 6 x 10 = 60; Subtract 61 – 60 = 1
Write down 18 and divide integers 18/6 = 3.
Multiply 6 x 3 = 18. Subtract 18 – 18 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 8.
4)$$\overline { 716 }$$
_____

179

Explanation:
Divide integers 71/4 = 17
Multiply 4 x 17 = 68; Subtract 71 – 68 = 3
Write down 36 and divide integers 36/4 = 9.
Multiply 4 x 9 = 36. Subtract 36 – 36 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 9.
9)$$\overline { 1,157 }$$
_____ R _____

128 R 5

Explanation:
Divide integers 11/9 = 1
Multiply 9 x 1 = 9; Subtract 11 – 9 = 2
Write down 25 and divide integers 25/9 = 2.
Multiply 9 x 2 = 18. Subtract 25 – 18 = 7.
Write down 77 and divide integers 77/9 = 8.
Multiply 9 x 8 = 72. Subtract 77 – 72= 5.
The remainder is 5.

Question 10.
6)$$\overline { 6,827 }$$
_____ R _____

1,137 R 5

Explanation:
Divide integers 6/6 = 1
Multiply 6 x 1 = 6; Subtract 6 – 6 = 0
Write down 82 and divide integers 82/6 = 13.
Multiply 6 x 13 = 78. Subtract 82 – 78 = 4.
Write down 47 and divide integers 47/6 = 7.
Multiply 6 x 7 = 42. Subtract 47 – 42= 5.
The remainder is 5.

7)$$\overline { 8,523 }$$
_____ R _____

1,217 R 4

Explanation:
Divide integers 8/7 = 1
Multiply 7 x 1 = 7; Subtract 8 – 7 = 1
Write down 15 and divide integers 15/7 = 2.
Multiply 7 x 2 = 14. Subtract 15 – 14 = 1.
Write down 12 and divide integers 12/7 = 1.
Multiply 7 x 1 = 7. Subtract 12 – 7= 5.
Write down 53 and divide integers 53/7 = 7.
Multiply 7 x 7 = 49. Subtract 53 – 49= 4.
The remainder is 4.

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide.

Question 12.
645 ÷ 8 = _____ R _____

645 ÷ 8 = 80 R 5

Explanation:
Divide integers 64/8 = 8
Multiply 8 x 8 = 64; Subtract 64 – 64 = 0
Write down 05; 5 < 8; There are not enough tens
The remainder is 5.

Question 13.
942 ÷ 6 = _____

157

Explanation:
Divide integers 9/6 = 1
Multiply 6 x 1 = 6; Subtract 9 – 6 = 3
Write down 34 and divide integers 34/6 = 5.
Multiply 6 x 5 = 30. Subtract 34 – 30 = 4.
Write down 42 and divide integers 42/6 = 7.
Multiply 6 x 7 = 42. Subtract 42 – 42 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 14.
723 ÷ 7 = _____ R _____

103 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 7/7 = 1
Multiply 7 x 1 = 7; Subtract 7 – 7 = 0
Write down 23 and divide integers 23/7 = 3.
Multiply 7 x 3 = 21. Subtract 23 – 21 = 2.
The remainder is 2.

Question 15.
3,478 ÷ 9 = _____ R _____

386 R 4

Explanation:
Divide integers 34/9 = 3
Multiply 9 x 3 = 27; Subtract 34 – 27 = 7
Write down 77 and divide integers 77/9 = 8.
Multiply 9 x 8 = 72. Subtract 77 – 72 = 5.
Write down 58 and divide integers 58/9 = 6.
Multiply 9 x 6 = 54. Subtract 58 – 54= 4.
The remainder is 4.

Question 16.
3,214 ÷ 5 = _____ R _____

642 R 4

Explanation:
Divide integers 32/5 = 6
Multiply 5 x 6 = 30; Subtract 32 – 30 = 2
Write down 21 and divide integers 21/5 = 4.
Multiply 5 x 4 = 20. Subtract 21 – 20 = 1.
Write down 14 and divide integers 14/5 = 2.
Multiply 5 x 2 = 10. Subtract 14 – 10 = 4.
The remainder is 4.

Question 17.
492 ÷ 4 = _____

123

Explanation:
Divide integers 4/4 = 1
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4; Subtract 4 – 4 = 0
Write down 9 and divide integers 9/4 = 2.
Multiply 4 x 2 = 8. Subtract 9 – 8 = 1.
Write down 12 and divide integers 12/4 = 3.
Multiply 4 x 3 = 12. Subtract 12 – 12 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 18.
2,403 ÷ 9 = _____

267

Explanation:
Divide integers 24/9 = 2
Multiply 9 x 2 = 18; Subtract 24 – 18 = 6
Write down 60 and divide integers 60/9 = 6.
Multiply 9 x 6 = 54. Subtract 60 – 54 = 6.
Write down 63 and divide integers 63/9 = 7.
Multiply 9 x 7 = 63. Subtract 63 – 63 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 19.
2,205 ÷ 6 = _____ R _____

367 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 22/6 = 3
Multiply 6 x 3 = 18; Subtract 22 – 18 = 4
Write down 40 and divide integers 40/6 = 6.
Multiply 6 x 6 = 36; Subtract 40 – 36 = 4
Write down 45 and divide integers 45/6 = 7.
Multiply 6 x 7 = 42; Subtract 45 – 42 = 3
The remainder is 3.

Question 20.
2,426 ÷ 3 = _____ R _____

808 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 24/3 = 8
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24; Subtract 24 – 24 = 0
Write down 26 and divide integers 26/3 = 8.
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24. Subtract 26 – 24 = 2.
The remainder is 2.

Question 21.
1,592 ÷ 8 = _____ R _____

199

Explanation:
Divide integers 15/8 = 1
Multiply 8 x 1 = 8; Subtract 15 – 8 = 7
Write down 79 and divide integers 79/8 = 9.
Multiply 8 x 9 = 72; Subtract 79 – 72 = 7
Write down 72 and divide integers 72/8 = 9.
Multiply 8 x 9 = 72; Subtract 72 – 72 = 0
The remainder is 0.

Question 22.
926 ÷ 4 = _____ R _____

231 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 9/4 = 2
Multiply 4 x 2 = 8; Subtract 9 – 8 = 1
Write down 12 and divide integers 12/4 = 3.
Multiply 4 x 3 = 12; Subtract 12 – 12 = 0
Write down 6 and divide integers 6/4 = 1.
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4; Subtract 6 – 4 = 2
The remainder is 2.

Question 23.
6,033 ÷ 5 = _____ R _____

1,206 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 6/5 = 1
Multiply 5 x 1 = 5; Subtract 6 – 5 = 1
Write down 10 and divide integers 10/5 = 2.
Multiply 5 x 2 = 10; Subtract 10 – 10 = 0
Write down 33 and divide integers 33/5 = 6.
Multiply 5 x 6 = 30; Subtract 33 – 30 = 3
The remainder is 3.

### Place the First Digit – UNLOCK the Problem – Page No. 64

Question 24.
Rosa has a garden divided into sections. She has 125 daisy plants. If she plants an equal number of daisy plants in each section of daisies, will she have any left over? If so, how many daisy plants will be left over?

a. What information will you use to solve the problem?
Type below:
__________

We can use the fact that she has 125 daisy plants and she plants an equal number of the daisy plants in each of 3 sections.

Question 24.
b. How will you use division to find the number of daisy plants left over?
Type below:
__________

We have to do 125/3
Divide integers 12/3 = 4
Multiply 3 x 4 = 12; Subtract 12 – 12 = 0
Write down 5 and divide integers 5/3 = 1.
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3; Subtract 5 – 3 = 2
The remainder is 2.
41 daisy plants in each section.
2 daisy plants left over

Question 24.
c. Show the steps you use to solve the problem. Estimate: 120 ÷ 3 = _____
Type below:
__________

Divide integers 12/3 = 4
Multiply 3 x 4 = 12; Subtract 12 – 12 = 0
The remainder is 0.

Question 24.
d. Complete the sentences:
Rosa has _____ daisy plants.
She puts an equal number in each of _____ sections.
Each section has _____ plants.
Rosa has _____ daisy plants left over.
Type below:
__________

Rose has 125 daisy planes.
She puts an equal number in each of 3 sections.
Each section has 41 plants.
Rosa has 2 daisy plants left over.

Question 25.
One case can hold 3 boxes. Each box can hold 3 binders. How many cases are needed to hold 126 binders?
_____ cases

14 cases

Explanation:
One case can hold 3 boxes. Each box can hold 3 binders. 3 x 3 = 9.
For 12 binders,
126/ (3 x 3) = 126/9 = 14

Question 26.
Test Prep In which place is the first digit in the quotient 1,497 ÷ 5?
Options:
a. thousands
b. hundreds
c. tens
d. ones

b. hundreds

Explanation:
1,497 ÷ 5 = 499. The first digit 4 is in hundreds place.

### Divide by 1-Digit Divisors – Share and Show – Page No. 67

Question 1.
8)$$\overline { 624 }$$
Check
_____

78

Explanation:
Divide integers 62/8 = 7
Multiply 8 x 7 = 56; Subtract 62 – 56 = 6
Write down 64 and divide integers 64/8 = 8.
Multiply 8 x 8 = 64. Subtract 64 – 64 = 0.
The remainder is 0.
Check:
78 x 8 = 624;
624 = 624

Question 2.
4)$$\overline { 3,220 }$$
Check
_____

805

Explanation:
Divide integers 32/4 = 8
Multiply 4 x 8 = 32; Subtract 32 – 32 = 0
Write down 20 and divide integers 20/4 = 5.
Multiply 4 x 5 = 20. Subtract 20 – 20 = 0.
The remainder is 0.
Check:
805 x 4 = 3,220;
3,220 = 3,220.

Question 3.
4)$$\overline { 1,027 }$$
Check
_____ R _____

256 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 10/4 = 2
Multiply 4 x 2 = 8; Subtract 10 – 8 = 2
Write down 22 and divide integers 22/4 = 5.
Multiply 4 x 5 = 20. Subtract 22 – 20= 2.
Write down 27 and divide integers 27/4 = 6.
Multiply 4 x 6 = 24. Subtract 27 – 24 = 3.
The remainder is 3.
So, 256 R 3.
Check:
256 x 4 = 1,024;
1,024 + 3 = 1,027.
1,027 = 1,027

Divide.

Question 4.
6)$$\overline { 938 }$$
_____ R _____

156 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 9/6 = 1
Multiply 6 x 1 = 6; Subtract 9 – 6 = 3
Write down 33 and divide integers 33/6 = 5.
Multiply 6 x 5 = 30. Subtract 33 – 30 = 3.
Write down 38 and divide integers 38/6 = 6.
Multiply 6 x 6 = 36. Subtract 38 – 36 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 156 R 2.

Question 5.
4)$$\overline { 762 }$$
_____ R _____

190 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 7/4 = 1
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4; Subtract 7 – 4 = 3
Write down 36 and divide integers 36/4 = 9.
Multiply 4 x 9 = 36. Subtract 36 – 36 = 0.
Write down 2. 2 < 4; There are not enough tens
The remainder is 2.
So, 190 R 2.

Question 6.
3)$$\overline { 5,654 }$$
_____ R _____

1884 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 5/3 = 1
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3; Subtract 5 – 3 = 2
Write down 26 and divide integers 26/3 = 8.
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24. Subtract 26 – 24 = 2.
Write down 25 and divide integers 25/3 = 8.
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24. Subtract 25 – 24 = 1.
Write down 14 and divide integers 14/3 = 4.
Multiply 3 x 4 = 12. Subtract 14 – 12 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 1884 R 2.

Question 7.
8)$$\overline { 475 }$$
_____ R _____

59 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 47/8 = 5
Multiply 8 x 5 = 40; Subtract 47 – 40 = 7
Write down 75 and divide integers 75/8 = 9.
Multiply 9 x 8 = 72. Subtract 75 – 72 = 3.
The remainder is 3.
So, 59 R 3.

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide.

Question 8.
4)$$\overline { 671 }$$
_____ R _____

167 R 3

Explanation:
Divide integers 6/4 = 1
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4; Subtract 6 – 4 = 2
Write down 27 and divide integers 27/4 = 6.
Multiply 4 x 6 = 24. Subtract 27 – 24 = 3.
Write down 31 and divide integers 31/4 = 7.
Multiply 4 x 7 = 28. Subtract 31 – 28 = 3.
The remainder is 3.
So, 167 R 3.

Question 9.
9)$$\overline { 2,023 }$$
_____ R _____

224 R 7

Explanation:
Divide integers 20/9 = 2
Multiply 9 x 2 = 18; Subtract 20 – 18 = 2
Write down 22 and divide integers 22/9 = 2.
Multiply 9 x 2 = 18. Subtract 22 – 18 = 4.
Write down 43 and divide integers 43/9 = 4.
Multiply 9 x 4 = 36. Subtract 43 – 36 = 7.
The remainder is 7.
So, 224 R 7.

Question 10.
3)$$\overline { 4,685 }$$
_____ R _____

1,561 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 4/3 = 1
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3; Subtract 4 – 3 = 1
Write down 16 and divide integers 16/3 = 5.
Multiply 3 x 5 = 15. Subtract 16 – 15 = 1.
Write down 18 and divide integers 18/3 = 6.
Multiply 3 x 6 = 18. Subtract 18 – 18 = 0.
Write down 5 and divide integers 5/3 = 1.
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3. Subtract 5 – 3 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 1,561 R 2.

Question 11.
8)$$\overline { 948 }$$
_____ R _____

118 R 4

Explanation:
Divide integers 9/8 = 1
Multiply 8 x 1 = 8; Subtract 9 – 8 = 1
Write down 14 and divide integers 14/8 = 1.
Multiply 8 x 1 = 8. Subtract 14 – 8 = 6.
Write down 68 and divide integers 68/8 = 8.
Multiply 8 x 8 = 64. Subtract 68 – 64 = 4.
The remainder is 4.
So, 118 R 4.

Question 12.
1,326 ÷ 4 = _____ R _____

331 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 13/4 = 3
Multiply 4 x 3 = 12; Subtract 13 – 12 = 1
Write down 12 and divide integers 12/4 = 3.
Multiply 4 x 3 = 12. Subtract 12 – 12 = 0.
Write down 6 and divide integers 6/4 = 1.
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4. Subtract 6 – 4 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 331 R 2.

Question 13.
5,868 ÷ 6 = _____

978

Explanation:
Divide integers 58/6 = 9
Multiply 6 x 9 = 54; Subtract 58 – 54 = 4
Write down 46 and divide integers 46/6 = 7.
Multiply 6 x 7 = 42. Subtract 46 – 42 = 4.
Write down 48 and divide integers 48/6 = 8.
Multiply 6 x 8 = 48. Subtract 48 – 48 = 0.
The remainder is 0.
So, 978.

Question 14.
566 ÷ 3 = _____ R _____

188 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 5/3 = 1
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3; Subtract 5 – 3 = 2
Write down 26 and divide integers 26/3 = 8.
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24. Subtract 26 – 24 = 2.
Write down 26 and divide integers 26/3 = 8.
Multiply 3 x 8 = 24. Subtract 26 – 24 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 188 R 2.

Question 15.
3,283 ÷ 9 = _____ R _____

364 R 7

Explanation:
Divide integers 32/9 = 3
Multiply 9 x 3 = 27; Subtract 32 – 27 = 5
Write down 58 and divide integers 58/9 = 6.
Multiply 9 x 6 = 54. Subtract 58 – 54 = 4.
Write down 43 and divide integers 43/9 = 4.
Multiply 9 x 4 = 36. Subtract 43 – 36 = 7.
The remainder is 7.
So, 364 R 7.

Algebra Find the value of n in each equation. Write what n represents in the related division problem.

Question 16.
n = 4 × 58
Value of n = _______
Represents: _______

Value of n = 232
Represents: dividend

Explanation:
n = 4 × 58;
232 = 4 x 58;
n is the dividend

Question 17.
589 = 7 × 84 + n
Value of n = _______
Represents: _______

Value of n = 1
Represents: remainder

Explanation:
589 = 7 × 84 + n
589 = 588 + n;
589 – 588 = n;
1 = n
n is the remainder

Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 2 Assessment Question 18.
n = 5 × 67 + 3
Value of n = _______
Represents: _______

Value of n = 338
Represents: dividend

Explanation:
n = 5 × 67 + 3
n = 335 + 3
n = 338
n is the dividend

### Divide by 1-Digit Divisors – Problem Solving – Page No. 68

Use the table to solve 19–20.

Question 19.
If the Welcome gold nugget were turned into 3 equal-sized gold bricks, how many troy ounces would each brick weigh?
_____ troy ounces

739 troy ounces

Explanation:
Welcome gold nugget = 2,217 troy ounces.
If it turned into 3 equal-sized gold bricks, 2,217/3 = 739.
739 troy ounces

Question 20.
Pose a Problem Look back at Problem 19. Write a similar problem by changing the nugget and the number of bricks. Then solve the problem.
Type below:
__________

571 troy ounces

Explanation:
If Welcome Stranger nugget were turned into 4 equal-sized gold bricks, how many troy ounces would each brick weigh?
Welcome Stranger nugget = 2,284.
If it turned into 4 equal-sized gold bricks, 2,217/3 = 571.
571 troy ounces

Question 21.
There are 246 students going on a field trip to pan for gold. If they are going in vans that hold 9 students each, how many vans are needed? How many students will ride in the van that isn’t full?
The number of vans: _________
_________ students in the van that isn’t full

The number of vans: 27
3 students will ride in the van that isn’t full

Explanation:
There are 246 students going on a field trip to pan for gold. If they are going in vans that hold 9 students each, 246/9 = 27 R 3
The number of vans: 27
3 students will ride in the van that isn’t full
Question 22.
One crate can hold 8 cases of trading cards. How many crates are needed to hold 128 cases of trading cards?
_____ crates

16 crates

Explanation:
One crate can hold 8 cases of trading cards. To hold 128 cases of trading cards, 128/8 = 16 crates needed.

Question 23.
Test Prep At a bake sale, a fifth-grade class sold 324 cupcakes in packages of 6. How many packages of cupcakes did the class sell?
Options:
a. 1,944
b. 108
c. 64
d. 54

d. 54

Explanation:
At a bake sale, a fifth-grade class sold 324 cupcakes in packages of 6. 324/6 = 54

### Division with 2-Digit Divisors – Share and Show – Page No. 71

Use the quick picture to divide.

Question 1.

143 ÷ 13 = _____

143 ÷ 13 = 11

Explanation:
143 = 100 + 40 + 3
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 3 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10) = 100 + 30 = 130.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 13.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 3 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 3 = 13
130 + 13 = 143;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 = 11

Divide. Use base-ten blocks.

Question 2.
168 ÷ 12 = _____

168 ÷ 12 = 14

Explanation:
168 ÷ 12
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 2 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10) = 100 + 20 = 120.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 12.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 2 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1) = 10 + 2 = 12.
Repeat the above step more three times to get
120 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 = 168;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 14

Question 3.
154 ÷ 14 = _____

154 ÷ 14 = 11

Explanation:
154 ÷ 14
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 4 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10 + 10) = 100 + 40 = 140.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 14.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 4 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 4 = 14.
Repeat the above step more three times to get
140 + 14 = 154;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 = 11

Question 4.
187 ÷ 11 = _____

187 ÷ 11 = 17

Explanation:
187 ÷ 11 =
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 1 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10) = 100 + 10 = 110.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 11.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 1 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1) = 10 + 1 = 11.
Repeat the above step more six times to get
110 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 = 187;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 17

Divide. Draw a quick picture.

Question 5.
165 ÷ 11 = _____

165 ÷ 11 = 15

Explanation:
165 ÷ 11
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 1 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10) = 100 + 10 = 110.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 11.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 1 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1) = 10 + 1 = 11.
Repeat the above step more four times to get
110 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 + 11 = 165;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 15

Question 6.
216 ÷ 18 = _____

216 ÷ 18 = 12

Explanation:
216 ÷ 18
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 8 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10) = 100 + 80 = 180.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 18.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 8 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 8 = 18.
Repeat the above step to get
180 + 18 + 18  = 216;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 = 12

196 ÷ 14 = _____

196 ÷ 14 = 14

Explanation:
196 ÷ 14
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 4 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10 + 10) = 100 + 40 = 140.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 14.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 4 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 4 = 14.
Repeat the above step more three times to get
140 + 14 + 14 + 14 + 14  = 196;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 14

Question 8.
195 ÷ 15 = _____

195 ÷ 15 = 13

Explanation:
195 ÷ 15
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 5 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10) = 100 + 50 = 150.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 15.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 5 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 5 = 15.
Repeat the above step more three times to get
150 + 15 + 15 + 15  = 195;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 13

Question 9.
182 ÷ 13 = _____

182 ÷ 13 = 14

Explanation:
182 ÷ 13
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 3 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10 + 10 ) = 100 + 30 = 130.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 13.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 3 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1 + 1) = 10 + 3 = 13.
Repeat the above step more four times to get
130 + 13 + 13 + 13 + 13 = 182;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 14

Question 10.
228 ÷ 12 = _____

228 ÷ 12 = 19

Explanation:
228 ÷ 12
Model the first partial quotient by making a rectangle with the hundred and 2 tens. In the Record section, cross out the hundred and tens you use.
(10 x 10) + (10 + 10) = 100 + 20 = 120.
The rectangle shows 10 groups of 12.
Model the second partial quotient by making a line with the ten and 2 ones. In the Record section, cross out the ten and ones you use.
10 + (1 + 1) = 10 + 2 = 12.
Repeat the above step more eight times to get
120 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 + 12 = 228;
So, the answer is 10 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 = 19

### Division with 2-Digit Divisors – Connect to Social Studies – Page No. 72

Pony Express

The Pony Express used men riding horses to deliver mail between St. Joseph, Missouri, and Sacramento, California, from April, 1860 to October, 1861. The trail between the cities was approximately 2,000 miles long. The first trip from St. Joseph to Sacramento took 9 days 23 hours. The first trip from Sacramento to St. Joseph took 11 days 12 hours.

Solve.

Question 11.
Suppose two Pony Express riders rode a total of 165 miles. If they replaced each horse with a fresh horse every 11 miles, how many horses would they have used?
_____ horses

16 horses

Explanation:
Suppose two Pony Express riders rode a total of 165 miles. If they replaced each horse with a fresh horse every 11 miles. Then, 16 horses used.

Question 12.
Suppose a Pony Express rider was paid $192 for 12 weeks of work. If he was paid the same amount each week, how much was he paid for each week of work?$ _____

$16 Explanation: Suppose a Pony Express rider was paid$192 for 12 weeks of work.
For each week. $192/12 =$16.

Question 13.
Suppose three riders rode a total of 240 miles. If they used a total of 16 horses, and rode each horse the same number of miles, how many miles did they ride before replacing each horse?
_____ miles

15 miles

Explanation:
Assuming each horse was only ridden once then a total of 16 horses were ridden for a total of 240 miles
240 miles/16 horses = 15 miles/horse
if each horse was ridden more than once before being replaced the distance between replacements could be reduced.
The fact that there were 3 riders is irrelevant.

Question 14.
Suppose it took 19 riders a total of 11 days 21 hours to ride from St. Joseph to Sacramento. If they all rode the same number of hours, how many hours did each rider ride?
_____ hours

15 hours

Explanation:
Suppose it took 19 riders a total of 11 days 21 hours to ride from St. Joseph to Sacramento.
(11 x 24 + 21)/19 = (264 + 21)/19 = 285/19 = 15 hours.

### Partial Quotients – Share and Show – Page No. 75

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 1.
18)$$\overline { 648 }$$
_____

36

Explanation:
Multiply 18 x 10 = 180; Subtract: 648 – 180 = 468.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 18 x 10 = 180; Subtract: 468 – 180= 288.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 18 x 10 = 180; Subtract: 288- 180= 108.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 18 x 6 = 108; Subtract: 108 – 108 = 0.
partial quotient = 6;
The remainder is 0;
Add the partial quotient to find the whole number quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 6 = 36 R 0

Question 2.
62)$$\overline { 3,186 }$$
_____ R _____

Explanation:
Multiply 62 x 10 = 620; Subtract: 3,186 – 620 = 2,566.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 62 x 10 = 620; Subtract: 2,566 – 620 = 1,946.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 62 x 10 = 620; Subtract: 1,946 – 620 = 1,326.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 62 x 10 = 620; Subtract: 1,326 – 620 = 706.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 62 x 10 = 620; Subtract: 706 – 620 = 86.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 62 x 1 = 62; Subtract: 86 – 62 = 24.
partial quotient = 1
The remainder is 24;
Add the partial quotient to find the whole number quotient;
10 + 10 + 10  + 10 + 1 = 51 R 24

Question 3.
858 ÷ 57
_____ R _____

Explanation:
Multiply 57 x 10 = 570; Subtract: 858 – 570 = 288.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 57 x 5 = 285; Subtract: 288 – 285 = 3.
partial quotient = 5
The remainder is 3;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 5 = 15 R 3

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 4.
73)$$\overline { 584 }$$
_____

8

Explanation:
Multiply 73 x 8 = 584; Subtract: 584 – 584 = 0.
partial quotient = 8
The remainder is 0;

Question 5.
51)$$\overline { 1,831 }$$
_____ R _____

35 R 46

Explanation:
Multiply 51 x 10 = 510; Subtract: 1,831 – 510 = 1,321.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 51 x 10 = 510; Subtract: 1,321 – 510 = 811.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 51 x 10 = 510; Subtract: 811 – 510 = 301.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 51 x 5 = 255; Subtract: 301 – 255 = 46.
partial quotient = 5
The remainder is 46;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 5 = 35 R 46

Question 6.
82)$$\overline { 2,964 }$$
_____ R _____

36 R 12

Explanation:
Multiply 82 x 10 = 820; Subtract: 2,964 – 820 = 2,144.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 82 x 10 = 820; Subtract: 2,144 – 820 = 1,324.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 82 x 10 = 820; Subtract: 1,324 – 820 = 504.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 82 x 6 = 492; Subtract: 504 – 492= 12.
partial quotient = 6
The remainder is 12;
Add partial quotient to find the whole number quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 6 = 36 R 12

Question 7.
892 ÷ 26
_____ R _____

34 R 8

Explanation:
Multiply 26 x 10 = 260; Subtract: 892 – 260 = 632.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 26 x 10 = 260; Subtract: 632 – 260 = 372.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 26 x 10 = 260; Subtract: 372 – 260 = 112.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 26 x 4 = 104; Subtract: 112 – 104 = 8.
partial quotient = 4
The remainder is 8;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 4 = 34 R 8

Question 8.
1,056 ÷ 48
_____

22

Explanation:
Multiply 48 x 10 = 480; Subtract: 1,056 – 480 = 576.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 48 x 10 = 480; Subtract: 576 – 480 = 96.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 48 x 2 = 96; Subtract: 96 – 96 = 0.
partial quotient = 2
The remainder is 0;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 2 = 22

Question 9.
2,950 ÷ 67
_____ R _____

44 R 2

Explanation:
Multiply 67 x 10 = 670; Subtract: 2,950 – 670 = 2,280.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 67 x 10 = 670; Subtract: 2,280 – 670 = 1,610.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 67 x 10 = 670; Subtract: 1,610 – 670 = 940.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 67 x 10 = 670; Subtract: 940 – 670 = 270.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 67 x 4= 268; Subtract: 270 – 268 = 2.
partial quotient = 4
The remainder is 2;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 4 = 44 R 2

Practice: Copy and Solve Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 10.
653 ÷ 42
_____ R _____

15 R 23

Explanation:
Multiply 42 x 10 = 420; Subtract: 653 – 420 = 233.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 42 x 5 = 210; Subtract: 233 – 210 = 23.
partial quotient = 5
The remainder is 23;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 5 = 15 R 23

Question 11.
946 ÷ 78
_____ R _____

12 R 10

Explanation:
Multiply 78 x 10 = 780; Subtract: 946 – 780 = 166.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 78 x 2 = 156; Subtract: 166 – 156 = 10.
partial quotient = 2
The remainder is 10;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 2 = 12 R 10

412 ÷ 18
_____ R _____

22 R 16

Explanation:
Multiply 18 x 10 = 180; Subtract: 412 – 180 = 232.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 18 x 10 = 180; Subtract: 232 – 180 = 52.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 18 x 2 = 36; Subtract: 52 – 36 = 16.
partial quotient = 2
The remainder is 16;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 2 = 22 R 16

Question 13.
871 ÷ 87
_____ R _____

10 R 1

Explanation:
Multiply 87 x 10 = 870; Subtract: 871 – 870 = 1.
partial quotient = 10
The remainder is 1;
10 R 1

Question 14.
1,544 ÷ 34
_____ R _____

45 R 14

Explanation:
Multiply 34 x 10 = 340; Subtract: 1,544 – 340 = 1,204.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34 x 10 = 340; Subtract: 1,204 – 340 = 864.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34 x 10 = 340; Subtract: 864 – 340 = 524.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34 x 10 = 340; Subtract: 524 – 340 = 184.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34 x 5 = 170; Subtract: 184 – 170 = 14.
partial quotient = 5
The remainder is 14;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 5 = 45 R 14

Question 15.
2,548 ÷ 52
_____ R _____

47 R 14

Explanation:
Multiply 52 x 10 = 520; Subtract: 2,548 – 520 = 2028.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 52 x 10 = 520; Subtract: 2028- 520 = 1508.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 52 x 10 = 520; Subtract: 1508- 520 = 988.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 52 x 10 = 520; Subtract: 988 – 520 = 468.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 52 x 9 = 468; Subtract: 468 – 468= 0.
partial quotient = 9
The remainder is 0;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 9 = 49 R 0

Question 16.
2,740 ÷ 83
_____ R _____

33 R 1

Explanation:
Multiply 83 x 10 = 830; Subtract: 2,740 – 830= 1910.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 83 x 10 = 830; Subtract: 1910 – 830= 1080.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 83 x 10 = 830; Subtract: 1080 – 830= 250.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 83 x 3 = 249; Subtract: 250 – 249 = 1.
partial quotient = 3
The remainder is 1;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 3 = 33 R 1

Question 17.
4,135 ÷ 66
_____ R _____

62 R 43

Explanation:
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 4,135 – 660 = 3475.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 3475 – 660 = 2815.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 2815 – 660 = 2155.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 2155 – 660 = 1495.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 1495 – 660 = 835.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 10 = 660; Subtract: 835 – 660 = 175.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 66 x 2 = 132; Subtract: 175 – 132 = 43.
partial quotient = 2
The remainder is 43;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 2 = 62 R 43

### Partial Quotients – Problem Solving – Page No. 76

Use the table to solve 18–20 and 22.

Question 18.
How many years would it take for a person in the United States to eat 855 pounds of apples?
_____ years

45 years

Explanation:
Each year a person eats 19 pounds of apples. So, to eat 855 pounds of apples, it takes 855/19 = 45 years.

Question 19.
How many years would it take for a person in the United States to eat 1,120 pounds of turkey?
_____ years

80 years

Explanation:
Each year a person eats 14 pounds of turkey. So, to eat 1,120 pounds of turkey, it takes 1,120/14 = 80 years.

Question 20.
If 6 people in the United States each eat the average amount of popcorn for 5 years, how many quarts of popcorn will they eat?
_____ quarts

2,040 quarts

Explanation:
1 person eats 68 quarts of popcorn each year. 6 people = 6 x 68 quarts of popcorn = 408 quarts of popcorn for each year.
For 5 years, they will eat popcorn = 5 x 408 = 2,040 quarts

Question 21.
In a study, 9 people ate a total of 1,566 pounds of potatoes in 2 years. If each person ate the same amount each year, how many pounds of potatoes did each person eat in 1 year?
_____ pounds

87 pounds

Explanation:
9 people ate a total of 1,566 pounds of potatoes in 2 years. If each person ate the same amount each year, 1,566/2 = 783.
To calculate how many pounds of potatoes did each person eat in 1 year, 783/9 = 87 pounds.

Question 22.
Sense or Nonsense? In the United States, a person eats more than 40,000 pounds of bread in a lifetime if he or she lives to be 80 years old. Does this statement make sense, or is it nonsense? Explain.
__________

nonsense; 40,000 pounds / 80 years = 4,000 pounds / 8 years = 2,000 pounds (1 ton) / 4 years = 1,000 pounds / 2 years = 1,000 pounds / 2 years = 500 pounds per year = almost 1 and 1/2 pounds of bread every day of your life.

Question 23.
Test Prep The school auditorium has 448 seats arranged in 32 equal rows. How many seats are in each row?
Options:
a. 14,336
b. 480
c. 416
d. 14

d. 14

Explanation:
The school auditorium has 448 seats arranged in 32 equal rows.
Each row = 448/32 = 14

### Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 77

Concepts and Skills

Question 1.
Explain how estimating the quotient helps you place the first digit in the quotient of a division problem.
Type below:
__________

Let’s do 5980 divided by 347
Estimate: 6000/300 = 20
So, I now know my first digit will go into the 10’s place
or 57890 divided by 34
that is 60,000 divided by 30 = 2000
my first digit goes into the thousands place.

Question 2.
Explain how to use multiplication to check the answer to a division problem.
Type below:
__________

Take 739/9 = 82 R 1.
Check: 9 x 82 + 1 = 739.
divisor x quotient + remainder = dividend.

Divide.

Question 3.
633 ÷ 3 = _____

211

Explanation:
Divide integers 6/3 = 2
Multiply 3 x 2 = 6; Subtract 6 – 6 = 0
Write down 3 and divide integers 3/3 = 1.
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3. Subtract 3 – 3 = 0.
Write down 3 and divide integers 3/3 = 1.
Multiply 3 x 1 = 3. Subtract 3 – 3 = 0.
The remainder is 0.

Question 4.
487 ÷ 8 = _____ R _____

60 R 7

Explanation:
Divide integers 48/8 = 6
Multiply 8 x 6 = 48; Subtract 48 – 48 = 0
Write down 7;7 < 8.
The remainder is 7.
So, 60 R 7.

Question 5.
1,641 ÷ 4 = _____ R _____

410 R 1

Explanation:
Divide integers 16/4 = 4
Multiply 4 x 4 = 16; Subtract 16 – 16 = 0
Write down 4 and divide integers 4/4 = 1.
Multiply 4 x 1 = 4; Subtract 4 – 4 = 0
Write down 1; 1<4
The remainder is 1.
So, 410 R 1.

Question 6.
2,765 ÷ 9 = _____ R _____

307 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 27/9 = 3
Multiply 9 x 3 = 27; Subtract 27 – 27 = 0
Write down 65 and divide integers 65/9 = 7.
Multiply 9 x 7 = 63. Subtract 65 – 63 = 2.
The remainder is 2.
So, 307 R 2.

Divide. Use partial quotients.

Question 7.
156 ÷ 13 = _____

12

Explanation:
Multiply 13 x 10 = 130; Subtract: 156 – 130 = 26.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 13 x 2 = 26; Subtract: 26 – 26 = 0.
partial quotient = 2
The remainder is 0;
Add the partial quotient to find the whole number quotient;
10 +2 = 12 R 0

Question 8.
318 ÷ 53 = _____

6

Explanation:
Multiply 53 x 6 = 318; Subtract: 318 – 318= 0.
partial quotient = 6
The remainder is 0;
quotient = 6

Question 9.
1,562 ÷ 34 =
_____ r _____

45 R 32

Explanation:
Multiply 34  x 10 = 340; Subtract: 1,562 – 340 = 1,222.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34  x 10 = 340; Subtract: 1,222 – 340 = 882.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34  x 10 = 340; Subtract: 882 – 340 = 542.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34  x 10 = 340; Subtract: 542 – 340 = 202.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 34  x 5 = 170; Subtract: 202 – 170 = 32.
partial quotient = 5
The remainder is 32;
Add partial quotient to find the whole number quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 5 = 45 R 32

Question 10.
4,024 ÷ 68 =
_____ r _____

59 R 12

Explanation:
Multiply 68 x 10 = 680; Subtract: 4,024 – 680 = 3,344.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 68 x 10 = 680; Subtract: 3,344 – 680= 2664.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 68 x 10 = 680; Subtract: 2664 – 680 = 1984.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 68 x 10 = 680; Subtract: 1984 – 680= 1304.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 68 x 10 = 680; Subtract: 1304 – 680 = 624.
partial quotient = 10
Multiply 68 x 9 = 612; Subtract: 624 – 612 = 12.
partial quotient = 9
The remainder is 12;
Add partial quotient to find the wholenumber quotient;
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 9 = 59 R 12

### Mid-Chapter Checkpoint – Page No. 78

Question 11.
Emma is planning a party for 128 guests. If 8 guests can be seated at each table, how many tables will be needed for seating at the party?
_____ tables

16 tables

Explanation:
Emma is planning a party for 128 guests. If 8 guests can be seated at each table 128/8 = 16.

Question 12.
Tickets for the basketball game cost $14 each. If the sale of the tickets brought in$2,212, how many tickets were sold?
_____ tickets

158 tickets

Explanation:
Tickets for the basketball game cost $14 each. If the sale of the tickets brought in$2,212, $2,212/$14 = 158

Question 13.
Margo used 864 beads to make necklaces for the art club. She made 24 necklaces with the beads. If each necklace has the same number of beads, how many beads did Margo use for each necklace?
_____

Explanation:
Margo used 864 beads to make necklaces for the art club. She made 24 necklaces with the beads. If each necklace has the same number of beads, 864/24 = 36 beads

Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 2 Test Pdf Question 14.
Angie needs to buy 156 candles for a party. Each package has 8 candles. How many packages should Angie buy?
_____ packages

20 packages

Explanation:
Angie needs to buy 156 candles for a party. Each package has 8 candles.
156/8 = 20

Question 15.
Max delivers 8,520 pieces of mail in one year. About how many pieces of mail does he deliver in 2 months? Explain your steps.
_____ pieces

1,420 pieces

Explanation:
Max delivers 8,520 pieces of mail in one year.
So, for 12 months, 8,520/12 = 710.
To deliver in 2 months, 710 x 2 = 1,420

### Share and Show – Page No. 81

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates.

Question 1.
22)$$\overline { 154 }$$
140 ÷ 20 = _____
160 ÷ 20 = _____
Estimate: _____ ; _____

140 ÷ 20 = 7
160 ÷ 20 = 8
Estimate: 7 ; 8

Explanation:
Two sets of compatible numbers to find two different estimates are
140 ÷ 20
14 ÷ 2 = 7
140 ÷ 20 = 7
160 ÷ 20
16 ÷ 2 = 8
160 ÷ 20  = 8

Question 2.
68)$$\overline { 503 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

476 ÷ 68= 7
544 ÷ 68 = 8
Estimate: 7 ; 8

Explanation:
Multiples of 68:
68 136 204 272 340 408 476 544
Find multiples that are close to the dividend. Use either or both numbers to estimate the quotient.
476/68 = 7
544/68 = 8
The quotient is between 7 and 8.

Question 3.
81)$$\overline { 7,052 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

6400 ÷ 80 = 80
7200 ÷ 80 = 90
Estimate: 80 ; 90

Explanation:
6400/80
64/8 = 8
640 / 80 = 8
6400/80 = 800
7200/80
72/8 = 9
720/80 =9
7200/80 = 90
Estimate: 80, 90

Question 4.
33)$$\overline { 291 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

240 ÷ 30= 8
270 ÷ 30 = 9
Estimate: 8 ; 9

Explanation:
240/30
24/3 = 8
240/30 = 8
270/30
27/3 = 9
270/30 = 9
Estimate: 8, 9

Question 5.
58)$$\overline { 2,365 }$$
Estimate: _____ ;

2400 ÷ 60= 40
3000 ÷ 60 = 50
Estimate: 40 ; 50

Explanation:
2400/60
24/6 = 4
240/60 = 4
2400/60 = 40
3000/60
30/6 = 5
300/60 = 5
3000/60 = 50
Estimate: 40, 50

Question 6.
19)$$\overline { 5,312 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

5300 ÷ 20= 7
5320 ÷ 20 = 8
Estimate: 265 ; 266

Explanation:
5300/20
5300/20 = 265
5320/20
5320/20 = 266

Use compatible numbers to find two estimates.

Question 7.
42)$$\overline { 396 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

360 ÷ 40 = 9
400 ÷ 40 = 10
Estimate: 9 ; 10

Explanation:
360/40 = 9
400/40 = 10
Estimate: 9,10

Question 8.
59)$$\overline { 413 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

420 ÷ 60= 7
480 ÷ 60 = 8
Estimate: 7 ; 8

Explanation:
420/60 = 7
480/60 = 8

Question 9.
28)$$\overline { 232 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

240 ÷ 30 = 8
270÷ 30 = 9
Estimate: 8 ; 9

Explanation:
240/30 = 8
270/30 = 9
Estimate: 8 ; 9

How To Divide 5th Grade Lesson 2.3 Question 10.
22)$$\overline { 368 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

320 ÷ 20= 16
340 ÷ 20 = 17
Estimate: 16 ; 17

Explanation:
320/20 = 16
340/20 = 17
Estimate: 16 ; 17

Question 11.
78)$$\overline { 375 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

320 ÷ 80 = 4
400 ÷ 80 = 5
Estimate: 4 ; 5

Explanation:
320/80 = 4
400/80 = 5
Estimate: 16 ; 17

Question 12.
88)$$\overline { 6,080 }$$
Estimate: _____ ; _____

6210÷ 90= 69
6300 ÷ 90 = 70
Estimate: 69 ; 70

Explanation:
6210/90 = 69
6300/90 = 70

Question 13.
5,821 ÷ 71
Estimate: _____ ; _____

5180 ÷ 70 = 74
5250÷ 70 = 75
Estimate: 74 ; 75

Explanation:
5180/70 = 74
5250/70 = 75
Estimate: 74 ; 75

Question 14.
1,565 ÷ 67
Estimate: _____ ; _____

1610 ÷ 70 = 23
1680 ÷ 70 = 24
Estimate: 23 ; 24

Explanation:
1610/70 = 23
1680/70 = 24
Estimate: 23 ; 24

Question 15.
7,973 ÷ 91
Estimate: _____ ; _____

476 ÷ 90 = 87
544 ÷ 90 = 88
Estimate: 87 ; 88

Explanation:
6960/90 = 87
7920/90 = 88
Estimate: 87 ; 88

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 16.
19)$$\overline { 228 }$$
Estimate: _____

240 ÷ 20 = 12
260 ÷ 20 = 13
Estimate: 12 ; 13

Explanation:
240/20 = 12
260/20 = 13
Estimate: 12 ; 13

Question 17.
25)$$\overline { 595 }$$
Estimate: $_____ Answer: 575 ÷ 25 = 23 600 ÷ 25 = 24 Estimate: 23 ; 24 Explanation: 575/25 = 23 600/25 = 24 Estimate: 23 ; 24 Question 18. 86)$$\overline { 7,130 }$$ Estimate: _____ Answer: 7380 ÷ 90 = 82 7470 ÷ 90 = 83 Estimate: 82 ; 83 Explanation: 7380/90 = 82 7470/90 = 83 Estimate: 82 ; 83 Question 19. 83)$$\overline { 462 }$$ Estimate: _____ Answer: 400 ÷ 80 = 5 480 ÷ 80 = 6 Estimate: 5 ; 6 Explanation: 400/80 = 5 480/80 = 6 Estimate: 5 ; 6 Question 20. 27)$$\overline { 9,144 }$$ Estimate: _____ Answer: 10,140 ÷ 30 = 338 10,170 ÷ 30 = 339 Estimate: 338 ; 339 Explanation: 10,140/30 = 338 10,170/30 = 339 Estimate: 338 ; 339 Question 21. 68)$$\overline { 710 }$$ Estimate: _____ Answer: 700 ÷ 70 = 10 770 ÷ 70 = 11 Estimate: 10 ; 11 Explanation: 700/70 = 10 770/70 = 11 Estimate: 10 ; 11 Question 22. 707 ÷ 36 Estimate: _____ Answer: 760 ÷ 40 = 19 800 ÷ 40 = 20 Estimate: 19 ; 20 Explanation: 760/40 = 19 800/40 = 20 Estimate: 19 ; 20 Question 23. 1,198 ÷ 41 Estimate: _____ Answer: 1160 ÷ 40 = 29 1200 ÷ 40 = 30 Estimate: 29 ; 30 Explanation: 1160/40 = 29 1200/40 = 30 Estimate: 29 ; 30 Question 24. 5,581 ÷ 72 Estimate: _____ Answer: 5390 ÷ 70 = 77 5460 ÷ 70 = 78 Estimate: 77 ; 78 Explanation: 5390/70 = 77 5460/70 = 78 Estimate: 77 ; 78 ### Problem Solving – Page No. 82 Use the picture to solve 25–26. Question 25. About how many meters tall is each floor of the Williams Tower? _____ m Answer: 4.29 meters Explanation: Williams Tower has 275 meters and 64 floors. 275/64 = 4.29 meters Question 26. About how many meters tall is each floor of the Chrysler Building? _____ m Answer: 4.142 m Explanation: Chrysler Building has 319 meters and 77 floors 319/77 = 4.142 Question 27. Eli needs to save$235. To earn money, he plans to mow lawns and charge $21 for each. Write two estimates Eli could use to determine the number of lawns he needs to mow. Decide which estimate you think is the better one for Eli to use. Explain your reasoning. Type below: __________ Answer: 220/20 = 11 Explanation: Calculate$235/$21 210/21 = 10 220/20 = 11 number 220 is closer to 235. So, the better estimate is 220/20 = 11. Question 28. Explain how you know whether the quotient of 298 ÷ 31 is closer to 9 or to 10. Type below: __________ Answer: 270/30 = 9 310/31 = 10 298 is closer to 270. So, the quotient is closer to 9 than 10. Question 29. Test Prep Anik built a tower of cubes. It was 594 millimeters tall. The height of each cube was 17 millimeters. About how many cubes did Anik use? Options: a. 10 b. 16 c. 30 d. 300 Answer: c. 30 Explanation: 594/17 540/18 = 30 600/15 = 40 So, Anik use 30 cubes ### Share and Show – Page No. 85 Divide. Check your answer. Question 1. 28)$$\overline { 620 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 22 R 4 Explanation: Divide integers 62/28 = 2 Multiply 28 x 2 = 56; Subtract 62 – 56 = 6 Write down 60 and divide integers 60/28 = 2. Multiply 28 x 2 = 56. Subtract 60 – 56 = 4. The remainder is 4. So, 22 R 4. Check: 22 x 28 = 616; 616 + 4 = 620 620 = 620 Question 2. 64)$$\overline { 842 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 13 R 10 Explanation: Divide integers 84/64 = 1 Multiply 64 x 1 = 64; Subtract 84 – 64 = 20 Write down 202 and divide integers 202/64 = 3. Multiply 64 x 3 = 192. Subtract 202 – 192 = 10. The remainder is 10. So, 13 R 10. Check: 64 x 13 = 832; 832 + 10 = 842 842 = 842 Go Math Grade 5 Lesson 2.4 Answer Key Question 3. 53)$$\overline { 2,340 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 44 R 8 Explanation: Divide integers 234/53 = 4 Multiply 53 x 4 = 212; Subtract 234 – 212 = 22 Write down 220 and divide integers 220/53 = 4. Multiply 53 x 4 = 212. Subtract 220 – 212 = 8. The remainder is 8. So, 44 R 8. Check: 53 x 44 = 2332; 2332 + 8 = 2340 2340 = 2340 Question 4. 723 ÷ 31 _____ R _____ Answer: 23 R 10 Explanation: Divide integers 72/31 = 2 Multiply 31 x 2 = 62; Subtract 72 – 62 = 10 Write down 103 and divide integers 103/31 = 3. Multiply 31 x 3 = 93. Subtract 103 – 93 = 10. The remainder is 10. So, 23 R 10. Check: 31 x 23 = 713; 713 + 10 = 723 723 = 723 Question 5. 1,359 ÷ 45 _____ R _____ Answer: 30 R 9 Explanation: Divide integers 135/45 = 3 Multiply 45 x 3 = 62; Subtract 135 – 135 = 0 Write down 9; 9<45 The remainder is 9. So, 30 R 9. Check: 45 x 30 = 1350; 1350 + 9 = 1359 1359 = 1359 Question 6. 7,925 ÷ 72 _____ R _____ Answer: 110 R 5 Explanation: Divide integers 79/72 = 1 Multiply 72 x 1 = 72; Subtract 79 – 72 = 7 Write down 72 and divide integers 72/72= 1. Multiply 72 x 1 = 72; Subtract 72 – 72 = 0 Write down 5; 5<72 The remainder is 5. So, 110 R 5. Check: 72 x 110 = 7920; 7920 + 5 = 7925 7925 = 7925 On Your Own Divide. Check your answer. Question 7. 16)$$\overline { 346 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: Explanation: Divide integers 34/16 = 2 Multiply 16 x 2 = 32; Subtract 34 – 32 = 2 Write down 26 and divide integers 26/16= 1. Multiply 16 x 1 = 16; Subtract 26 – 16 = 10 The remainder is 10. So, 21 R 10. Check: 16 x 21 = 336; 336 + 10 = 346 346 = 346 Question 8. 34)$$\overline { 241 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 7 R 3 Explanation: Divide integers 241/34 = 7 Multiply 34 x 7 = 238; Subtract 241 – 238= 3 The remainder is 3. So, 7 R 3 Check: 34 x 7 = 238; 238 + 3 = 241 241 = 241 Question 9. 77)$$\overline { 851 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 11 R 4 Explanation: Divide integers 85/77 = 1 Multiply 77 x 1 = 77; Subtract 85 – 77 = 8 Write down 81 and divide integers 81/77= 1. Multiply 77 x 1 = 77; Subtract 81 – 77 = 4 The remainder is 4. So, 11 R 4. Check: 77 x 11 = 847; 847 + 4 = 851 851 = 851 Question 10. 21)$$\overline { 1,098 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 52 R 6 Explanation: Divide integers 109/21 = 5 Multiply 21 x 5 = 105; Subtract 109 – 105= 4 Write down 48 and divide integers 48/21 = 2. Multiply 21 x 2 = 42; Subtract 48 – 42 = 6 The remainder is 6. So, 52 R 6. Check: 21 x 52 = 1092; 1092 + 6 = 1098 1098 = 1098 Question 11. 32)$$\overline { 6,466 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 202 R 2 Explanation: Divide integers 64/32= 2 Multiply 32 x 2 = 64; Subtract 64 – 64 = 0 Write down 66 and divide integers 66/32 = 2. Multiply 32 x 2 = 64; Subtract 66 – 64 = 2 The remainder is 2. So, 202 R 2. Check: 32 x 202 = 6464; 6464 + 2 = 6466 6466 = 6466 Question 12. 45)$$\overline { 9,500 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 211 R 5 Explanation: Divide integers 95/45 = 2 Multiply 45 x 2 = 90; Subtract 95 – 90 = 5 Write down 50 and divide integers 50/45 = 1. Multiply 45 x 1 = 45; Subtract 50 – 45 = 5 Write down 50 and divide integers 50/45 = 1. Multiply 45 x 1 = 45; Subtract 50 – 45 = 5 The remainder is 5. So, 211 R 5. Check: 45 x 211 = 9495; 9495 + 5 = 9500 9500 = 9500 Question 13. 483 ÷ 21 _____ Answer: 23 Explanation: Divide integers 48/21 = 2 Multiply 21 x 2 = 42; Subtract 48 – 42 = 6 Write down 63 and divide integers 63/21 = 3. Multiply 21 x 3 = 63; Subtract 63 – 63 = 0 The remainder is 0. So, 23 R 0. Check: 23 x 21 = 483; 483 = 483 Question 14. 2,292 ÷ 19 _____ R _____ Answer: 120 R 12 Explanation: Divide integers 22/19 = 1 Multiply 19 x 1 = 19; Subtract 22 – 19 = 3 Write down 39 and divide integers 39/19 = 2. Multiply 19 x 2 = 38; Subtract 39 – 38 = 1 Write down 12; 12<19 The remainder is 12. So, 120 R 12. Check: 19 x 120 = 2280; 2280 + 12 = 2,292 2,292 = 2,292 Question 15. 4,255 ÷ 30 _____ R _____ Answer: 141 R 25 Explanation: Divide integers 42/30 = 1 Multiply 30 x 1 = 30; Subtract 42 – 30 = 12 Write down 125 and divide integers 125/30 = 4. Multiply 30 x 4 = 120; Subtract 125 – 120 = 5 Write down 55 and divide integers 55/30 = 1. Multiply 30 x 1 = 30; Subtract 55 – 30 = 25 The remainder is 25. So, 141 R 25. Check: 30 x 141 = 4230; 4230 + 25 = 4,255 4,255 = 4,255 Practice: Copy and Solve Divide. Check your answer. Question 16. 775 ÷ 35 _____ R _____ Answer: 22 R 5 Explanation: Divide integers 77/35 = 2 Multiply 35 x 2 = 70; Subtract 77 – 70 = 7 Write down 75 and divide integers 75/35 = 2. Multiply 35 x 2 = 70; Subtract 75 – 70 = 5 The remainder is 5. So, 22 R 5. Check: 22 x 35 = 770; 770 + 5 = 775 775 = 775 Go Math Grade 5 Student Edition Question 17. 820 ÷ 41 _____ Answer: 20 Explanation: Divide integers 82/41 = 2 Multiply 41 x 2 = 82; Subtract 82 – 82= 0 The remainder is 0. So, 20 R 0. Check: 41 x 20 = 820; 820 = 820 Question 18. 805 ÷ 24 _____ R _____ Answer: 33 R 13 Explanation: Divide integers 80/24 = 3 Multiply 24 x 3 = 72; Subtract 80 – 72 = 8 Write down 85 and divide integers 85/24 = 3. Multiply 24 x 3 = 72; Subtract 85 – 72 = 13 The remainder is 13. So, 33 R 13. Check: 24 x 33 = 792; 792 + 13 = 805 805 = 805 Question 19. 1,166 ÷ 53 _____ R _____ Answer: 22 R 0 Explanation: Divide integers 116/53 = 2 Multiply 53 x 2 = 106; Subtract 116 – 106= 10 Write down 106 and divide integers 106/53 = 2. Multiply 53 x 2 = 106; Subtract 106 – 106= 0 The remainder is 0. So, 22 R 0. Check: 53 x 22 = 1166; 1166 = 1166 Question 20. 1,989 ÷ 15 _____ R _____ Answer: 132 R 9 Explanation: Divide integers 19/15 = 1 Multiply 15 x 1 = 15; Subtract 19 – 15 = 4 Write down 48 and divide integers 48/15 = 3. Multiply 15 x 3 = 45; Subtract 48 – 45 = 3 Write down 39 and divide integers 39/15 = 2. Multiply 15 x 2 = 30; Subtract 39 – 30= 9 The remainder is 9. So, 132 R 9. Check: 15 x 132 = 1980; 1980 + 9 = 1989 1989 = 1989 Question 21. 3,927 ÷ 35 _____ R _____ Answer: 112 R 7 Explanation: Divide integers 39/35 = 1 Multiply 35 x 1 = 35; Subtract 39 – 35 = 4 Write down 42 and divide integers 42/35 = 1. Multiply 35 x 1 = 35; Subtract 42 – 35 = 7 Write down 77 and divide integers 77/35 = 2. Multiply 35 x 2 = 70; Subtract 77 – 70 = 7 The remainder is 7. So, 112 R 7. Check: 35 x 112 = 3920; 3920 + 7 = 3927 3927 = 3927 ### Problem Solving – Page No. 86 Use the list at the right to solve 22–24. Question 22. A smoothie shop receives a delivery of 980 ounces of grape juice. How many Royal Purple smoothies can be made with the grape juice? _____ smoothies Answer: 45 smoothies Explanation: A smoothie shop receives a delivery of 980 ounces of grape juice. 980 ounces of grape juice/22 ounces of grape juice = 45 Question 23. The shop has 1,260 ounces of cranberry juice and 650 ounces of passion fruit juice. If the juices are used to make Crazy Cranberry smoothies, which juice will run out first? How much of the other juice will be left over? Type below: _________ Answer: The shop has 1,260 ounces of cranberry juice and 650 ounces of passion fruit juice. If the juices are used to make Crazy Cranberry smoothies, passion fruit juice will run out first. Because 650<1,260. So, passion fruit juice will run out first. 1,260 – 650 =610 Crazy Cranberry juice will be left over. Question 24. In the refrigerator, there are 680 ounces of orange juice and 410 ounces of mango juice. How many Orange Tango smoothies can be made? Explain your reasoning. _____ smoothies Answer: In the refrigerator, there are 680 ounces of orange juice and 410 ounces of mango juice. So, 410 Orange Tango smoothies can be made. Because there are 410 ounces of mango juices available. Question 25. Test Prep James has 870 action figures. He decides to divide them equally among 23 boxes. How many action figures will James have left over? Options: a. 19 b. 23 c. 31 d. 37 Answer: d. 37 Explanation: James has 870 action figures. He decides to divide them equally among 23 boxes. 870/23 = 37 ### Share and Show – Page No. 89 Interpret the remainder to solve. Question 1. Erika and Bradley want to hike the Big Cypress Trail. They will hike a total of 75 miles. If Erika and Bradley plan to hike for 12 days, how many miles will they hike each day? a. Divide to find the quotient and remainder. _____ R _____ Answer: 6 R 3 Explanation: 75/12 = 6 The remainder is 3 6 R 3 Question 1. b. Decide how to use the quotient and remainder to answer the question. Type below: _________ Answer: 75/12 = 6 1/4 So, Each day they will hike 6$$\frac{1}{4}$$ miles. Question 2. What if Erika and Bradley want to hike 14 miles each day? How many days will they hike exactly 14 miles? _____ days Answer: 196 days Explanation: If Erika and Bradley want to hike 14 miles each day, 14 x 14 = 196 days Question 3. Dylan’s hiking club is planning to stay overnight at a camping lodge. Each large room can hold 15 hikers. There are 154 hikers. How many rooms will they need? _____ rooms Answer: 11 rooms Explanation: Dylan’s hiking club is planning to stay overnight at a camping lodge. Each large room can hold 15 hikers. There are 154 hikers. So, 154/15 = 10 and the remainder is 4. Dylan’s hiking club require 10 rooms for 150 hikers and other room for 4 hikers. So, in total they need 10 + 1 = 11 rooms. On Your Own Interpret the remainder to solve. Question 4. The students in a class of 24 share 84 cookies equally among them. How many cookies did each student eat? _____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ cookies Answer: 3$$\frac{1}{2}$$ cookies Explanation: The students in a class of 24 share 84 cookies equally among them. So, 84/24 = 3$$\frac{12}{24}$$ = 3$$\frac{1}{2}$$ Question 5. A campground has cabins that can each hold 28 campers. There are 148 campers visiting the campground. How many cabins are full if 28 campers are in each cabin? _____ cabins Answer: 5$$\frac{1}{7}$$ cabins Explanation: A campground has cabins that can each hold 28 campers. There are 148 campers visiting the campground. 184/28 = 5$$\frac{1}{7}$$ Question 6. A total of 123 fifth-grade students are going to Fort Verde State Historic Park. Each bus holds 38 students. All of the buses are full except one. How many students will be in the bus that is not full? _____ students Answer: 9 students Explanation: A total of 123 fifth-grade students are going to Fort Verde State Historic Park. Each bus holds 38 students. 123/38 = 3 and the remainder is 9. 3 x 38 = 114 students. 1 bus is not full. So, 9 students will be in the bus that is not full Question 7. What’s the Error? Sheila is going to divide a 36-inch piece of ribbon into 5 equal pieces. She says each piece will be 7 inches long. Type below: _________ Answer: Sheila is going to divide a 36-inch piece of ribbon into 5 equal pieces. 36/5 = 7$$\frac{1}{5}$$. She said each piece will be 7 inches long and forgot about $$\frac{1}{5}$$ part. ### UNLOCK the Problem – Page No. 90 Question 8. Maureen has 243 ounces of trail mix. She puts an equal number of ounces in each of 15 bags. How many ounces of trail mix does Maureen have left over? a. What do you need to find? Answer: We need to find how many ounces of trail mix does Maureen have left over? Question 8. b. How will you use division to find how many ounces of trail mix are left over? Type below: _________ Answer: The division is 243/15 Question 8. c. Show the steps you use to solve the problem. Type below: _________ Answer: 243/15 Divide integers 24/15 = 1 Multiply 15 x 1 = 15; Subtract 24 – 15 = 9 Write down 93 and divide integers 93/3 = 6. Multiply 15 x 6 = 90. Subtract 93 – 90 = 3. The remainder is 3. So, 16 R 3. Question 8. d. Complete the sentences. Maureen has _______ ounces of trail mix. She puts an equal number in each of _______ bags. Each bag has _______ ounces. Maureen has _______ ounces of trail mix left over. Type below: _________ Answer: Maureen has 243 ounces of trail mix. She puts an equal number in each of 15 bags. Each bag has 16 ounces. Maureen has 3 ounces of trail mix left over. Question 8. e. Fill in the bubble completely to show your answer. Options: a. 3 ounces b. 15 ounces c. 16 ounces d. 17 ounces Answer: c. 16 ounces Question 9. Mr. Field wants to give each of his 72 campers a certificate for completing an obstacle course. If there are 16 certificates in one package, how many packages will Mr. Field need? Options: a. 4 b. 5 c. 16 d. 17 Answer: b. 5 Explanation: Mr. Field wants to give each of his 72 campers a certificate for completing an obstacle course. If there are 16 certificates in one package, 72/16 = 4.5 Question 10. James has 884 feet of rope. There are 12 teams of hikers. If James gives an equal amount of rope to each team, how much rope will each team receive? Options: a. 12 b. 73 c. 73 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ d. 74 Answer: b. 73 Explanation: James has 884 feet of rope. There are 12 teams of hikers. If James gives an equal amount of rope to each team, 884/12 = 73 ### Share and Show – Page No. 92 Adjust the estimated digit in the quotient, if needed. Then divide. Question 1. 4 41)$$\overline { 1,546 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 37 R 29 Explanation: 41 x 4 = 164; Subtract: 154 – 164 the estimate too high. Change the quotient to 3 41 x 3 = 123; Subtract: 154 – 123 = 31 Write down 316 and divide integers 316/41 41 x 7 = 287; Subtract: 316 – 287 = 29 37 R 29 Question 2. 2 16)$$\overline { 416 }$$ _____ Answer: 26 Explanation: 16 x 2 = 32; Subtract: 41 – 32 = 9 Write down 96 and divide integers 96/16 16 x 6 = 96; Subtract: 96 – 96 = 0 26 Question 3. 9 34)$$\overline { 2,831 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 83 R 9 Explanation: 34 x 9 = 306; Subtract: 283 – 306 the estimate too high. Change the quotient to 8 34 x 8 = 272; Subtract: 283 – 272 = 11 Write down 111 and divide integers 111/34 34 x 3 = 102; Subtract: 111 – 102 = 9 83 R 9 Divide. Question 4. 19)$$\overline { 915 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 48 R 3 Explanation: 900/18 = 50 19 x 5 = 95; Subtract: 91 – 95 the estimate too high. Change the quotient to 4 19 x 4 = 76; Subtract: 91 – 76 = 15 Write down 155 and divide integers 155/19 19 x 7 = 133; Subtract: 155 – 133 = 22 22 > 19; So Change the quotient to 8 19 x 8 = 152; Subtract: 155 – 152 = 3 48 R 3 Question 5. 28)$$\overline { 1,825 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: Explanation: 1800/30 = 60 28 x 6 = 168; Subtract: 182 – 168 = 14 Write down 145 and divide integers 145/28 28 x 5 = 140; Subtract: 145 – 140 = 5 65 R 5 Question 6. 45)$$\overline { 3,518 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: Explanation: 3600/40 = 90 45 x 9 = 405; Subtract: 351 – 405 the estimate too high. Change the quotient to 7 45 x 7 = 315; Subtract: 351 – 315 = 36 Write down 368 and divide integers 368/45 45 x 8 = 360; Subtract: 368 – 315 = 8 78 R 8 ### On Your Own – Page No. 93 Adjust the estimated digit in the quotient, if needed. Then divide. Question 7. 2 26)$$\overline { 541 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 20 R 21 Explanation: 500/25 = 2 26 x 2 = 52; Subtract: 54 – 52 = 2 Write down 21 and divide integers 21/26 20 R 21 Question 8. 1 43)$$\overline { 688 }$$ _____ Answer: 16 Explanation: 800/40 = 20 43 x 2 = 86; Subtract: 68 – 86 the estimate is too high. Change the quotient to 1 43 x 1 = 43; Subtract: 68 – 43 = 25 Write down 258 and divide integers 258/43 43 x 6 = 258; Subtract: 258 – 258 = 0 So, 16 Question 9. 6 67)$$\overline { 4,873 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 72 R 49 Explanation: 4800/70 = 60 67 x 6 = 402; Subtract: 487 – 402 = 85 the estimate is too low. Change the quotient to 7 67 x 7 = 469; Subtract: 487 – 469 = 18 Write down 183 and divide integers 183/67 67 x 2 = 134; Subtract: 183 – 134 = 49 72 R 49 Question 10. 15)$$\overline { 975 }$$ _____ Answer: 65 Explanation: 15 x 6 = 90; Subtract 97 – 90 = 7 Write down 75 and divide integers 75/15 15 x 5 = 75; Subtract: 75 – 75 = 0 So, 65 Question 11. 37)$$\overline { 264 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 7 R 5 Explanation: 240/40 = 6 37 x 6 = 222; Subtract: 264 – 222 = 42 The estimate is too low. Change the quotient to 7 37 x 7 = 259; Subtract: 264 – 259 = 5 7 R 5 Question 12. 22)$$\overline { 6,837 }$$ _____ R _____ Answer: 310 R 17 Explanation: 6300/20 = 325 22 x 3 = 66; Subtract: 68 – 66 = 2 Write down 23 and divide integers 23/22 22 x 1 = 22; Subtract: 23 – 22 = 1 Write down 17; 17 < 22 310 R 17 Practice: Copy and Solve Divide. Question 13. 452 ÷ 31 _____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 14$$\frac{18}{31}$$ Explanation: Divide integers 45/31 = 1 Multiply 31 x 1 = 31; Subtract 45 – 31 = 14 Write down 142 and divide integers 142/31 = 4. Multiply 31 x 4 = 124. Subtract 142 – 124 = 18. The remainder is 18. So, 14 R 18. 14$$\frac{18}{31}$$ Question 14. 592 ÷ 74 _____ Answer: 8 Explanation: Divide integers 592/74 = 8 So, 8. Question 15. 785 ÷ 14 _____ R _____ Answer: 56$$\frac{1}{14}$$ Explanation: Divide integers 78/14 = 5 Multiply 14 x 5 = 70; Subtract 78 – 70 = 8 Write down 85 and divide integers 85/14 = 6. Multiply 14 x 6 = 84. Subtract 85 – 84 = 1. The remainder is 1. So, 56 R 1. 56$$\frac{1}{14}$$ Question 16. 601 ÷ 66 _____ R _____ Answer: 9 R 7 Explanation: Divide integers 601/66 = 9 Multiply 66 x 9 = 594 ; Subtract 601 – 594= 7 The remainder is 7. So, 9 R 7. 9$$\frac{7}{66}$$ Question 17. 1,067 ÷ 97 _____ Answer: 11 Explanation: Divide integers 106/97 = 1 Multiply 97 x 1 = 97; Subtract 106 – 97 = 9 Write down 97 and divide integers 97/97 = 1 Multiply 97 x 1 = 97; Subtract 97 – 97 = 0 The remainder is 0. So, 11 is the answer. Question 18. 2,693 ÷ 56 _____ R _____ Answer: 48 R 5 Explanation: Divide integers 269/56 = 4 Multiply 56 x 4 = 224; Subtract 269 – 224 = 45 Write down 453 and divide integers 453/56 = 8 Multiply 56 x 8 = 448. Subtract 453 – 448 = 5. The remainder is 5. So, 48 R 5. Question 19. 1,488 ÷ 78 _____ R _____ Answer: 19 R 6 Explanation: Divide integers 148/78 = 1 Multiply 78 x 1 = 78; Subtract 148 – 78 = 70 Write down 708 and divide integers 708/78 = 9. Multiply 78 x 9 = 702. Subtract 708 – 702 = 6. The remainder is 6. So, 19 R 6. Question 20. 2,230 ÷ 42 _____ R _____ Answer: 53 R 4 Explanation: Divide integers 223/42 = 5 Multiply 42 x 5 = 210; Subtract 223 – 210 = 13 Write down 130 and divide integers 130/42 = 3. Multiply 42 x 3 = 126. Subtract 130 – 126 = 4. The remainder is 4. So, 53 R 4. Question 21. 4,295 ÷ 66 _____ R _____ Answer: 65 R 5 Explanation: Divide integers 429/66 = 6 Multiply 66 x 6 = 396; Subtract 429 – 396 = 33 Write down 335 and divide integers 335/66 = 5. Multiply 66 x 5 = 330. Subtract 335 – 330 = 5. The remainder is 5 So, 65 R 5 Algebra Write the unknown number for each ■. Question 22. ■ ÷ 33 = 11 ■ = _____ Answer: 363 Explanation: n ÷ 33 = 11 n = 11 x 33 = 363 Question 23. 1,092 ÷ 52 = ■ ■ = _____ Answer: 21 Explanation: 1,092 ÷ 52 = 21 Question 24. 429 ÷ ■ = 33 ■ = _____ Answer: 13 Explanation: 429 ÷ n = 33 n = 429 ÷ 33 n = 13 ### UNLOCK the Problem – Page No. 94 Question 25. A banquet hall serves 2,394 pounds of turkey during a 3-week period. If the same amount is served each day, how many pounds of turkey does the banquet hall serve each day? a. What do you need to find? Type below: _________ Answer: How many Lbs at turkey do they serve each day? Question 25. b. What information are you given? Type below: _________ Answer: Every 3 weeks, serves 2,394 lbs. Question 25. c. What other information will you use? Type below: _________ Answer: Same each day, 3 weeks = 21 days Question 25. d. Find how many days there are in 3 weeks. There are ______ days in 3 weeks. Type below: _________ Answer: There are ______ days in 3 weeks Explanation: 1 week = 7 days. 3 x 7 = 21 days Question 25. e. Divide to solve the problem. Type below: _________ Answer: 2394/3 = t t = 798 798/7 = 114 pounds Question 25. f. Fill in the bubble for the correct answer choice. Options: a. 50,274 pounds b. 798 pounds c. 342 pounds d. 114 pounds Answer: d. 114 pounds Adjust Quotients Lesson 2.8 Go Math Grade 5 Partial Quotients Question 26. Marcos mixes 624 ounces of lemonade. He wants to fill the 52 cups he has with equal amounts of lemonade. How much lemonade should he put in each cup? Options: a. 8 ounces b. 12 ounces c. 18 ounces d. 20 ounces Answer: b. 12 ounces Explanation: Marcos mixes 624 ounces of lemonade. He wants to fill the 52 cups he has with equal amounts of lemonade. 624/52 = 12 ounces. 12 ounces should he put in each cup Question 27. The Box of Sox company packs 18 pairs of socks in a box. How many boxes will the company need to pack 810 pairs of socks? Options: a. 40 b. 45 c. 55 d. 56 Answer: b. 45 Explanation: The Box of Sox company packs 18 pairs of socks in a box. So, for 810 pairs of socks, 810/18 = 45 ### Share and Show – Page No. 97 Question 1. Paula caught a tarpon with a weight that was 10 times as great as the weight of a permit fish she caught. The total weight of the two fish was 132 pounds. How much did each fish weigh? First, draw one box to represent the weight of the permit fish and ten boxes to represent the weight of the tarpon. Next, divide the total weight of the two fish by the total number of boxes you drew. Place the quotient in each box. Last, find the weight of each fish. The permit fish weighed _____ pounds. The tarpon weighed _____ pounds. Type below: _________ Answer: The permit fish weighed 12 pounds. The tarpon weighed 120 pounds. Explanation: Let S be the weight of a permit fish Paula caught. The weight of the tarpon is 10 times as great as the weight of a permit fish she caught = 10 S The total weight of the two fish was 132 pounds. S + 10S = 132 11S = 132 S = 132/11 = 12 So, Paula caught a fish with the weight of 12 pounds. The tarpon weighted 120 pounds. Question 2. What if the weight of the tarpon was 11 times the weight of the permit fish, and the total weight of the two fish was 132 pounds? How much would each fish weigh? permit fish: _________ pounds tarpon: _________ pounds Answer: permit fish: 11 pounds tarpon: 11 x 11 = 121 pounds Explanation: Let S be the weight of a permit fish Paula caught. The weight of the tarpon is 11 times as great as the weight of a permit fish she caught = 11S Total weight is 132 11S + S = 132 12S = 132 S = 132/12 = 11. permit fish: 11 pounds tarpon: 11 x 11 = 121 pounds Question 3. Jon caught four fish that weighed a total of 252 pounds. The kingfish weighed twice as much as the amberjack and the white marlin weighed twice as much as the kingfish. The weight of the tarpon was 5 times the weight of the amberjack. How much did each fish weigh? amberjack: _________ pounds kingfish: _________ pounds marlin: _________ pounds tarpon: _________ pounds Answer: amberjack: 21 pounds kingfish: 42 pounds marlin: 84 pounds tarpon: 105 pounds Explanation: Let S be the weight of the amberjack. The kingfish weighed twice as much as the amberjack = 2S The white marlin weighed twice as much as the kingfish = 2 X 2S = 4S The weight of the tarpon was 5 times the weight of the amberjack = 5S Total weight = 252 pounds. 2S + 4S + 5S + S = 252 12S = 252 S = 252/12 S = 21. The kingfish weighed twice as much as the amberjack = 2S = 2 x 21 = 42 pounds. The white marlin weighed twice as much as the kingfish = 2 X 2S = 4S = 4 x 21 = 84 pounds. The weight of the tarpon was 5 times the weight of the amberjack = 5S = 5 x 21 = 105 pounds. ### On Your Own – Page No. 98 Use the table to solve 4–7. Question 4. Kevin is starting a saltwater aquarium with 36 fish. He wants to start with 11 times as many damselfish as clown fish. How many of each fish will Kevin buy? How much will he pay for the fish? Type below: _________ Answer: Kevin is starting a saltwater aquarium with 36 fish. He uses 1 damselfish and 11 clown fish. So, three groups form for 36 fishes. 1 damselfish and 11 clown fish =$7 + (11 x $20) = 7 + 220 = 227 He buys 3 damselfish and 33 clown fish. 3 x 7 = 21$ for damselfish and 33 x 20 = 660 for clown fish.
Each fish = 681/36 = 19

Kevin used a store coupon to buy a 40-gallon tank, an aquarium light, and a filtration system. He paid a total of $240. How much money did Kevin save by using the coupon?$ _____

$25 Explanation: 40-gallon tank =$170
aquarium light = $30 filtration system =$65
170 + 30 + 65 = 265
He paid a total of $240; 265 -240 =$25
Kevin save by using the coupon $25. Question 6. Kevin bought 3 bags of gravel to cover the bottom of his fish tank. He has 8 pounds of gravel left over. How much gravel did Kevin use to cover the bottom of the tank? _____ pounds Answer: 37 pounds. Explanation: 15lb bag of gravel =$13.
3 bags of gravel = 45lb.
He has 8 pounds of gravel left over = 45 – 8 = 37
Kevin use 37 pounds of gravel to cover the bottom of the tank

Question 7.
Pose a Problem Look back at Problem 6. Write a similar problem by changing the number of bags of gravel and the amount of gravel left.
Type below:
_________

If he bought 5 bags of gravel to cover the bottom of his fish tank. He has 10 pounds of gravel left over.
5 bags of gravel = 15 x 5 = 75lbs
He has 10 pounds of gravel left over = 75 – 10 lbs = 65 lbs
65lbs

Explanation:

Question 8.
Test Prep Captain James offers a deep-sea fishing tour. He charges $2,940 for a 14-hour trip. How much does each hour of the tour cost? Options: a.$138
b. $201 c.$210
d. $294 Answer: c.$210

Explanation:
Captain James offers a deep-sea fishing tour. He charges $2,940 for a 14-hour trip. Each hour =$2940/14 = 210

### Chapter Review/Test – Vocabulary – Page No. 99

Choose the best term from the box.

Question 1.
You can to estimate quotients because they are easy
use _________ to compute with mentally

Compatible Numbers

Question 2.
To decide where to place the first digit in the
quotient, you can estimate or use _________

Place Value

Concepts and Skills

Use compatible numbers to estimate the quotient.

Question 3.
522 ÷ 6 = _____

90

Explanation:
522 is close to 540. 540 ÷ 6 = 90

Question 4.
1,285 ÷ 32 = _____

40

Explanation:
1,280 ÷ 32 = 40

Question 5.
6,285 ÷ 89 = _____

70

Explanation:
6,300 ÷ 90 = 70

Question 6.
2)$$\overline { 554 }$$ = _____

277

Explanation:
Divide integers 5/2 = 2
Multiply 2 x 2 = 4; Subtract 5 – 4 = 1
Write down 15 and divide integers 15/2 = 7.
Multiply 2 x 7 = 14. Subtract 15 – 14 = 1
Write down 14 and divide integers 14/2 = 7.
Multiply 2 x 7 = 14. Subtract 14 – 14 = 0
The remainder is 0.

Question 7.
8)$$\overline { 680 }$$ = _____

85

Explanation:
Divide integers 68/8 = 8
Multiply 8 x 8 = 64; Subtract 68 – 64 = 4
Write down 40 and divide integers 40/8 = 5.
Multiply 8 x 5 = 40. Subtract 40 – 40 = 0
The remainder is 0.

Question 8.
5)$$\overline { 462 }$$ = _____ R _____

92 R 2

Explanation:
Divide integers 46/5 = 9
Multiply 5 x 9 = 45; Subtract 46 – 45 = 1
Write down 12 and divide integers 12/5 = 2.
Multiply 5 x 2 = 10. Subtract 12 – 10 = 2
The remainder is 2.
So, 92 R 2
Check:
(92 x 5) + 2 = 460 + 2 = 462

Question 9.
522 ÷ 18 = _____

29

Explanation:
Divide integers 52/18 = 2
Multiply 18 x 2 = 36; Subtract 52 – 36 = 16
Write down 162 and divide integers 162/8 = 9.
Multiply 8 x 9 = 162. Subtract 162 – 162 = 0
The remainder is 0

Question 10.
529 ÷ 37 = _____ R _____

14 R 11

Explanation:
Divide integers 52/37 = 1
Multiply 37 x 1 = 37; Subtract 52 – 37 = 15
Write down 159 and divide integers 159/37 = 4.
Multiply 37 x 4 = 148. Subtract 159 – 148 = 11
The remainder is 11.
So, 14 R 11
Check:
(14 x 37) + 11 = 518 + 11 = 529

Question 11.
987 ÷ 15 = _____ R _____

65 R 12

Explanation:
Divide integers 98/15 = 6
Multiply 15 x 6 = 90; Subtract 98 – 90 = 8
Write down 87 and divide integers 87/15 = 5.
Multiply 15 x 5 = 75. Subtract 87 – 75 = 12
The remainder is 12.
So, 65 R 12
Check:
(15 x 65) + 12 = 975 + 12 = 987

Question 12.
1,248 ÷ 24 = _____

52

Explanation:
Divide integers 124/24 = 5
Multiply 24 x 5 = 120; Subtract 124 – 120 = 4
Write down 48 and divide integers 48/24 = 2.
Multiply 24 x 2 = 48. Subtract 48 – 48 = 0
The remainder is 0

Question 13.
5,210 ÷ 17 = _____ R _____

306 R 8

Explanation:
Divide integers 52/17 = 3
Multiply 17 x 3 = 51; Subtract 52 – 51 = 1
Write down 110 and divide integers 110/17 = 6.
Multiply 17 x 6 = 102. Subtract 110 – 102 = 8
The remainder is 8.
So, 306 R 8
Check:
(306 x 17) + 8 = 5202 + 8 = 5210

Question 14.
8,808 ÷ 42 = _____ R _____

209 R 30

Explanation:
Divide integers 88/42 = 2
Multiply 42 x 2 = 84; Subtract 88 – 84 = 4
Write down 408 and divide integers 408/42 = 9.
Multiply 42 x 9 = 378. Subtract 408 – 378 = 30
The remainder is 30.
So, 209 R 30
Check:
(209 x 42) + 30 = 8778 + 30 = 8808

### Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 100

Question 15.
Samira bought 156 ounces of trail mix. She wants to divide the amount equally into 24 portions. How many ounces of trail mix will be in each portion?
Options:
A. 6 ounces
B. 6 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ ounces
C. 7 ounces
D. 12 ounces

B. 6 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ ounces

Explanation:
Samira bought 156 ounces of trail mix. She wants to divide the amount equally into 24 portions.156/24 = 6.5 = 6 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ ounces

Question 16.
A school band performed 6 concerts. Every seat for each performance was sold. If a total of 1,248 seats were sold for all 6 concerts, how many seats were sold for each performance?
Options:
A. 28
B. 200
C. 206
D. 208

D. 208

Explanation:
A school band performed 6 concerts. Every seat for each performance was sold. If a total of 1,248 seats were sold for all 6 concerts, then 1,248/6 = 208.

Question 17.
Dylan’s dog weighs 12 times as much as his pet rabbit. The dog and rabbit weigh 104 pounds altogether. How much does Dylan’s dog weigh?
Options:
A. 104 pounds
B. 96 pounds
C. 88 pounds
D. 8 pounds

D. 8 pounds

Explanation:
Dylan’s dog weighs 12 times as much as his pet rabbit. The dog and rabbit weigh 104 pounds altogether.
rabbit weight = S
dog weighs = 12S
S + 12S = 104; 13S = 104; S = 104/13 =8.

Question 18.
Jamie is sewing 14 identical costumes for the school play. She needs 210 buttons to complete all of the costumes. How many buttons will she sew onto each costume?
Options:
A. 15
B. 14
C. 11
D. 9

A. 15

Explanation:
Jamie is sewing 14 identical costumes for the school play. She needs 210 buttons to complete all of the costumes. 210/14 = 15

### Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 101

Question 19.
A book publishing company is shipping an order of 300 books. The books are packaged in boxes that each can hold 24 books. How many boxes are needed to ship the order of books?
Options:
A. 10
B. 11
C. 12
D. 13

D. 13

Explanation:
A book publishing company is shipping an order of 300 books. The books are packaged in boxes that each can hold 24 books.
300/24 = 12.5. That is 12 and above boxes. So, the answer is 13

Question 20.
Richard is planning a trip to Italy. He thinks he will need $2,750 for the trip. If the trip is 40 weeks away, which is the best estimate of how much money Richard needs to save each week? Options: A.$60
B. $70 C.$600
D. $700 Answer: B.$70

Explanation:
Richard is planning a trip to Italy. He thinks he will need $2,750 for the trip. If the trip is 40 weeks away,$2,750/40 = $68.75. That is equal to$70

Question 21.
A school club raises $506 to spend on a field trip. There are 23 people going on the trip. How much money did the club raise for each person going? Options: A.$27
B. $22 C.$18
D. $12 Answer: B.$22

Explanation:
A school club raises $506 to spend on a field trip. There are 23 people going on the trip.$506/23 = $22. Question 22. A local orange grower processes 2,330 oranges from his grove this year. The oranges are packaged in crates that each hold 96 oranges. All but one crate is full. How many oranges are in this last crate? Options: A. 24 B. 25 C. 26 D. 27 Answer: C. 26 Explanation: 2330 oranges / 96 orange/crate = 24.2708333 crates the decimal portion is the fraction of 96 in the last crate= 96 x .2708333 = 26 oranges in the last crate. ### Chapter Review/Test – Page No. 102 Constructed Response Question 23. On Monday, 1,900 bottles of perfume are delivered to a warehouse. The bottles are packed in boxes. Each box can hold 32 bottles. How many boxes were delivered? Explain how you found your answer. _____ boxes Answer: I need to divide 1,900 by 32, which is 59 r12. That means the bottles will completely fill 59 boxes. But there will be 12 bottles left over. These would be packed in another box, which makes a total of 60 boxes. Performance Task Question 24. Quincy needs 322 yards of ribbon to decorate quilts for a craft fair.The ribbon comes in rolls of 15 yards. A. How many rolls of ribbon should Quincy buy? Explain your answer. _____ rolls Answer: I need to divide 322 by 15. The answer is 21 R 7. Since he can’t buy a part of a roll, I need to add 1 to the quotient. So, the final answer is 22. Question 24. B. Alice needs twice as many yards of ribbon as Quincy. How many rolls of ribbon does Alice need? Explain your answer. _____ rolls Answer: Twice the length of 322 yards is 644 yards. If I divide 644 by 15, the answer is 42 R 14. Alice needs to buy 43 rolls of ribbon. The remainder doubled is still less than the amount In 1 roll. Question 24. C Elena needs yellow, red, and blue ribbon. She needs 285 yards of the three colors combined. Suggest numbers of rolls of each color that would give her enough ribbon. (HINT: Break apart the 285 yards into any combination of 3 groups that total this amount.) Type below: _________ Answer: Sample 1: If Elena wants the same amounts, she will need 95 yards of each color. 95 divided by 15 is 6 R 5, so she will need 7 rolls of each color. Sample 2: If she wants 109 yards of yellow, 100 yards of red, and 85 yards of blue, she will need 7 rolls of yellow, 7 rolls of red, and 6 rolls of blue. ### Conclusion: Go Math Grade 5 Answer Key Chapter 2 Divide Whole Numbers PDF for download. Get the explanation for every problem along with practice questions. Students can easily solve any math questions in minutes with the help of Go Math Grade 5 Chapter 2 Divide Whole Numbers Solution Key. ## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 13: Algebra: Perimeter and Area Get Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 13: Algebra: Perimeter and Area here. The students of 4th grade can score good marks with the help of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 13 Algebra: Perimeter and Area. You can learn how to find the area and perimeter of the rectangle and square with the help of HMH Go Math 4th Grade Chapter 13 Perimeter and Area Answer key. ## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 13: Algebra: Perimeter and Area Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 13: Algebra: Perimeter and Area pdf for free. Get the list of the topics covered in Algebra: Perimeter and Area from the below section. Hit the below link and get step by step explanation for each and every question here. Lesson: 1 – Perimeter Lesson: 2 – Area Lesson: 3 – Area of Combined Rectangles Lesson: 4 – Find Unknown Measures Lesson: 5 – Problem Solving Find the Area Lesson: 6 ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 247 Perimeter Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square. Question 1. 9 + 3 + 9 + 3 = 24 24 inches Question 2. _____ meters Answer: 32 Explanation: Given, sides = 8 m we know that the perimeter of a square is 4×s P = 4 × s P = 4 × 8m P = 32m Therefore the perimeter of the above square is 32m Question 3. _____ feet Answer: 44 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 10 ft Width (W) = 12 ft we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 10 ft + 10 ft + 12 ft + 12 ft P = 44 ft Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 44 ft Remember: The perimeter is the total distance around the outside, which can be found by adding together the length of each side. In the case of a rectangle, opposite sides are equal in length, so the perimeter is twice its width plus twice its height. Question 4. ____ centimeters Answer: 108 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 30 cm Width (W) = 24 cm we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 30 cm + 30 cm + 24 cm + 24 cm P = 108 cm Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 108 cm Question 5. ____ inches Answer: 216 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 25 in. Width (W) = 83 in. we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 25 in. + 25 in. + 83 in. + 83 in. P = 216 in. Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 216 in. Question 6. _____ meters Answer: 240 Explanation: Given, sides = 60 m we know that the perimeter of a square is 4×s P = 4×s P = 4×60 m P = 240 m Therefore the perimeter of the above square is 240 m Problem Solving Question 7. Troy is making a flag shaped like a square. Each side measures 12 inches. He wants to add ribbon along the edges. He has 36 inches of ribbon. Does he have enough ribbon? Explain. _____ Answer: no. He needs 48 inches of ribbon. Explanation: Since each side is 12 inches, then multiply 12 by 4 since it’s a square and has 4 sides which make 48. 48 is bigger than 36. Therefore, Troy does not have enough ribbon. Question 8. The width of the Ochoa Community Pool is 20 feet. The length is twice as long as its width. What is the perimeter of the pool? _____ feet Answer: 120 Explanation: Width of the Ochoa community pool = 20 feet Length is twice as long as its width = 2(20) = 40 feet Use this formula to get perimeter = 2(w) + 2(L) then the perimeter equals to = 2(20)+ 2(40) P = 40 feet + 80 feet = 120 feet Therefore The perimeter of the pool is 120 feet. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 248 Lesson Check Question 1. What is the perimeter of a square window with sides 36 inches long? Options: a. 40 inches b. 72 inches c. 144 inches d. 1,296 inches Answer: 144 inches Explanation: Perimeter of a square = L + L + L + L = 4L From the question given L=36 inches substitute the value of L into the formula Perimeter of a square (P)= L + L + L + L P = 36 in. + 36 in.. +36 in.+ 36 in. P =144 inches Therefore the perimeter of a square window with sides 36 inches long is 144 inches. Question 2. What is the perimeter of the rectangle below? Options: a. 11 meters b. 14 meters c. 18 meters d. 400 meters Answer: 18 meters Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 5 m Width (W) = 4 m we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 5 m + 5 m + 4 m + 4 m P = 18 m Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 18 m Thus the correct answer is option c. Spiral Review Question 3. Which is the most reasonable estimate for the measure of the angle Natalie drew? Options: a. 30° b. 90° c. 180° d. 210° Answer: 90° Explanation: Right angle: An angle of 90°, as in a corner of a square or at the intersection of two perpendicular straight lines. As we can see in the figure, that an angle is made at the intersection of the two perpendicular straight lines, thus the figure will be definitely a right-angled figure. Therefore, the measure of the angle Natalie draw is 90°. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 4. Ethan has 3 pounds of mixed nuts. How many ounces of mixed nuts does Ethan have? Options: a. 30 ounces b. 36 ounces c. 48 ounces d. 54 ounces Answer: 48 ounces Explanation: Since we have given that Number of pounds of mixed nuts = 3 As we know that 1 pound = 16 ounces So, we need to find the number of ounces of mixed nuts Ethan has. So, the number of ounces of mixed nuts Ethan have is given by = 3 × 16 = 48 ounces Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 5. How many lines of symmetry does the shape below appear to have? Options: a. 0 b. 1 c. 2 d. more than 2 Answer: 1 Explanation: It has only one line of symmetry on the horizontal axis because it is an arrow. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 6. Which of the following comparisons is correct? Options: a. 0.70 > 7.0 b. 0.7 = 0.70 c. 0.7 < 0.70 d. 0.70 = 0.07 Answer: 0.7 = 0.70 The decimal 0.7 and 0.70 are the same so the correct answer is option b. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 249 Area Find the area of the rectangle or square. Question 1. Answer: 108 Square feet Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 9 ft. Breath (b) = 12 ft. Area of the rectangle A = b×h A = 12 ft × 9 ft A = 108 Square feet. Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 108 Square feet. Question 2. _____ square yards Answer: 64 Explanation: Given, Sides (s) = 8 yd Area of the square. A = s×s A = 8 yd × 8 yd A = 64 Square yards Therefore the Area of the square is 64 Square yards. Question 3. ______ square meters Answer: 45 Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 3 m Breath (b) = 15 m Area of the rectangle or square. A = b×h A = 3 m× 15 m A = 45 Square meters Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 45 Square meters Question 4. ______ square inches Answer: 78 Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 6 in. Breath (b) = 13 in. Area of the rectangle = A = b×h A = 6 in. × 13 in. A = 78 square inches Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 78 square inches. Question 5. ______ square centimeters Answer: 150 square cm Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 5 cm Breath (b) = 30 cm Area of the rectangle or square. A = b×h A = 5 cm × 30 cm A = 150 square centimeters Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 150 square centimeters. Question 6. ______ square feet Answer: 56 square ft Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 4 ft Breath (b) = 14 ft Area of the rectangle or square. A = b×h A = 4 ft × 14 ft A = 56 square feet Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 56 square feet. Problem Solving Question 7. Meghan is putting wallpaper on a wall that measures 8 feet by 12 feet. How much wallpaper does Meghan need to cover the wall? _____ square feet wallpaper Answer: 96 square feet wallpaper Explanation: Given, Length = 8 feet. Width = 12 feet. the area (area=length × width) area=8 × 12 area=96 square feets. Therefore the area is always expressed in units squared it would be 96 square feet of wallpaper. Question 8. Bryson is laying down sod in his yard to grow a new lawn. Each piece of sod is a 1-foot by 1-foot square. How many pieces of sod will Bryson need to cover his yard if his yard measures 30 feet by 14 feet? _____ pieces Answer: 420 pieces Explanation: Given, length (l) = 30 ft Breath (b) = 14 ft Area of the rectangle or square. A = l×b A = 30 ft × 14 ft A = 420 Therefore 420 pieces of sod will Bryson need to cover his yard if his yard measures 30 feet by 14 feet. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 250 Lesson Check Question 1. Ellie and Heather drew floor models of their living rooms. Ellie’s model represented 20 feet by 15 feet. Heather’s model represented 18 feet by 18 feet. Whose floor model represents the greater area? How much greater? Options: a. Ellie; 138 square feet b. Heather; 24 square feet c. Ellie; 300 square feet d. Heather; 324 square feet Answer: Heather; 24 square feet Explanation: Given, Ellie’s model represented 20 feet by 15 feet. Heather’s model represented 18 feet by 18 feet. Length of Ellie’s model = 20 feet Width of Ellie’s model = 15 feet Area = Length × Breadth A = 20 × 15 A = 300 ft² Length of Heather’s model = 18 feet Width of Heather’s model = 18 feet Area = Length × Breadth A= 18 × 18 A= 324 ft² Therefore Heather’s model has a greater area by (324-300)= 24 sq.ft. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 2. Tyra is laying down square carpet pieces in her photography studio. Each square carpet piece is 1 yard by 1 yard. If Tyra’s photography studio is 7 yards long and 4 yards wide, how many pieces of square carpet will Tyra need? Options: a. 10 b. 11 c. 22 d. 28 Answer: 28 Explanation: Given, Tyra’s photography studio length is 7 yards Tyra’s photography studio width is 4 yards Area = Length × Breadth Area = 7 yards × 4 yards Area = 28 square yards Therefore as Each square carpet piece is 1 yard by 1 yard. No.of pieces of square carpet Tyra needed is 28. Thus the correct answer is option d. Spiral Review Question 3. Typically, blood fully circulates through the human body 8 times each minute. How many times does blood circulate through the body in 1 hour? Options: a. 48 b. 240 c. 480 d. 4,800 Answer: 480 Explanation: Given, blood fully circulates through the human body 8 times each minute one hour = 60 minutes blood circulates through the body in 1 hour = 8 times × 60 minutes. = 480 Times. Therefore blood circulates through the body in 1 hour is 480 times. Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 4. Each of the 28 students in Romi’s class raised at least$25 during the jump-a-thon. What is the least amount of money the class raised?
Options:
a. $5,200 b.$700
c. $660 d.$196

Answer: $700 explanation: If each of the 28 students made at least$25,
you would multiply 28 and 25 together to obtain the least amount of money the class raised.
That gets,
28×25 = 700.
Therefore The class made at least $700. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 5. What is the perimeter of the shape below if 1 square is equal to 1 square foot? Options: a. 12 feet b. 14 feet c. 24 feet d. 28 feet Answer: 28 feet Explanation: From the above figure we can observe that there area 2 rows and 12 columns. L = 12 feet W = 2 feet We know that perimeter of the rectangle is 2l + 2w P = 2l + 2w P = 2(12) + 2(2) P = 24 feet + 4 feet P = 28 feet Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 6. Ryan is making small meat loaves. Each small meat loaf uses $$\frac{3}{4 }$$ pound of meat. How much meat does Ryan need to make 8 small meat loaves? Options: a. 4 pounds b. 6 pounds c. 8 pounds d. 10 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ pounds Answer: 6 pounds Explanation: Given, 3/4 pound=1 small meatloaf So Multiply 3/4 pound by 8 because he wants to make 8 small meatloaves. = 3/4 × 8 = 24/4 (24 divided by 4) = 6 pounds Therefore Ryan need 6 pounds to make 8 small meat loaves. Thus the correct answer is option b. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 251 Area of Combined Rectangles Find the area of the combined rectangles. Question 1. Question 2. _____ square feet Answer: 143 Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 9 ft W = 5 ft Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 9 ft × 5 ft = 45 sq. ft Figure 2: L = 14 ft W = 7 ft Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 14 ft × 7 ft = 98 sq. ft Area of the combined rectangles = 98 sq. ft + 45 sq. ft = 143 sq. ft. Question 3. _____ square inches Answer: 63 Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 9 in. W = 5 in. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 9 in. × 5 in. = 45 sq. in. Figure 2: L = 3 in. W = 6 in. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 3 in. × 6 in. = 18 sq. in. Area of the combined rectangles = 45 sq. in + 18 sq. in = 63 square inches. Question 4. _____ square feet Answer: 50 square feet Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 4 ft W = 2 ft Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 4 ft × 2 ft = 8 sq. ft Figure 2: L = 6 ft W = 7 ft Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 6 ft × 7 ft = 42 sq. ft Area of the combined rectangles = 8 sq. ft + 42 sq. ft = 50 sq. ft. Question 5. _____ square centimeters Answer: 180 square centimeters Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 12 cm W = 7 cm Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 12 cm × 7 cm = 84 sq. cm. Figure 2: L = 16 cm W = 6 cm Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 16 cm × 6 cm = 96 sq. cm Area of the combined rectangles = 84 sq. cm + 96 sq. cm = 180 square centimeters Question 6. ______ square yards Answer: 68 Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 20 yd W = 1 yd Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 20 yd × 1 yd = 20 sq. yd. Figure 2: L = 6 yard W = 8 yard Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 6 yard × 8 yard = 48 sq. yard Area of the combined rectangles = 20 sq. yd + 48 sq. yd = 68 square yards Problem Solving Use the diagram for 7–8. Nadia makes the diagram below to represent the counter space she wants to build in her craft room. Question 7. What is the area of the space that Nadia has shown for scrapbooking? _____ square feet Answer: 52 Explanation: The length of the Scrapbooking is 13 ft Width of the Scrapbooking is 4 ft Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 13 ft × 4 ft = 52 square feet Thus the area of the space that Nadia has shown for scrapbooking is 52 square feet. Question 8. What is the area of the space she has shown for painting? _____ square feet Answer: 25 Explanation: The area of the space shown for painting is square. side = 5 ft The area of the square is 5 ft × 5 ft = 25 sq. ft Thus the area of the space she has shown for painting is 25 square feet. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 252 Lesson Check Question 1. What is the area of the combined rectangles below? Options: a. 136 square yards b. 100 square yards c. 76 square yards d. 64 square yards Answer: 76 square yards Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 8 yd W = 5 yd Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 8 yd × 5 yd = 40 sq. yd. Figure 2: L = 12 yard W = 3 yard Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 12 yard × 3 yard = 36 sq. yard Area of the combined rectangles = 40 sq. yd + 36 sq. yd = 76 square yards Therefore the correct option is c. Question 2. Marquis is redecorating his bedroom. What could Marquis use the area formula to find? Options: a. how much space should be in a storage box b. what length of wood is needed for a shelf c. the amount of paint needed to cover a wall d. how much water will fill up his new aquarium Answer: the amount of paint needed to cover a wall The correct answer is option c. Spiral Review Question 3. Giraffes are the tallest land animals. A male giraffe can grow as tall as 6 yards. How tall would the giraffe be in feet? Options: a. 2 feet b. 6 feet c. 12 feet d. 18 feet Answer: 18 feet Explanation: Given, Giraffes are the tallest land animals. A male giraffe can grow as tall as 6 yards. we have to find How tall would the giraffe be in feet Converting from Yards to feet. one Yard = 3 Feet. So 6 yards = 6 × 3 feet = 18 feet Therefore the correct option is d. Question 4. Drew purchased 3 books for$24. The cost of each book was a multiple of 4. Which of the following could be the prices of the 3 books?
Options:
a. $4,$10, $10 b.$4, $8,$12
c. $5,$8, $11 d.$3, $7,$14

Answer: $4,$8, $12 Explanation: Given, Drew purchased 3 books for$24. The cost of each book was a multiple of 4.
To find the prices of the 3 books
The cost of one book is $4 the cost of two books is$4 × 2 = $8 The cost of three books is$4 × 3 = $12 Therefore the correct option is b. Question 5. Esmeralda has a magnet in the shape of a square. Each side of the magnet is 3 inches long. What is the perimeter of her magnet? Options: a. 3 inches b. 7 inches c. 9 inches d. 12 inches Answer: 12 inches Explanation: Given, Esmeralda has a magnet in the shape of a square. Each side of the magnet is 3 inches long. To find the perimeter of her magnet P = 4 × s P = 4 × 3 in. P = 12 in. Therefore the correct option is d. Question 6. What is the area of the rectangle below? Options: a. 63 square feet b. 32 square feet c. 18 square feet d. 16 square feet Answer: 63 square feet Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 7 ft. Breath (b) = 9 ft. Area of the rectangle A = b×h A = 7 ft × 9 ft A = 63 Square feet. The Area of the rectangle is 63 Square feet. Therefore the correct option is a. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 253 Find Unknown Measures Find the unknown measure of the rectangle. Question 1. Perimeter = 54 feet width = 7 feet Think: P = (2 × l) + (2 × w) 54 = (2 × 20) + (2 × w) 54 = 40 + (2 × w) Since 54 = 40 + 14, 2 × w = 14, and w = 7. Question 2. Perimeter = 42 meters length = _____ meters Answer: 12 meters Explanation: Given Perimeter = 42 meters width = 9 m To find Length (l) of the rectangle P = (2 × l) + (2 × w) 42 = (2 × l ) + (2 × 9) 42 = 2l + 18 2l = 42 – 18 2l = 24 l = 24/2 l = 12 m Thus the length of the above rectangle is 12 m Question 3. Area = 28 square centimeters height = _____ centimeters Answer: 7 centimeters Explanation: Given Area = 28 square centimeters length = 4 cm To find Height (w) of the rectangle A = l × w 28 = 4 cm × w w = 28/4 w = 7 cm Thus the height of the above rectangle is 7 cm Question 4. Area = 200 square inches base = _____ inches Answer: 8 inches Explanation: Given Area = 200 square inches width = 25 in. To find Base (b) of the rectangle A = w × b 200 = 25 in. × b b = 200/25 b = 8 inches Thus the base of the above rectangle is 8 inches Problem Solving Question 5. Susie is an organic vegetable grower. The perimeter of her rectangular vegetable garden is 72 yards. The width of the vegetable garden is 9 yards. How long is the vegetable garden? length = _____ yards Answer: 27 yards Explanation: Given, The perimeter (P) of her rectangular vegetable garden is 72 yards. The width (w) of the vegetable garden is 9 yards. to find length (l) P = (2 × l) + (2 × w) 72 yards = (2 × l ) + (2 × 9 yards) 72 = 2l + 18 2l = 72 – 18 2l = 54 l = 54/2 l = 27 yards Therefore length = 27 yards Question 6. An artist is creating a rectangular mural for the Northfield Community Center. The mural is 7 feet tall and has an area of 84 square feet. What is the length of the mural? length = _____ feet Answer: 12 feet Explanation: Given, The mural is 7 feet (w) tall and has an area of 84 square feet(A). To find the length (l) A = l × w 84 = l × 7 l = 84 /7 l= 12 feets Therefore the length is 12 feets ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 254 Lesson Check Question 1. The area of a rectangular photograph is 35 square inches. If the width of the photo is 5 inches, how tall is the photo? Options: a. 5 inches b. 7 inches c. 25 inches d. 30 inches Answer: 7 inches Explanation: Given, The area of a rectangular photograph is 35 square inches (A) The width of the photo is 5 inches (w) To find how tall is the photo (l) A= l × b 35 square in. = l × 5 in. l = 35/5 l = 7 inches Therefore the photo height is 7 inches. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 2. Natalie used 112 inches of blue yarn as a border around her rectangular bulletin board. If the bulletin board is 36 inches wide, how long is it? Options: a. 20 inches b. 38 inches c. 40 inches d. 76 inches Answer: 20 inches Explanation: Given width is 36 in and the total inches used was 112. To find length Perimeter of Rectangle = 2(L + W) Your equation is, 2(L + 36) = 112 Solving for L: 2(L + 36) = 112 L + 36 = 112 / 2 L + 36 = 56 L = 56 – 36 L = 20 Therefore the correct option is a. Spiral Review Question 3. A professional basketball court is in the shape of a rectangle. It is 50 feet wide and 94 feet long. A player ran one time around the edge of the court. How far did the player run? Options: a. 144 feet b. 194 feet c. 238 feet d. 288 feet Answer: 288 feet Explanation: Given, the basketball court is 50 feet wide and 94 feet long The perimeter of the rectangle(P) is given by: P = 2(length + width) 50 + 94 = 144 144 x 2 = 288 The player ran 288 feet Therefore the correct option is d. Question 4. On a compass, due east is a $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn clockwise from due north. How many degrees are in a $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn? Options: a. 45° b. 60° c. 90° d. 180° Answer: 90° Explanation: We have been given that on a compass, due east is a 1/4 turn clockwise from due north. Since we know that a compass is in form of a circle and the measure of degrees in a circle is 360 degrees. To find the number of degrees in a one-fourth turn, we will divide 360° by 4. Number of degrees in a 1/4 turn of compass = 360°/4 Number of degrees in a 1/4 turn of compass = 90° Therefore, there are 90 degrees in a 1/4 turn of the compass. The correct option is c. Question 5. Hakeem’s frog made three quick jumps. The first was 1 meter. The second jump was 85 centimeters. The third jump was 400 millimeters. What was the total length of the frog’s three jumps? Options: a. 189 centimeters b. 225 centimeters c. 486 centimeters d. 585 millimeters Answer: 225 centimeters Explanation: Given: distance of first jump = d1= 1 meter distance of second jump = d2 = 85 centimeters distance of third jump = d3 = 400 millimeters This problem is about the conversion unit of length. We have to recall that : 1 m = 100 cm 1 m = 1000 mm Total distance = d = d1 + d2 + d3 d = 1 m + 85 m + 400 mm d = 1 m + 85/100 m + 400/1000 m d = 2.25 × 100 cm d = 225 centimeters Therefore the correct option is b. Question 6. Karen colors in squares on a grid. She colored $$\frac{1}{8}$$ of the squares blue and $$\frac{5}{8}$$ of the squares red. What fraction of the squares are not colored in? Options: a. $$\frac{1}{8}$$ b. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ d. $$\frac{3}{4}$$ Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$ Explanation: since karen colored in 1/8 and 5/8 you add the numerators to get 6/8 you subtract the 8/8 the whole grid from 6/8 to get 2/8 ⇒ 1/8 + 5/8 = 6/8 ⇒ 8/8 – 6/8 = 2/8 = 1/4 There fore the correct option is b. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 255 Problem Solving Find the Area Solve each problem. Question 1. A room has a wooden floor. There is a rug in the center of the floor. The diagram shows the room and the rug. How many square feet of the wood floor still shows? 82 square feet Area of the floor: 13 × 10 = 130 square feet Area of the rug: 8 × 6 = 48 square feet Subtract to find the area of the floor still showing: 130 – 48 = 82 square feet Question 2. A rectangular wall has a square window, as shown in the diagram. What is the area of the wall NOT including the window? The area of the wall NOT including the window = _____ square feet Answer: 96 square feet Explanation: The area of the square window is 4 ft × 4 ft = 16 square feet. Area of the rectangle = 14 ft × 8 ft = 112 square feet Now we have to find the area of the wall NOT including the window 112 square feet – 16 square feet = 96 square feet Thus the area of the wall NOT including the window is 96 square feet. Question 3. Bob wants to put down new sod in his backyard, except for the part set aside for his flower garden. The diagram shows Bob’s backyard and the flower garden. How much sod will Bob need? The area covered with new sod = _____ square yards Answer: 235 square yards Explanation: The area of the non-shaded rectangle is 5 yd × 9 yd = 45 square yards. The area of the rectangle is 20 yd × 14 yd = 280 square yard The area covered with new sod is 280 square yard – 45 square yard = 235 square yards. Question 4. A rectangular painting is 24 inches wide and 20 inches tall without the frame. With the frame, it is 28 inches wide and 24 inches tall. What is the area of the frame not covered by the painting? The area of the frame = _____ square inches Answer: 192 square inches Explanation: area of painting without frame A1 = l × b = 24 x 20 = 480 square inches area of painting with frame A2 = l × b =28×24 =672 square inches area of the frame not covered by paint =area with frame(A1) – area without frame(A2) =672 – 480 =192 Therefore the area of the frame is 192 square inches Question 5. One wall in Jeanne’s bedroom is 13 feet long and 8 feet tall. There is a door 3 feet wide and 6 feet tall. She has a poster on the wall that is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall. How much of the wall is visible? The area of the wall visible = _____ square feet Answer: 80 Explanation: One wall in Jeanne’s bedroom is 13 feet long and 8 feet tall. There is a door 3 feet wide and 6 feet tall. She has a poster on the wall that is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall. 13 × 8 is 104. 104 – (3×6) and -(2 × 3) is 80 Thus the area of the wall visible is 80 square feet. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 256 Lesson Check Question 1. One wall in Zoe’s bedroom is 5 feet wide and 8 feet tall. Zoe puts up a poster of her favorite athlete. The poster is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall. How much of the wall is not covered by the poster? Options: a. 16 square feet b. 34 square feet c. 35 square feet d. 46 square feet Answer: 34 square feet Explanation: One wall in Zoe’s bedroom is 5 feet wide and 8 feet tall. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 5 feet × 8 feet A = 40 square feet Zoe puts up a poster of her favorite athlete. The poster is 2 feet wide and 3 feet tall. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 2 feet × 3 feet S = 6 square feet To find: How much of the wall is not covered by the poster, we need to subtract 6 square feet from 40 square feet 40 square feet – 6 square feet = 34 square feet Thus the are of the wall is not covered by the poster is 34 square feet. The correct answer is option b. Question 2. A garage door is 15 feet wide and 6 feet high. It is painted white, except for a rectangular panel 1 foot high and 9 feet wide that is brown. How much of the garage door is white? Options: a. 22 square feet b. 70 square feet c. 80 square feet d. 81 square feet Answer: 81 square feet Explanation: Given that the garage door is 15 feet wide and 6 feet high. W = 15 feet H = 6 feet Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 6 feet × 15 feet A = 90 square feet It is painted white, except for a rectangular panel 1 foot high and 9 feet wide that is brown. H = 1 foot W = 9 feet Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 1 feet × 9 feet A = 9 feet To find: How much of the garage door is white, we need to subtract 9 feet from 90 feet. 90 feet – 9 feet = 81 feet. Thus the area of the garage door is white is 81 square feet. The correct answer is option d. Spiral Review Question 3. Kate baked a rectangular cake for a party. She used 42 inches of frosting around the edges of the cake. If the cake was 9 inches wide, how long was the cake? Options: a. 5 inches b. 12 inches c. 24 inches d. 33 inches Answer: 12 inches Explanation: Given, Kate baked a rectangular cake for a party. She used 42 inches of frosting around the edges of the cake. The width of the cake is 9 inches. 9 + 9 = 18 42 – 18 = 24 24 / 2 = 12 the length is 12 inches Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 4. Larry, Mary, and Terry each had a full glass of juice. Larry drank $$\frac{3}{4}$$ of his. Mary drank $$\frac{3}{8}$$ of hers. Terry drank $$\frac{7}{10}$$ of his. Who drank less than $$\frac{1}{2}$$ of their juice? Options: a. Larry b. Mary c. Mary and Terry d. Larry and Terry Answer: Mary Mary drank the least because when half of 8 is $$\frac{4}{8}$$. The correct answer is option b. Question 5. Which of the following statements is NOT true about the numbers 7 and 9? Options: a. 7 is a prime number. b. 9 is a composite number. c. 7 and 9 have no common factors other than 1. d. 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9. Answer: 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9. Explanation: Statement 27 is a common multiple of 7 and 9 is false because 27 is not the multiple of 7. Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 6. Tom and some friends went to a movie. The show started at 2:30 P.M. and ended at 4:15 P.M. How long did the movie last? Options: a. 1 hour 35 minutes b. 1 hour 45 minutes c. 1 hour 55 minutes d. 2 hours 15 minutes Answer: 1 hour 45 minutes Explanation: Given, Tom and some friends went to a movie. The show started at 2:30 P.M. and ended at 4:15 P.M. Subtract ending time and starting time. 4 hr 15 min -2 hr 30 min 1 hr 45 min Thus the correct answer is option B. ### Common Core – Algebra: Perimeter and Area – Page No. 257 Lesson 13.1 Find the perimeter of the rectangle or square. Question 1. P =____ ft Answer: 50 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 16 ft Width (W) = 9 ft we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 16 ft + 16 ft + 9 ft + 9 ft P = 50 ft Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 50 ft Question 2. P =____ in. Answer: 52 Explanation: Given, sides = 13 in. we know that the perimeter of a square is 4×s P = 4 × 13 in. P = 4 × 13 in. P = 52 in. Therefore the perimeter of the above square is 52 in. Question 3. P =____ cm Answer: 130 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 40 cm Width (W) = 25 cm we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 40 cm + 40 cm + 25 cm + 25 cm P = 130 cm Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 130 cm. Question 4. P =____ m Answer: 68 Explanation: Given, Length (L) = 16 m Width (W) = 18 m we know that the perimeter of a Rectangle is L + L+ W + W P = L + L+ W + W P = 16 m+ 16 m+ 18 m+ 18 m P = 68 m Therefore the perimeter of the above Rectangle is 68 m. Lesson 13.2 Find the area of the rectangle or square. Question 5. A = ____ square inches Answer: 180 Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 15 in. Breath (b) = 12 in. Area of the rectangle = A = b×h A = 12 in. × 15 in. A = 180 square inches Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 180 square inches. Question 6. A = ____ square yards Answer: 300 Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 15 yd Breath (b) = 20 yd Area of the rectangle = A = b×h A = 15 yd. × 20 yd A = 300 square yard Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 300 square yards. Question 7. A = ____ square km Answer: 25 Explanation: Given, Sides (s) = 5 km Area of the square. A = s×s A = 5 km × 5 km A = 25 Square km Therefore the Area of the square is 25 square km. Question 8. A = ____ square ft Answer: 98 Explanation: Given, Height (h) = 14 ft Breath (b) = 7 ft Area of the rectangle = A = b×h A = 14 ft. × 7 ft A = 98 square ft Therefore the Area of the rectangle is 98 square ft. ### Page No: 258 Lesson 13.3 Find the area of the combined rectangles. Question 1. A = ____ square cm Answer: 116 square cm Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 6 cm Area of the square = s × s A = 6 cm × 6 cm = 36 sq. cm. Figure 2: L = 10 cm W = 8 cm Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 10 cm × 8 cm = 80 sq. cm Area of the combined rectangles = 36 sq. cm + 80 sq. cm = 116 square centimeters Question 2. A = ____ square in. Answer: 112 square in. Explanation: Divide the figure into two parts Figure 1: L = 8 in. W = 4 in. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 8 in. × 4 in. = 32 sq. in. Figure 2: L = 4 in. W = 12 in. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 4 in. × 12 in. = 48 sq. in. Figure 3: L = 8 in. W = 4 in. Area of the rectangle = l × w A = 8 in. × 4 in. = 32 sq. in. Area of the combined rectangles = 32 sq. in + 48 sq. in + 32 sq. in. = 112 square inches. Lesson 13.4 Find the unknown measure of the rectangle. Question 3. base = ____ feet Answer: 25 feet Explanation: A = 375 sq. ft h = 15 ft Area of the rectangle = A = b×h 375 sq. ft = b × 15 ft b = 375/15 = 25 ft Thus the base of the figure is 25 ft. Question 4. height = ____ mi Answer: 8 mi Explanation: A = 56 sq. mi b = 7 mi Area of the rectangle = A = b×h 56 sq. mi = 7 mi × h h = 56/7= 8 mi Thus the height of the figure is 8 mi. Lesson 13.5 Solve. Question 5. Jeanette is painting a rectangular wall that is 10 feet long and 8 feet tall. There is a window that is 5 feet wide and 3 feet tall on the wall. What is the area of the wall that Jeannette will paint? ____ square feet Answer: 65 square feet Explanation: Given, Jeanette is painting a rectangular wall that is 10 feet long and 8 feet tall. There is a window that is 5 feet wide and 3 feet tall on the wall. 8 times 10 is eighty, then you need to subtract 3 times 5 (which is 15), and that makes it 65 feet squared. 80 sq. ft – 15 sq. ft = 65 square feet Question 6. Rob has a combined flower and vegetable garden that is 9 meters long and 11 meters wide. The flower garden is in the center and is a square with sides of 3 meters. How many square meters of the garden is used for vegetables? ____ square meters Answer: 90 square meters Explanation: First, you would need to find the area of both the FULL veggie garden and flower garden. Veggie Garden = 9×11 = 99 Flower Garden = 3×3 = 9 Then you would subtract the area of the veggie garden by the area of the flower garden. 99 – 9 = 90 meters squared Conclusion: In this chapter, you can learn the concepts of Chapter 13 Algebra Perimeter and Area here. Get the simple tricks to solve the problems with the help of our Go Math Answer Key. In addition to the Homework Practice FL you can get the explanation for Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 13: Algebra: Perimeter and Area from here. ## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million pdf. We have provided the solutions for each and every question for Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million in an easy manner. Elaborate your children thinking by solving every practice question on Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million. ## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key introducing a new way of problem-solving and providing a new path for the students to solve problems. The topics of Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million include Model Place Value Relationships, Compare and Order Numbers, Round Numbers, Add and subtract Whole Numbers, etc. Lesson: 1 – Model Place Value Relationships Lesson: 2 – Read and Write Numbers Lesson: 3 – Compare and Order Numbers Lesson: 4 – Round Numbers Lesson: 5 – Rename Numbers Lesson: 6 – Add Whole Numbers Lesson: 7 – Subtract Whole Numbers Lesson: 8 – Problem Solving Comparison Problems with Addition and Subtraction Lesson: 9 ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 3 Model Place Value Relationships Find the value of the underlined digit. Question 1. 6,035 30 Question 2. 43,782 ________ Answer: 700 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 43,782 is 700. Question 3. 506,087 ________ Answer: 7 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 506,087 is 7. Question 4. 49,254 ________ Answer: 9000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 49,254 is 9000. Question 5. 136,422 ________ Answer: 30,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 136,422 is 30,000. Question 6. 673,512 ________ Answer: 500 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 5 in 673,512 is 500. Question 7. 814,295 ________ Answer: 800,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 8 in 814,295 is 800,000. Question 8. 736,144 ________ Answer: 6,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 6 in 736,144 is 6,000. Compare the values of the underlined digits. Question 9. 6,300 and 530 The value of 3 in _____ is _____ times the value of 3 in _____. Answer: The value of 3 in 6,300 is 10 times the value of 3 in 530. Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 6,300 is 300. And the place value of the digit 3 in 530 is 30. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 3 hundreds are ten times as many as 3 tens. So, the value of 3 in 6,300 is 10 times the value of 3 in 530. Question 10. 2,783 and 7,283 The value of 2 in _____ is _____ times the value of 2 in _____. Answer: The value of 2 in 2783 is 10 times the value of 2 in 7283. Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 2 in 2,783 is 2000. And the place value of the digit 2 in 7,283 is 200. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 2 thousands are ten times as many as 2 hundred. So, the value of 2 in 2783 is 10 times the value of 2 in 7283. Question 11. 34,258 and 47,163 The value of 4 in _____ is _____ times the value of 4 in _____. Answer: The value of 4 in 47,163 is 10 times the value of 4 in 34,258. Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 34,258 is 4,000. And the place value of the digit 4 in 47,163 is 40,000. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 4 thousands are ten times as many as 4 thousand tens. So, the value of 4 in 47,163 is 10 times the value of 4 in 34,258. Question 12. 503,497 and 26,475 The value of 7 in _____ is _____ times the value of 7 in _____. Answer: The value of 7 in 26,475 is 10 times the value of 7 in 5,03,497. Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 7 in 503,497 is 7. And the place value of the digit 7 in 26,475 is 70. As each hundred is 10 times as many as 10, so 7 are ten times as many as 7 tens. So, the value of 7 in 26,475 is 10 times the value of 7 in 5,03,497. Problem Solving Use the table for 13–14. Question 13. What is the value of the digit 9 in the attendance at the Redskins vs. Titans game? The value of 9 is _____ Answer: 9,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 69,143 is 9,000. Question 14. The attendance at which game has a 7 in the ten thousands place? __________ Answer: Ravens vs. Panthers Explanation: Each digit of the number holds its own value. The adjacent digits of the number differ from each other by 10 times. Starting from the leftmost digit going to the right, the order of place values starts from ones, tens, hundreds, thousands, and ten thousand. Therefore, the number should contain a digit 7 on the 5th digit from left to right. Thus the attendance at Ravens vs. Panthers game has a 7 in the ten thousands place. Question 15. How does a digit in the ten thousands place compare to a digit in the thousands place? Type below: __________ Answer: A digit in the ten thousand place has a value of 10,000 times the value of the mere digit. While a digit in the thousands place has a value 1,000 times the value of the digit. So to compare you can do 10,000 / 1,000 = 10, which means that a digit in the ten thousand place values ten times what the same digit values are it is the thousand place. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 4 Lesson Check Question 1. During one season, a total of 453,193 people attended a baseball team’s games. What is the value of the digit 5 in the number of people? Options: a. 500 b. 5,000 c. 50,000 d. 500,000 Answer: 50,000 Explanation: Given, During one season, a total of 453,193 people attended a baseball team’s games. Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 5 in 453,193 is 50,000. Thus the correct answer is option C. Question 2. Hal forgot the number of people at the basketball game. He does remember that the number had a 3 in the tens place. Which number could Hal be thinking of? Options: a. 7,321 b. 3,172 c. 2,713 d. 1,237 Answer: 1,237 Explanation: Given, Hal forgot the number of people at the basketball game. He does remember that the number had a 3 in the tens place. a. 7,321 – the value of 3 in 7321 is 300. b. 3,172 – the value of 3 in 3172 is 3000. c. 2,713 – the value of 3 in 2713 is 3. d. 1,237 – the value of 3 in 1237 is 30. Thus the number 3 in tens place is 1,237. Therefore, the correct answer is option D. Spiral Review Question 3. Hot dog buns come in packages of 8. For the school picnic, Mr. Spencer bought 30 packages of hot dog buns. How many hot dog buns did he buy? Options: a. 24 b. 38 c. 110 d. 240 Answer: 240 Explanation: Given, Hot dog buns come in packages of 8. For the school picnic, Mr. Spencer bought 30 packages of hot dog buns. 8 × 30 = 240 buns He bought 240 hot dig buns. Thus the correct answer is option D. Question 4. There are 8 students on the minibus. Five of the students are boys. What fraction of the students are boys? Options: a. $$\frac{3}{8}$$ b. $$\frac{5}{8}$$ c. $$\frac{5}{5}$$ d. $$\frac{8}{8}$$ Answer: $$\frac{5}{8}$$ Explanation: There are 8 students on the minibus. Five of the students are boys. Divide the number of boys by the total number of students on the minibus. $$\frac{5}{8}$$ Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 5. The clock below shows the time when Amber leaves home for school. At what time does Amber leave home? Options: a. 2:41 b. 8:02 c. 8:10 d. 8:20 Answer: 8:10 Explanation: By seeing the above figure we can say that Amber leave home is 8:10. Thus the correct answer is option C. Question 6. Jeremy drew a polygon with four right angles and four sides with the same length. What kind of polygon did Jeremy draw? Options: a. hexagon b. square c. trapezoid d. triangle Answer: square Explanation: A square has two pairs of parallel sides, four right angles, and all four sides are equal. Thus the correct answer is option B. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 5 Read and Write Numbers Read and write the number in two other forms. Question 1. six hundred ninety-two thousand, four standard form: 692,004; expanded form: 600,000 + 90,000 + 2,000 + 4 Question 2. 314,207 Type below: ________ Answer: Standard form: Three hundred fourteen thousand, two hundred seven. Explanded form: 300,000 + 10,000 + 4,000 + 200 + 7 Question 3. 600,000 + 80,000 + 10 Type below: ________ Answer: Standard form: 680,010 Expanded form: Six hundred eighty thousand ten. Use the number 913,256. Question 4. Write the name of the period that has the digits 913. ________ Answer: thousands Each group of three digits forms a period. The name of the period that has the digits 913 is thousands group. Question 5. Write the digit in the ten thousands place. ________ Answer: 1 Question 6. Write the value of the digit 9. ________ Answer: 9 hundred thousands or 900,000. Problem Solving Use the table for 7 and 8. Question 7. Which state had a population of eight hundred four thousand, one hundred ninety-four? ________ Answer: South Dakota Explanation: The standard form of eight hundred four thousand, one hundred ninety-four is 804,194. We can see the population 804,194 in the above table in South Dakota. Question 8. What is the value of the digit 8 in Alaska’s population? ________ Answer: 8 ten thousands, or 80,000. Explanation: The population in Alaska is 686,293. The value of the digit 8 in Alaska’s population is 80,000. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 6 Lesson Check Question 1. Based on a 2008 study, children 6–11 years old spend sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight minutes a year watching television. What is this number written in standard form? Options: a. 6,918 b. 69,108 c. 69,180 d. 690,108 Answer: 69,108 Explanation: Given, Based on a 2008 study, children 6–11 years old spend sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight minutes a year watching television. The standard form of sixty-nine thousand, one hundred eight is 69,108. Question 2. What is the value of the digit 4 in the number 84,230? Options: a. 4 b. 400 c. 4,000 d. 40,000 Answer: 4,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 84,230 is 4,000. Thus the correct answer is option C. Spiral Review Question 3. An ant has 6 legs. How many legs do 8 ants have in all? Options: a. 14 b. 40 c. 45 d. 48 Answer: 48 Explanation: Given, An ant has 6 legs. To find: How many legs do 8 ants have in all 6 legs × 8 = 48 legs Thus the correct answer is option D. Question 4. Latricia’s vacation is in 4 weeks. There are 7 days in a week. How many days is it until Latricia’s vacation? Options: a. 9 days b. 11 days c. 20 days d. 28 days Answer: 28 days Explanation: Given, Latricia’s vacation is in 4 weeks. There are 7 days in a week. 4 × 7 days = 28 days Thus the correct answer is option D. Question 5. Marta collected 363 cans. Diego collected 295 cans. How many cans did Marta and Diego collect in all? Options: a. 668 b. 658 c. 568 d. 178 Answer: 658 Explanation: Marta collected 363 cans. Diego collected 295 cans. 363 cans + 295 cans = 658 cans Marta and Diego collect 658 cans in all. Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 6. The city Tim lives in has 106,534 people. What is the value of the 6 in 106,534? Options: a. 6,000 b. 600 c. 60 d. 6 Answer: 6,000 Explanation: The city Tim lives in has 106,534 people. The value of the 6 in 106,534 is 6,000. Thus the correct answer is option A. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 7 Compare and Order Numbers Compare. Write < .> or =. Question 1. 3,273 < 3,279 Question 2.$1,323 ______ $1,400 Answer: < The number$1,323 < $1,400 as 323 is less than 400. Question 3. 52,692 ______ 52,692 Answer: = The number 52,692 is equal to 52,692. Question 4.$413,005 ______ $62,910 Answer: > The number$413,005 is greater than $62,910. Question 5. 382,144 ______ 382,144 Answer: = The number 382,144 is equal to 382,144. Question 6. 157,932 ______ 200,013 Answer: < The number 157,932 is less than 200,013. Question 7. 401,322 ______ 410,322 Answer: < The number 401,322 is less than 410,322. Question 8. 989,063 ______ 980,639 Answer: > The number 989,063 is greater than 980,639. Question 9. 258,766 ______ 258,596 Answer: > The number 258,766 is greater than 258,596. Order from least to greatest. Question 10. 23,710; 23,751; 23,715 ______ < ______ < ______ Answer: 23,710; 23,715; 23,751 Question 11. 52,701; 54,025; 5,206 ______ < ______ < ______ Answer: 5,206; 52,701; 54,025 The numbers from least to greatest is 5,206; 52,701; 54,025 Question 12. 465,321; 456,321; 456,231 ______ < ______ < ______ Answer: 456,321; 456,231; 456,231 456,321 is less than 456,231 is less than 456,231. The numbers from least to greatest is 456,321; 456,231; 456,231. Question 13.$330,820; $329,854;$303,962
______ < ______ < ______

Answer: $303,962;$329,854; $330,820$303,962 is less than $329,854 is less than$330,820. The numbers from least to greatest is $303,962;$329,854; $330,820. Problem Solving Question 14. An online newspaper had 350,080 visitors in October, 350,489 visitors in November, and 305,939 visitors in December. What is the order of the months from greatest to least number of visitors? 1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________ Answer: 1. November 2. October 3. December Explanation: Given, An online newspaper had 350,080 visitors in October, 350,489 visitors in November, and 305,939 visitors in December. 350,489 is greater than 350,080 is greater than 305,939. Thus the order of the months from greatest to least number of visitors is November, October and December. Question 15. The total land area in square miles of each of three states is shown below. Colorado: 103,718 New Mexico: 121,356 Arizona: 113,635 What is the order of the states from least to greatest total land area? 1. ________ 2. ________ 3. ________ Answer: 1. Colorado 2. Arizona 3. New Mexico Explanation: The total land area in square miles of each of three states is shown below. Colorado: 103,718 New Mexico: 121,356 Arizona: 113,635 The greatest number is 121,356, 113,635, 103,718 The order of the states from least to greatest total land area is Colorado, Arizona and New Mexico. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 8 Lesson Check Question 1. At the yearly fund-raising drive, the nonprofit company’s goal was to raise$55,500 each day. After three days, it had raised $55,053;$56,482; and $55,593. Which amount was less than the daily goal? Options: a.$55,500
b. $55,053 c.$55,593
d. $56,482 Answer:$55,053

Explanation:
At the yearly fund-raising drive, the nonprofit company’s goal was to raise $55,500 each day. After three days, it had raised$55,053; $56,482; and$55,593.
$55,053 <$55,593 < $56,482 The amount was less than the daily goal is$55,053.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Which of the following lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least?
Options:
a. 60,343; 60,433; 63,043
b. 83,673; 86,733; 86,373
c. 90,543; 90,048; 93,405
d. 20,433; 20,343; 20,043

Explanation:
The lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least is 20,433; 20,343; 20,043
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Jess is comparing fractions. Which fraction is greater than $$\frac{5}{6}$$?
Options:
a. $$\frac{7}{8}$$
b. $$\frac{4}{5}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{4}$$
d. $$\frac{2}{3}$$

Answer: $$\frac{7}{8}$$

Explanation:
Given,
Jess is comparing fractions.
The fraction is greater than $$\frac{5}{6}$$ is $$\frac{7}{8}$$
The correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
What is the perimeter of the rectangle below?

Options:
a. 14 inches
b. 26 inches
c. 28 inches
d. 48 inches

Explanation:
Given,
l = 6 in
w = 8 in.
Perimeter of the rectangle = l + l + w + w
P = 6 in + 6 in + 8 in + 8 in
P = 28 inches
Thus the perimeter of the rectangle is 28 inches.
The correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
A website had 826,140 hits last month. What is the value of the 8 in 826,140?
Options:
a. 800
b. 8,000
c. 80,000
d. 800,000

Explanation:
A website had 826,140 hits last month.
The value of the 8 in 826,140 is 800,000.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Which is 680,705 written in expanded form?
Options:
a. 680 + 705
b. 68,000 + 700 + 5
c. 600,000 + 8,000 + 700 + 5
d. 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5

Answer: 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5

Explanation:
The expanded form of 680,705 is 600,000 + 80,000 + 700 + 5
The correct answer is option D.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 9

Round Numbers

Round to the place value of the underlined digit.

Question 1.

Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.

Question 2.
123,499
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 3 in 123,499 is 123,000.

Question 3.
552,945
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 5 in 552,945 is 600,000.

Question 4.
389,422
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 8 in 389,422 is 390,000.

Question 5.
209,767
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 2 in 209,767 is 200,000.

Question 6.
191,306
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 191,306 is 191,000.

Question 7.
66,098
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 6 in 66,098 is 70,000.

Question 8.
73,590
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 3 in 73,590 is 74,000.

Question 9.
149,903
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 149,903 is 100,000.

Question 10.
684,303
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 4 in 684,303 is 684,000.

Question 11.
499,553
_____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 9 in 499,553 is 500,000.

Problem Solving

Use the table for 12–13.

Question 12.
Find the height of Mt. Whitney in the table. Round the height to the nearest thousand feet.
_____ feet

Explanation:
The height to the nearest thousand feet for 14,494 is 14,000 feet.

Question 13.
What is the height of Mt. Bona rounded to the nearest ten thousand feet?
_____ feet

Explanation:
The height of Mt. Bona rounded to the nearest ten thousand feet for 16,500 is 20,000 feet.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 10

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which number is 247,039 rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 200,000
b. 250,000
c. 247,000
d. 7,000

Explanation:
Round off the value means making a number simpler but keeping its value close to what it was. The result is less accurate but easy to use. So the number is 247,039 rounded to the nearest thousand is 247,000.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
To the nearest ten thousand, the population of Vermont was estimated to be about 620,000 in 2008. Which might have been the exact population of Vermont in 2008?
Options:
a. 626,013
b. 621,270
c. 614,995
d. 609,964

Explanation:
To the nearest ten thousand, the population of Vermont was estimated to be about 620,000 in 2008.
The exact population of Vermont in 2008 might be 621,270.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which symbol makes the following number sentence true?
$546,322 Ο$540,997
Options:
a. <
b. >
c. =
d. +

Explanation:
$546,322 is greater than$540,997.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Pittsburgh International Airport had approximately 714,587 passengers in August 2009. Which number is greater than 714,587?
Options:
a. 714,578
b. 704,988
c. 714,601
d. 714,099

Explanation:
Given,
Pittsburgh International Airport had approximately 714,587 passengers in August 2009.
The number greater than 714,587 is 714,601.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
June made a design with 6 equal tiles. One tile is yellow, 2 tiles are blue, and 3 tiles are purple. What fraction of the tiles are yellow or purple?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{6}$$
b. $$\frac{2}{6}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{6}$$
d. $$\frac{4}{6}$$

Answer: $$\frac{4}{6}$$

Explanation:
Given,
June made a design with 6 equal tiles. One tile is yellow, 2 tiles are blue, and 3 tiles are purple.
We have to put the total number of tiles in the denominator.
The number of yellow or purple tiles is 3 + 1 = 4 put it in the numerator.
The fraction of the tiles are yellow or purple is $$\frac{4}{6}$$.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
The fourth grade collected 40,583 cans and plastic bottles. Which of the following shows that number in word form?
Options:
a. forty thousand, five hundred eighty
b. forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three
c. four thousand, five hundred eighty-three
d. four hundred thousand, five hundred eighty

Answer: forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three

Explanation:
Given,
The fourth grade collected 40,583 cans and plastic bottles.
The expanded form of 40,583 is forty thousand, five hundred eighty-three.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 11

Rename Numbers

Rename the number. Use the place-value chart to help.

Question 1.
760 hundreds = 76,000

Question 2.
805 tens = ________

 THOUSANDS ONES Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones _________ _________ _________ _________

 THOUSANDS ONES Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones 8 0 5 0

Question 3.
24 ten thousands = ________

 THOUSANDS ONES Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones _________ _________ _________ _________ _________ _________

 THOUSANDS ONES Hundreds Tens Ones Hundreds Tens Ones 2 4 0 0 0 0

Rename the number.

Question 4.
720 = ____ tens

Explanation:
720 can be calculated as 72 × 10 = 72 tens.

Question 5.
4 thousands 7 hundreds = 47 ________

Explanation:
4 thousands 7 hundreds
4700 = 47 × 100 = 47 hundreds

Question 6.
25,600 = ____ hundreds

Explanation:
25,600 = 256 × 100 = 256 hundreds

Question 7.
204 thousands = ____

Explanation:
204 thousands = 204 × 1000 = 204,000.

Problem Solving

Question 8.
For the fair, the organizers ordered 32 rolls of tickets. Each roll of tickets has 100 tickets. How many tickets were ordered in all?
____ tickets

Explanation:
Given,
For the fair, the organizers ordered 32 rolls of tickets. Each roll of tickets has 100 tickets.
32 × 100 tickets = 3200 tickets
Therefore 3200 tickets were ordered in all.

Question 9.
An apple orchard sells apples in bags of 10. The orchard sold a total of 2,430 apples one day. How many bags of apples was this?
____ bags

Explanation:
Given,
An apple orchard sells apples in bags of 10. The orchard sold a total of 2,430 apples one day.
2430/10 = 243 bags
There were 243 bags of apples.

Question 10.
Explain how you can rename 5,400 as hundreds. Include a quick picture or a place-value chart in your explanation.
____ hundreds

Explanation:
It would be 54 hundreds because:
In 5400 there are 2 zeros
Also in 100, there are 2 zeros
2 zeros equals a hundred
100=1 hundred, because it has a 1 in front of the 2 zeros
5400=54 hundreds, because it has a 54 in front of the 2 zeros

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 12

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A dime has the same value as 10 pennies. Marley brought 290 pennies to the bank. How many dimes did Marley get?
Options:
a. 29
b. 290
c. 2,900
d. 29,000

Explanation:
Given,
A dime has the same value as 10 pennies. Marley brought 290 pennies to the bank.
To find How many dimes did Marley get we have to divide 290 pennies by 10 pennies.
290/10 = 29
Therefore Marley gets 29 pennies.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
A citrus grower ships grapefruit in boxes of 10. One season, the grower shipped 20,400 boxes of grapefruit. How many grapefruit were shipped?
Options:
a. 204
b. 2,040
c. 20,400
d. 204,000

Explanation:
Given,
A citrus grower ships grapefruit in boxes of 10.
One season, the grower shipped 20,400 boxes of grapefruit.
We need to find How many grapefruit were shipped.
Multiply 20,400 boxes with 10.
20,400 × 10 = 204,000
Therefore 204,000 grapefruit were shipped.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
There were 2,605 people at the basketball game. A reporter rounded this number to the nearest hundred for a newspaper article. What number did the reporter use?
Options:
a. 2,600
b. 2,610
c. 2,700
d. 3,000

Explanation:
Given,
There were 2,605 people at the basketball game. A reporter rounded this number to the nearest hundred for a newspaper article.
To find:
What number did the reporter use?
The number 2605 nearest to the hundred is 2600.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
To get to Level 3 in a game, a player must score 14,175 points. Ann scores 14,205 points, Ben scores 14,089 points, and Chuck scores 10,463 points. Which score is greater than the Level 3 score?
Options:
a. 14,205
b. 14,175
c. 14,089
d. 10,463

Explanation:
Given,
To get to Level 3 in a game, a player must score 14,175 points. Ann scores 14,205 points, Ben scores 14,089 points, and Chuck scores 10,463 points.
By seeing the above points we can say that 14,205 is greater than level 3.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
Henry counted 350 lockers in his school. Hayley counted 403 lockers in her school. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. The 3 in 350 is 10 times the value of the 3 in 403.
b. The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403.
c. The 3 in 403 is 10 times the value of the 3 in 350.
d. The 3 in 403 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 350.

Answer: The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403.

Explanation:
Given,
Henry counted 350 lockers in his school. Hayley counted 403 lockers in her school.
The statement “The 3 in 350 is 100 times the value of the 3 in 403” is true.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
There are 4 muffins on each plate. There are 0 plates of lemon muffins. How many lemon muffins are there?
Options:
a. 4
b. 2
c. 1
d. 0

Explanation:
Given,
There are 4 muffins on each plate. There are 0 plates of lemon muffins.
Multiply the number of muffins with the number of plates.
4 × 0 = 0
There are 0 lemon muffins.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 13

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 1.
Estimate: 90,000

Question 2.
73,404
+ 27,865
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 100,000
Sum: 101,269
Estimate:
The number rounded to 73,404 is 70,000.
The number rounded to 27,865 is 30,000.
70,000
+30,000
100,000
Sum:
73,404
+ 27,865
101,269

Question 3.
404,446
+ 396,755
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 800,000
Sum: 800,201
Estimate:
The number rounded to 400,000
The number rounded to 400,000
400,000
+400,000
800,000
Sum:
404,446
+ 396,755
800,201

Question 4.
137,638
+ 52,091
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 200,000
Sum: 189,729
Estimate:
The number rounded to 150,000
The number rounded to 50,000
150,000
+50,000
200,000
Sum:
137,638
+ 52,091
189,729

Question 5.
200,629
+ 28,542
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 250,000
Sum: 229,171
Estimate:
The number rounded to 200,000
The number rounded to 50,000
200,000
+50,000
250,000
Sum:
200,629
+ 28,542
229,171

Question 6.
212,514
+ 396,705
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 600,000
Sum: 609,219
Estimate:
The number rounded to 200,000
The number rounded to 400,000
200,000
+400,000
600,000
Sum:
212,514
+ 396,705
609,219

Question 7.
324,867
+ 6,233
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 330,000
Sum: 331,100
Estimate:
The number rounded to 324,000
The number rounded to 6,000
324,000
+ 6,000
330,000
Sum:
324,867
+ 6,233
331,100

Question 8.
462,809
+ 256,738
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 800,000
Sum: 719,547
Estimate:
The number rounded to 500,000
The number rounded to 300,000
500,000
+300,000
800,000
Sum:
462,809
+ 256,738
719,547

Question 9.
624,836
+ 282,189
————
Estimate: _______
Sum: _______

Estimate: 900,000
Sum: 907,025
Estimate:
The number rounded to 600,000
The number rounded to 300,000
600,000
+300,000
900,000
Sum:
624,836
+ 282,189
907,025

Problem Solving

Use the table for 10–12.

Question 10.
Beth and Cade were on one team. What was their total score?
______

Explanation:
The score of Beth is 251,567
The score of Cade is 155,935
251,567
+155,935
407,502
Thus the total score of Beth and Cade is 407,502.

Question 11.
Dillan and Elaine were on the other team. What was their total score?
______

Explanation:
The score of Dillan is 188,983
The score of Elaine is 220,945
188,983
+220,945
409,928
The total score of Dillan and Elaine is 409,928.

Question 12.
Which team scored the most points?
_________

The total score of Dillan and Elaine is 409,928.
The total score of Beth and Cade is 407,502.
409,928
-407,502
002,226
Thus Dillan and Elaine team scored the most points.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 14

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The coastline of the United States is 12,383 miles long. Canada’s coastline is 113,211 miles longer than the coastline of the United States. How long is the coastline of Canada?
Options:
a. 100,828 miles
b. 115,594 miles
c. 125,594 miles
d. 237,041 miles

Explanation:
Given,
The coastline of the United States is 12,383 miles long.
Canada’s coastline is 113,211 miles longer than the coastline of the United States.
113,211
+12,383
125,594
Therefore, the coastline of Canada is 125,594 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Germany is the seventh largest European country and is slightly smaller by area than Montana. Germany has a land area of 134,835 square miles and a water area of 3,011 square miles. What is the total area of Germany?
Options:
a. 7,846 square miles
b. 131,824 square miles
c. 137,846 square miles
d. 435,935 square miles

Explanation:
Given,
Germany is the seventh largest European country and is slightly smaller by area than Montana. Germany has a land area of 134,835 square miles and a water area of 3,011 square miles.
134,835
+ 3,011
137,846
Therefore the total area of Germany is 137,846 square miles.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
In an election, about 500,000 people voted in all. Which number could be the exact number of people who voted in the election?
Options:
a. 429,455
b. 441,689
c. 533,736
d. 550,198

Explanation:
Given,
In an election, about 500,000 people voted in all.
The number near to 500,000 is 533,736.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
In 2007, Pennsylvania had approximately 121,580 miles of public roads. What is 121,580 rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 100,000
b. 120,000
c. 121,000
d. 122,000

Explanation:
Given,
121,580 rounded to the nearest thousand is 122,000.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Which of the following lists of numbers is in order from greatest to least?
Options:
a. 33,093; 33,903; 33,309
b. 42,539; 24,995; 43,539
c. 682,131; 628,000; 682,129
d. 749,340; 740,999; 740,256

Explanation:
a. 33,093; 33,903; 33,309
33,093 = 33,903 = 33,309
b. 42,539; 24,995; 43,539
42,539 > 24,995 < 43,539
c. 682,131; 628,000; 682,129
682,131 > 628,000 < 682,129
d. 749,340; 740,999; 740,256
749,340 > 740,999 > 740,256
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 6.
Which symbol makes the following statement true?
$413,115$431,511
Options:
a. <
b. >
c. =
d. +

Explanation:
The number $413,115 is less than$431,511
$413,115 <$431,511
Thus the correct answer is option a.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 15

Subtract Whole Numbers

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 1.

Question 2.
428,731
– 175,842
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 252,889
Estimate:
The number rounded to 428,731 is 400,000
The number rounded to 175,842 is 200,000
400,000
-200,000
200,000
Difference:
428,731
– 175,842
252,889

Question 3.
920,026
– 535,722
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Estimate: 400,000
Difference: 384,304
Estimate:
The number rounded to 920,026 is 900,000
The number rounded to 535,722 is 500,000
900,000
-500,000
400,000
Difference:
920,026
– 535,722
384,304

Question 4.
253,495
– 48,617
————-
Estimate: _______
Difference: _______

Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 204,878
Estimate:
The number rounded to 253,495 is 250,000
The number rounded to 48,617 is 50,000

Question 5.
735,249 – 575,388 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

735,249
-575,388
159,861
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
159,861
+575,388
735,249

Question 6.
512,724 – 96,473 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

512,724
-96,473
416,251
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
416,251
96,473
512,724

Question 7.
600,000 – 145,782 = ______
______ + ______ = ______

600,000
-145,782
454,218
Now check whether the answer is correct or wrong.
454,218
+145,782
600,000

Problem Solving

Use the table for 8 and 9.

Question 8.
How many more people attended the Magic’s games than attended the Pacers’ games?
______ people

Explanation:
Number of people attended Magic’s games = 715,901
Number of people attended Pacers’ games = 582,295
To find:
How many more people attended the Magic’s games than attended the Pacers’ games
We need to subtract the Number of people attended Pacers’ games from the Number of people attended Magic’s games
715,901
-582,295
133,606

Question 9.
How many fewer people attended the Pacers’ games than attended the Clippers’ games?
______ people

Explanation:
Number of people attended Pacers’ games = 582,295
Number of people attended Clippers’ games = 670,063
To find:
How many fewer people attended the Pacers’ games than attended the Clippers’ games
We need to subtract the number of people attended Pacers’ games from the Number of people attended Clippers’ games
670,063
-582,295
87,768

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 16

Lesson Check

Question 1.
This year, a farm planted 400,000 corn stalks. Last year, the farm planted 275,650 corn stalks. How many more corn stalks did the farm plant this year than last year?
Options:
a. 124,350
b. 125,450
c. 235,450
d. 275,650

Explanation:
Given,
This year, a farm planted 400,000 corn stalks.
Last year, the farm planted 275,650 corn stalks.
400,000
-275,650
124,350
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
One machine can make 138,800 small paper clips in one day. Another machine can make 84,250 large paper clips in one day. How many more small paper clips than large paper clips are made by the two machines in one day?
Options:
a. 44,550
b. 54,550
c. 54,650
d. 154,650

Explanation:
Given,
One machine can make 138,800 small paper clips in one day.
Another machine can make 84,250 large paper clips in one day
138,800
-84,250
54,550
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
In three baseball games over a weekend, 125,429 people came to watch. The next weekend, 86,353 came to watch the games. How many people in all watched
the six baseball games?
Options:
a. 201,782
b. 211,772
c. 211,782
d. 211,882

Explanation:
Given,
In three baseball games over a weekend, 125,429 people came to watch.
The next weekend, 86,353 came to watch the games.
125,429
+86,353
211,782
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Kevin read the number “two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight” in a book. What is this number in standard form?
Options:
a. 27,048
b. 27,480
c. 207,048
d. 207,480

Explanation:
Given,
Kevin read the number “two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight” in a book.
The standard form of two hundred seven thousand, forty-eight is 207,048.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
A museum had 275,608 visitors last year. What is this number rounded to the nearest thousand?
Options:
a. 275,600
b. 276,000
c. 280,000
d. 300,000

Explanation:
A museum had 275,608 visitors last year.
The number 275,608 rounded to the nearest thousand is 276,000
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
At the Millville Theater, a play ran for several weeks. In all, 28,175 people saw the play. What is the value of the digit 8 in 28,175?
Options:
a. 8
b. 800
c. 8,000
d. 80,000

Explanation:
At the Millville Theater, a play ran for several weeks. In all, 28,175 people saw the play.
Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 8 in 28,175 is 8000.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 17

Problem Solving Comparison Problems with Addition and Substraction

Use the information in the table for 1–3.

Question 1.
How many square miles larger is the surface area of Lake Huron than the surface area of Lake Erie?
Think: How can a bar model help represent the problem? What equation can be written?

Question 1.

Question 2.
Which lake has a surface area that is 14,938 square miles greater than the surface area of Lake Ontario? Draw a model and write a number sentence to solve the problem.
_________

Explanation:
The surface area of Lake Ontario is 7,340 square miles.
14,938
+7,340
22,278 square miles

Question 3.
Lake Victoria has the largest surface area of all lakes in Africa. Its surface area is 26,828 square miles. How much larger is the surface area of Lake Superior than that of Lake Victoria?
_____ square milles

Explanation:
The surface area of Lake Victoria is 26,828 square miles.
The surface area of Lake Superior is 31,700 square miles.
31,700
-26,828
04,872
The surface area of Lake Superior is 4,872 square miles larger than Lake Victoria.

Question 4.
At 840,000 square miles, Greenland is the largest island in the world. The second-largest island is New Guinea, at 306,000 square miles. How much larger is Greenland than New Guinea?
_____ square milles

Explanation:
Given,
At 840,000 square miles, Greenland is the largest island in the world.
The second-largest island is New Guinea, at 306,000 square miles.
840,000
-306,000
534,000
Greenland is 534,000 square miles larger than New Guinea.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 18

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The Mariana Trench in the Pacific Ocean is about 36,201 feet deep. The Puerto Rico Trench in the Atlantic Ocean is about 27,493 feet deep. Based on these data, how many feet deeper is the Mariana Trench than the Puerto Rico Trench?
Options:
a. 8,708 feet
b. 9,718 feet
c. 9,808 feet
d. 63,694 feet

Explanation:
Given,
The Mariana Trench in the Pacific Ocean is about 36,201 feet deep.
The Puerto Rico Trench in the Atlantic Ocean is about 27,493 feet deep.
36,201
-27,493
08,708 feet
Mariana Trench is 8708 feet deeper than the Puerto Rico Trench.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
At 1,932 feet, Crater Lake, Oregon, is the deepest lake in the United States. The world’s deepest lake, Lake Baykal in Russia, is 3,383 feet deeper. How deep is Lake Baykal?
Options:
a. 3,383 feet
b. 4,215 feet
c. 4,315 feet
d. 5,315 feet

Explanation:
At 1,932 feet, Crater Lake, Oregon, is the deepest lake in the United States.
The world’s deepest lake, Lake Baykal in Russia, is 3,383 feet deeper.
3383
+1932
5315
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which of the following amounts is greater than $832,458? Options: a.$82,845
b. $832,458 c.$823,845
d. $832,485 Answer:$832,485

Explanation:
We have to compare all the options with $832,458 a.$82,845 < $832,458 b.$832,458 = $832,458 c.$823,845 < $832,458 d.$832,485 > $832,458 Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 4. A stadium in Pennsylvania seats 107,282 people. A stadium in Arizona seats 71,706 people. Based on these facts, how many more people does the stadium in Pennsylvania seat than the stadium in Arizona? Options: a. 35,576 b. 35,586 c. 36,576 d. 178,988 Answer: 35,576 Explanation: Given, A stadium in Pennsylvania seats 107,282 people. A stadium in Arizona seats 71,706 people. 107,282 -71,706 35,576 Thus the correct answer is option a. Question 5. Which of the following numbers is 399,713 rounded to the place value of the underlined digit? Options: a. 390,000 b. 398,000 c. 399,800 d. 400,000 Answer: 400,000 Explanation: The number 399,713 rounded to the place value of the underlined digit is 400,000. Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 6. About 400,000 people visited an art museum in December. Which number could be the exact number of people who visited the art museum? Options: a. 478,051 b. 452,223 c. 352,483 d. 348,998 Answer: 352,483 Explanation: About 400,000 people visited an art museum in December. The number that could be the exact number of people who visited the art museum is 352,483. Thus the correct answer is option c. ### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 19 Lesson 1.1 Find the value of the underlined digit. Question 1. 6,493 ____ Answer: 90 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 6,493 is 90. Question 2. 16,403 ____ Answer: 10,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 1 in 16,403 is 10,000. Question 3. 725,360 ____ Answer: 300 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 3 in 725,360 is 300. Question 4. 952,635 ____ Answer: 900,000 Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 9 in 952,635 is 900,000. Compare the values of the underlined digits in 46,395 and 14,906. Question 5. The value of 4 in ____ is ____ times the value of 4 in ____. Answer: The value of 4 in 46,395 is 10 times the value of 4 in 14,906. Explanation: Every digit in a number has a place value and the place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number. So the place value of the digit 4 in 46,395 is 40,000. And the place value of the digit 4 in 14,906 is 4,000. So, the value of 4 in 46,395 is 10 times the value of 4 in 14,906. Lesson 1.2 Read and write the number in two other forms. Question 6. 304,001 word form: _______ expanded form: _______ Answer: word form: three hundred four thousand one expanded form: 300,000 + 4000 + 1 Explanation: Convert the number 304,001 into the word form three hundred four thousand one. The expanded form of 304,001 is 300,000 + 4000 + 1 Question 7. two hundred eight thousand, five hundred sixty-one standard form: _______ _______ Answer: The standard form of two hundred eight thousand, five hundred sixty-one is 208,561. The expanded form of 208,561 is 200,000 + 8,000 + 500 + 60 + 1 Use the number 751,486. Question 8. Write the name of the period that has the digits 486. _________ Answer: The name of the period that has the digits 486 is Ones. Question 9. Write the name of the period that has the digits 751. _________ Answer: The name of the period that has the digits 751 is thousands. Question 10. Write the digit in the thousands place. The digit in the thousands place: ____ Answer: The digit in the thousands place is 1. Question 11. Write the value of the digit 5. ____ Answer: The value of the digit 5 in 751,486 is 50,000. Lesson 1.3 Compare. Write <, >, or =. Question 12. 6,930 ____ 7,023 Answer: < Explanation: The number 6,930 is less than 7,023 6,930 < 7,023 Question 13. 98,903 ____ 98,930 Answer: < Explanation: The number 98,903 is less than 98,930 98,903 < 98,930 Question 14. 549,295 ____ 547,364 Answer: > Explanation: The number 549,295 is greater than 547,364 549,295 > 547,364 Order from least to greatest. Question 15.$26,940; $25,949;$26,490
Options:
a. $25,949;$26,490; $26,940 b.$26,490; $25,949;$26,940
c. $26,940;$25,949; $26,490 Answer:$25,949; $26,490;$26,940

Explanation:
We have to write the numbers from the least to the greatest.
$25,949 <$26,490 < $26,940 The order from the least to the greatest is$25,949; $26,490;$26,940
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 16.
634,943; 639,443; 589,932
Options:
a. 639,443; 589,932; 634,943
b. 634,943; 639,443; 589,932
c. 589,932; 634,943; 639,443

Explanation:
We have to write the numbers from the least to the greatest.
589,932 < 634,943 < 639,443
The order from the least to the greatest is 589,932; 634,943; 639,443
Thus the correct answer is option c.

### Common Core – Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million – Page No. 20

Lesson 1.4

Round to the place value of the underlined digit.

Question 1.
286,476
____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 6 in 286,476 is 286,000.

Question 2.
289,342
____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 9 in 289,342 is 289,000.

Question 3.
245,001
____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 4 in 245,001 is 250,000.

Question 4.
183,002
____

Explanation:
Look at the digit to the right. If the digit to the right is less than 5, the digit in the rounding place stays the same.
Change all the digits to the right of the rounding place to zero.
The place value of 1 in 183,002 is 200,000.

Lesson 1.5

Rename the number.

Question 5.
82 thousands = ____

Explanation:
82 thousands = 82 × 1000 = 82,000.

Question 6.
600,000 = ____ ten thousands

Explanation:
600,000 = 60 × 10000
60 × 10000 = 60 ten thousands

Question 7.
9,200 = ____ hundreds

Explanation:
9,200 = 92 × 100 = 92 hundreds

Question 8.
8 ten thousands 4 hundreds = ____

Explanation:
8 ten thousands 4 hundreds
8 × 10,000 + 4 × 100 = 80,000 + 400 = 80,400

Lesson 1.6

Estimate. Then find the sum.

Question 9.
94,903
+ 49,995
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Estimate: 140000
Sum: 144898

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 94,903 is 90,000
The number rounded to 49,995 is 50,000
90,000
+50,000
140,000
Sum:
94,903
+ 49,995
144,898

Question 10.
420,983
+ 39,932
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Estimate: 460,000
Sum: 460915

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 420,983 is 420,000
The number rounded to 39,932 is 40,000
420,000
+40,000
460,000
Sum:
420,983
+39,932
460,915

Question 11.
540,943
+ 382,093
————
Estimate: ________
Sum: ________

Estimate: 940,000
Sum: 923036

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 540,943 is 540,000
The number rounded to 382,093 is 400,000
540,000
+400,000
940,000
Sum:
540,943
+ 382,093
923,036

Lesson 1.7

Estimate. Then find the difference.

Question 12.
25,953
– 9,745
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Estimate: 15,000
Difference: 16,208

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 25,953 is 25,000
The number rounded to 9,745 is 10,000.
25,000
-10,000
15,000
Difference:
25,953
– 9,745
16,208

Question 13.
740,758
– 263,043
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Estimate: 450,000
Difference: 477715

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 740,758 is 750,000
The number rounded to 263,043 is 300,000
750,000
-300,000
450,000
Difference:
740,758
– 263,043
477,715

Question 14.
807,632
– 592,339
————
Estimate: ________
Difference: ________

Estimate: 200,000
Difference: 215293

Explanation:
Estimate:
The number rounded to 807,632 is 800,000
The number rounded to 592,339 is 600,000
800,000
-600,000
200,000
Difference:
807,632
– 592,339
215293

Lesson 1.8

Question 15.
The attendance for the first game of the football season was 93,584. The attendance for the second game was 104,227. How many more people attended the second game than the first game?
______ people

Explanation:
Given,
The attendance for the first game of the football season was 93,584.
The attendance for the second game was 104,227.
104,227
-93,584
10,643
Thus, 10,643 more people attended the second game than the first game.

Question 16.
Abby and Lee sold raffle tickets to raise money for a new playground. Abby sold 1,052 tickets. Lee sold 379 more tickets than Abby. How many tickets did Lee sell?
______ tickets

Explanation:
Given,
Abby and Lee sold raffle tickets to raise money for a new playground.
Abby sold 1,052 tickets. Lee sold 379 more tickets than Abby.
1,052
+379
1431
Therefore, Lee sell 1431 tickets.

Conclusion:

Expert opinion is included to solve the problems of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million. Refer HMH Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key to secure the highest marks in the exams. The methods shown in this chapter are simple and easy. If you have any doubts go through the exercise problems of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 1 Place Value, Addition, and Subtraction to One Million pdf.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers: It is essential for all the 4th-grade students to learn the basics of maths. The fundamentals will help you to become a master in maths. So, in order to help you guys, we have provided the clear-cut explanations for all the questions in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers

Lesson: 1 – Multiples of Unit Fractions

Lesson: 2 – Multiples of Fractions

Lesson: 3 – Multiply a Fraction by a Whole Number Using Models

Lesson: 4 – Multiply a Fraction or Mixed Number by a Whole Number.

Lesson: 5 – Problem Solving Comparison

Lesson: 6

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 157

Multiples of Unit Fractions

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 1.

Explanation:
Given that 5/6 or 5 sixth-size parts.
Each sixth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/6.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
5/6 = 5 x 1/6.

Question 2.
$$\frac{7}{8}$$
Type below:
_________

7 x 1/8

Explanation:
Given that 7/8 or 7 eighth-size parts.
Each eighth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/8.
You can use unit fractions to show 7/8
7/8 = 7 x 1/8.

Question 3.
$$\frac{5}{3}$$
Type below:
_________

5 x 1/3

Explanation:
Given that 5/3 or 5 third-size parts.
Each third-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/3.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
5/3 = 5 x 1/3.

Question 4.
$$\frac{9}{10}$$
Type below:
_________

9 x 1/10

Explanation:
Given that 9/10 or 9 tenth-size parts.
Each tenth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/10.
You can use unit fractions to show 9/10
9/10 = 9 x 1/10.

Question 5.
$$\frac{3}{4}$$
Type below:
_________

3 x 1/4

Explanation:
Given that 3/4 or 3 fourth-size parts.
Each fourth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/4.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
3/4 = 3 x 1/4.

Question 6.
$$\frac{11}{12}$$
Type below:
_________

11 x 1/12

Explanation:
Given that 11/12 or 11 twelve-size parts.
Each twelve-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/12.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
11/12 = 11 x 1/12.

Question 7.
$$\frac{4}{6}$$
Type below:
_________

4 x 1/6

Explanation:
Given that 4/6 or 4 sixth-size parts.
Each sixth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/6.
You can use unit fractions to show 4/6
4/6 = 4 x 1/6.

Question 8.
$$\frac{8}{20}$$
Type below:
_________

8 x 1/20

Explanation:
Given that 8/20 or 8 twenty-size parts.
Each twenty-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/20.
You can use unit fractions to show 8/20
8/20 = 8 x 1/20.

Question 9.
$$\frac{13}{100}$$
Type below:
_________

13 x 1/100

Explanation:
Given that 13/100 or 13 hundred-size parts.
Each hundred-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/100.
You can use unit fractions to show 13/100
13/100 = 13 x 1/100.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction.

Question 10.
$$\frac{1}{5}$$,
Type below:
_________

2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 5/5

Explanation:

2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 5/5

Question 11.
$$\frac{1}{8}$$,
Type below:
_________

2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8

Explanation:

2/8, 3/8, 4/8, 5/8

Problem Solving

Question 12.
So far, Monica has read $$\frac{5}{6}$$ of a book. She has read the same number of pages each day for 5 days. What fraction of the book does Monica read each day?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ of the book

Explanation:
Monica has read 5/6 of a book. She has read the same number of pages each day for 5 days.
For 1 day, she read one page. In total, she read 5 pages in 5 days. So, Monica read 1/6 of a book each day.

Question 13.
So far, Monica has read $$\frac{3}{8}$$ of a book. She has read the same number of pages each day for 5 days. What fraction of the book does Monica read each day?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ pound of cheese

Explanation:
Nicholas buys 3/8 pound of cheese. He bought 3 sandwiches. Then, he applied 3/8 pound of cheese on 3 sandwiches. So, 3 x 1/8 cheese he put on 3 sandwiches. So, for one sandwich he put 1/8 pound of cheese.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 158

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Selena walks from home to school each morning and back home each afternoon. Altogether, she walks $$\frac{2}{3}$$ mile each day. How far does Selena live from school?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{3}$$ mile
b. $$\frac{2}{3}$$ mile
c. 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ miles
d. 2 miles

Explanation:
Selena walks from home to school each morning and back home each afternoon.
Altogether, she walks 2/3 miles each day.
The distance between home and school will remain the same.
So, 2/3 x 1/2 = 1/3 mile far Selena live from the school.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
Will uses $$\frac{3}{4}$$ cup of olive oil to make 3 batches of salad dressing. How much oil does Will use for one batch of salad dressing?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ cup
b. $$\frac{1}{3}$$ cup
c. 2 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ cups
d. 3 cups

Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$ cup

Explanation:
Will uses 3/4 cups of olive oil to make 3 batches of salad dressing.
To know the one batch of salad dressing, we need to take one part of salad dressing = 1/3.
So, 3/4 x 1/3 = 1/4 cup of olive oil will use for one batch of salad dressing.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Liza bought $$\frac{5}{8}$$ pound of trail mix. She gives $$\frac{2}{8}$$ pound of trail mix to Michael. How much trail mix does Liza have left?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{8}$$ pound
b. $$\frac{2}{8}$$ pound
c. $$\frac{3}{8}$$ pound
d. $$\frac{4}{8}$$ pound

Explanation:
Liza bought 58 pound of trail mix. She gives 28 pounds of trail mix to Michael.
So, Liza has left 5/8 – 2/8 = 3/8 trail mix.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
Leigh has a piece of rope that is 6 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ feet long. How do you write 6 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ as a fraction greater than 1?
Options:
a. $$\frac{11}{3}$$ pound
b. $$\frac{15}{3}$$ pound
c. $$\frac{20}{3}$$ pound
d. $$\frac{62}{3}$$ pound

Explanation:
Multiply the denominator with the whole number. i.e Multiply 3 with 6 in the given example, 6 (2/3).
3 x 6 =18.
Keep the Denominator the same i.e. 3.
The obtained fraction is 20/3.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Randy’s house number is a composite number. Which of the following could be Randy’s house number?
Options:
a. 29
b. 39
c. 59
d. 79

Explanation:
The composite numbers can be defined as the whole numbers that have more than two factors. Whole numbers that are not prime are composite numbers because they are divisible by more than two numbers. 39 is the composite number. 39 is divide by 13 and 3.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Mindy buys 12 cupcakes. Nine of the cupcakes have chocolate frosting and the rest have vanilla frosting. What fraction of the cupcakes have vanilla frosting?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$
b. $$\frac{1}{3}$$
c. $$\frac{2}{3}$$
d. $$\frac{3}{4}$$

Explanation:
Nine of the cupcakes have chocolate frosting = 9/12.
The rest have vanilla frosting. So, there are 3 cups remained = 3/12 = 1/4.
1/4 cupcakes have vanilla frosting.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 159

Multiples of Fractions

List the next four multiples of the fraction.

Question 1.
$$\frac{3}{5}$$,
Type below:
_________

6/5, 9/5, 12/5, 20/5

Explanation:
1 x 3/5 = 3/5.
2 x 3/5 = 6/5.
3 x 3/5 = 9/5.
4 x 3/5 = 12/5.
5 x 4/5 = 20/5.
The next four multiples of 3/5 are 6/5, 9/5, 12/5, 20/5.

Question 2.
$$\frac{2}{6}$$,
Type below:
_________

4/6, 6/6, 8/6, 10/6

Explanation:
1 x 2/6 = 2/6.
2 x 2/6 = 4/6.
3 x 2/6 = 6/6.
4 x 2/6 = 8/6.
5 x 2/6 = 10/6.
The next four multiples of 2/6 are 4/6, 6/6, 8/6, 10/6.

Question 3.
$$\frac{4}{8}$$,
Type below:
_________

8/8, 12/8, 16/8, 20/8

Explanation:
1 x 4/8 = 4/8.
2 x 4/8 = 8/8.
3 x 4/8 = 12/8.
4 x 4/8 = 16/8.
5 x 4/8 = 20/8.
The next four multiples of 4/8 are 8/8, 12/8, 16/8, 20/8.

Question 4.
$$\frac{5}{10}$$,
Type below:
_________

10/10, 15/10, 20/10, 25/10

Explanation:
1 x 5/10 = 5/10.
2 x 5/10 = 10/10.
3 x 5/10 = 15/10.
4 x 5/10 = 20/10.
5 x 5/10 = 25/10.
The next four multiples of 5/10 are 10/10, 15/10, 20/10, 25/10.

Write the product as the product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 5.

2 × $$\frac{4}{5}$$ =
Type Below:
_________

Answer: 8/5 = 8 x 1/5

Explanation:
1 group of 4/5 = 4/5
2 groups of 4/5 = 8/5
2 x 4/5 = 8/5 = 8 x 1/5.

Question 6.

5 × $$\frac{2}{3}$$ =
Type below:
_________

10/3 = 10 x 1/3

Explanation:
1 group of 2/3 = 2/3
2 group of 2/3 = 4/3
3 group of 2/3 = 6/3
4 group of 2/3 = 8/3
5 group of 2/3 = 10/3
5 x 2/3 = 10/3 = 10 x 1/3.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Jessica is making 2 loaves of banana bread. She needs $$\frac{3}{4}$$ cup of sugar for each loaf. Her measuring cup can only hold $$\frac{1}{4}$$ cup of sugar. How many times will Jessica need to fill the measuring cup in order to get enough sugar for both loaves of bread?
_____ times

Explanation:
Jessica is making 2 loaves of banana bread. She needs a 3/4 cup of sugar for each loaf.
For 2 loaves, she needs 2 x 3/4 = 6/4 cups of sugar.
Her measuring cup can only hold 1/4 cup of sugar. So, to get the 3/4 cup of sugar, she needs to fill the cup 3 times. 1/4 + 1/4 + 1/4 = 3/4.
So, to fill 2 loaves, she needs to fill cup 3 x 2 = 6 times.

Question 8.
A group of four students is performing an experiment with salt. Each student must add $$\frac{3}{8}$$ teaspoon of salt to a solution. The group only has a $$\frac{1}{8}$$ teaspoon measuring spoon. How many times will the group need to fill the measuring spoon in order to perform the experiment?
_____ times

Explanation:
A group of four students is performing an experiment with salt. Each student must add a 3/8 teaspoon of salt to a solution. 4 x 3/8 = 12/8 teaspoon of salt required to finish the experiment.
If they have 1/8 teaspoon measuring spoon, 12 x 1/8.
So, the group needs to fill the measuring spoon 12 times in order to perform the experiment.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 160

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Eloise made a list of some multiples of $$\frac{5}{8}$$. Which of the following lists could be Eloise’s list?
Options:
a. $$\frac{5}{8}, \frac{10}{16}, \frac{15}{24}, \frac{20}{32}, \frac{25}{40}$$
b. $$\frac{5}{8}, \frac{10}{8}, \frac{15}{8}, \frac{20}{8}, \frac{25}{8}$$
c. $$\frac{5}{8}, \frac{6}{8}, \frac{7}{8}, \frac{8}{8}, \frac{9}{8}$$
d. $$\frac{1}{8}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{8}, \frac{4}{8}, \frac{5}{8}$$

Answer: b. 5/8, 10/8, 15/8, 20/8, 25/8
Explanation:
1 x 5/8 = 5/8.
2 x 5/8 = 10/8.
3 x 5/8 = 15/8.
4 x 5/8 = 20/8.
5 x 5/8 = 25/8.
The next four multiples of 5/8 are $$\frac{5}{8}, \frac{10}{8}, \frac{15}{8}, \frac{20}{8}, \frac{25}{8}$$
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
David is filling five $$\frac{3}{4}$$ quart bottles with a sports drink. His measuring cup only holds $$\frac{1}{4}$$ quart. How many times will David need to fill the measuring cup in order to fill the 5 bottles?
Options:
a. 5
b. 10
c. 15
d. 20

Explanation:
David is filling five 3/4 quart bottles with a sports drink = 5 x 3/4 = 15/4.
His measuring cup only holds 1/4 quart.
So, 15 x 1/4. David needs to fill the measuring cup 15 times in order to fill the 5 bottles.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Ira has 128 stamps in his stamp album. He has the same number of stamps on each of the 8 pages. How many stamps are on each page?
Options:
a. 12
b. 14
c. 16
d. 18

Explanation:
Ira has 128 stamps in his stamp album. He has the same number of stamps on each of the 8 pages.
128/8 = 16 stamps on each page.
So, there are 16 stamps on each page.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
Ryan is saving up for a bike that costs $198. So far, he has saved$15 per week for the last 12 weeks. How much more money does Ryan need in order to be able to buy the bike?
Options:
a. $8 b.$ 18
c. $48 d.$ 180

Answer: b. $18 Explanation: Ryan is saving up for a bike that costs$198.
So far, he has saved $15 per week for the last 12 weeks =$15 x 12 = $180.$198 – $180 =$18 need in order to buy the bike.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Tina buys 3 $$\frac{7}{8}$$ yards of material at the fabric store. She uses it to make a skirt. Afterward, she has 1 $$\frac{3}{8}$$ yards of the fabric leftover. How many yards of material did Tina use?
Options:
a. 1 $$\frac{4}{8}$$
b. 2 $$\frac{1}{8}$$
c. 2 $$\frac{4}{8}$$
d. 5 $$\frac{2}{8}$$

Explanation:
Tina buys 3 7/8 yards of material at the fabric store. She uses it to make a skirt. Afterward, she has 1 3/8 yards of the fabric leftover.
3 -1 = 2; 7/8 – 3/8 = 4/8.
So, the answer is 2 $$\frac{4}{8}$$.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Which list shows the fractions in order from least to greatest?
Options:
a. $$\frac{2}{3}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{7}{12}$$
b. $$\frac{7}{12}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{2}{3}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{4}, \frac{2}{3}, \frac{7}{12}$$
d. $$\frac{7}{12}, \frac{2}{3}, \frac{3}{4}$$

Answer: d. $$\frac{7}{12}, \frac{2}{3}, \frac{3}{4}$$

Explanation:
2/3 = 0.666
3/4 = 0.75
7/12 = 0.5833
$$\frac{7}{12}, \frac{2}{3}, \frac{3}{4}$$
Thus the correct answer is option d.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 161

Multiply a Fraction by a Whole Number Using Models

Multiply.

Question 1.

Question 2.
3 × $$\frac{2}{5}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

3 x 2/5 = 6/5

Question 3.
7 × $$\frac{3}{10}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

7 x 3/10 = 21/10

Question 4.
3 × $$\frac{5}{12}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

3 x 5/12 = 15/12

Question 5.
6 × $$\frac{3}{4}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

6 x 3/4 = 18/4

Question 6.
4 × $$\frac{2}{8}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

4 x 2/8 = 8/8

Question 7.
5 × $$\frac{2}{3}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

5 x 2/3 = 10/3

Question 8.
2 × $$\frac{7}{8}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

2 x 7/8 = 14/8

Question 9.
6 × $$\frac{4}{5}$$ = $$\frac{□}{□}$$

6 x 4/5 = 28/5

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Matthew walks $$\frac{5}{8}$$ mile to the bus stop each morning. How far will he walk in 5 days?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Matthew walks 5/8 mile to the bus stop each morning.
In 5 days, 5 x 5/8 = 25/8 miles.

Question 11.
Emily uses $$\frac{2}{3}$$ cup of milk to make one batch of muffins. How many cups of milk will Emily use if she makes 3 batches of muffins?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Emily uses a 2/3 cup of milk to make one batch of muffins.
Emily use 3 x 2/3 = 6/3 cups of milk to make 3 batches of muffins

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 162

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Aleta’s puppy gained $$\frac{3}{8}$$ pound each week for 4 weeks. Altogether, how much weight did the puppy gain during the 4 weeks?
Options:
a. $$\frac{8}{12}$$ pound
b. 1 $$\frac{2}{8}$$ pounds
c. $$\frac{12}{8}$$ pounds
d. 4 $$\frac{3}{8}$$ pounds

Answer: $$\frac{12}{8}$$ pounds

Explanation:
Aleta’s puppy gained 3/8 pound each week.
It gained 4 x 3/8 = 12/8 pounds in 4 weeks.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Pedro mixes $$\frac{3}{4}$$ teaspoon of plant food into each gallon of water. How many teaspoons of plant food should Pedro mix into 5 gallons of water?
Options:
a. $$\frac{3}{20}$$ teaspoon
b. $$\frac{4}{15}$$ teaspoon
c. $$\frac{8}{4}$$ teaspoons
d. $$\frac{15}{4}$$ teaspoons

Answer: d. $$\frac{15}{4}$$ teaspoons

Explanation:
If Pedro mixes 3/4 teaspoon of plant food into each gallon of water, then 5 x 3/4 = 15/4 teaspoon of plant food mix into 5 gallons of water.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Ivana has $$\frac{3}{4}$$pound of hamburger meat. She makes 3 hamburger patties. Each patty weighs the same amount. How much does each hamburger patty weigh?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pound
b. $$\frac{1}{3}$$ pound
c. 2 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pounds
d. 3 pounds

Answer: a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pound

Explanation:
Ivana has 3/4 pound of hamburger meat. She makes 3 hamburger patties.
Each patty weighs the same amount. So, each hamburger patty weighs 1/4 pound.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Which of the following expressions is NOT equal to $$\frac{7}{10}$$?
Options:
a. $$\frac{5}{10}+\frac{1}{10}+\frac{1}{10}$$
b. $$\frac{2}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{3}{10}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{10}+\frac{3}{10}+\frac{2}{10}$$
d. $$\frac{4}{10}+\frac{2}{10}+\frac{1}{10}$$

Explanation:
a. 5/10+1/10+1/10 = 7/10
b. 2/10+2/10+3/10 = 7/10
c. 3/10+3/10+2/10 = 8/10
d. 4/10+2/10+1/10 = 7/10
The expression not equal to $$\frac{7}{10}$$ is $$\frac{8}{10}$$
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
Lance wants to find the total length of 3 boards. He uses the expression $$3 \frac{1}{2}+\left(2+4 \frac{1}{2}\right)$$. How can Lance rewrite the expression using both the Associative and Commutative Properties of Addition?
Options:
a. $$5+4 \frac{1}{2}$$
b. $$\left(3 \frac{1}{2}+2\right)+4 \frac{1}{2}$$
c. $$2+\left(3 \frac{1}{2}+4 \frac{1}{2}\right)$$
d. $$3 \frac{1}{2}+\left(4 \frac{1}{2}+2\right)$$

Answer: She can write as (3 1/2 + 2) + 4 1/2

Question 6.
Which of the following statements is true?
Options:
a. $$\frac{5}{8}>\frac{9}{10}$$
b. $$\frac{5}{12}>\frac{1}{3}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{6}>\frac{4}{5}$$
d. $$\frac{1}{2}>\frac{3}{4}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}>\frac{3}{4}$$

Explanation:
0.625 > 0.9
0.416 > 0.333
0.5 > 0.8
0.5 > 0.75
Thus the correct answer is option d.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 163

Multiply a Fraction or Mixed Number by a Whole Number.

Multiply. Write the product as a mixed number.

Question 1.

1  5/10

Explanation:
5 × 3/10 = 15/10 = 1 and remainder is 5. So, the mixed fraction is 1  5/10

Question 2.
3 × $$\frac{3}{5}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

1 × 4/5

Explanation:
3 × 3/5 = 9/5 = 1 and remainder is 4. So, the mixed fraction is 1  4/5

Question 3.
5 × $$\frac{3}{4}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

3  3/4
Explanation:
15/4 = 3 and the remainder is 3. So, the mixed fraction is 3  3/4

Question 4.
4 × 1 $$\frac{1}{5}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

4  4/5
Explanation:
1 ×15 = 6/5.
4 x 6/5 = 24/5 = 4 and the remainder is 4. So, the mixed fraction is 4× 4/5

Question 5.
2 × 2 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

4  2/3
Explanation:
2 13 = 7/3.
2 x 7/3 = 14/3.
14/3 = 4 and the remainder is 2. So, the mixed fraction is 4 2/3

Question 6.
5 × 1 $$\frac{1}{6}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
1 1/6 = 7/6
5 x 7/6 = 35/6.
35/6 = 5 and the remainder is 5.
So, the mixed fraction is 5 5/6

Question 7.
2 × 2 $$\frac{7}{8}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
2 7/8 = 23/8
2 x 23/8 = 46/8 = 6 1/1

Question 8.
7 × 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
1 3/4 = 7/4
7 x 7/4 = 39/4
39/4 = 9 and the remainder is 3.
So, the mixed fraction is 9 3/4

Question 9.
8 × 1 $$\frac{3}{5}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
1 3/5 = 8/5
8 x 8/5 = 64/5
64/5 = 12 and the remainder is 4.
So, the mixed fraction is 12 4/5

Problem Solving

Question 10.
Brielle exercises for $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hour each day for 6 days in a row. Altogether, how many hours does she exercise during the 6 days?
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
6 x 3/4 = 18/4 = 4 and the remainder is 2.
So, the mixed fraction is 4 2/4.

Question 11.
A recipe for quinoa calls for 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ cups of milk. Conner wants to make 4 batches of quinoa. How much milk does he need?
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
quinoa calls for 8/3 cups of milk. Conner wants to make 4 batches of quinoa.
So, 4 x 8/3 = 32/3 = 10 and the remainder is 2.
So, the mixed fraction is 10 2/3

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 164

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A mother is 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ times as tall as her son. Her son is 3 feet tall. How tall is the mother?
Options:
a. 4 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ feet
b. 5 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ feet
c. 5 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ feet
d. 5 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ feet

Explanation:
A mother is 1 3/4 times as tall as her son. Her son is 3 feet tall.
So, 3 x 7/4 = 21/4 = 5 and the remainder is 1.
The mixed fraction is 5 1/4 feet.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
The cheerleaders are making a banner that is 8 feet wide. The length of the banner is 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ times the width of the banner. How long is the banner?
Options:
a. 8 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet
b. 8 $$\frac{3}{8}$$ feet
c. 10 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet
d. 10 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ feet

Explanation:
The cheerleaders are making a banner that is 8 feet wide. The length of the banner is 1 1/3 times the width of the banner.
So, 8 x 4/3 = 32/3 =10 and the remainder is 2.
The mixed fraction is 10 2/3 feet.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Karleigh walks $$\frac{5}{8}$$ mile to school every day. How far does she walk to school in 5 days?
Options:
a. $$\frac{5}{40}$$ mile
b. $$\frac{25}{40}$$ mile
c. $$\frac{10}{8}$$ miles
d. $$\frac{25}{8}$$ miles

Explanation:
5 x 5/8 = 25/8.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
Which number is a multiple of $$\frac{4}{5}$$?
Options:
a. $$\frac{8}{10}$$
b. $$\frac{12}{15}$$
c. $$\frac{16}{20}$$
d. $$\frac{12}{5}$$

Explanation:
The multiple of 45 has the denominator 5.
So, 12/5 is the correct answer.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Jo cut a key lime pie into 8 equal-size slices. The next day, $$\frac{7}{8}$$ of the pie is left. Jo puts each slice on its own plate. How many plates does she need?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Explanation:
Jo cut a key lime pie into 8 equal-size slices.
The next day, 78 of the pie is left. Jo puts each slice on its own plate.
She needs 7 plates.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Over the weekend, Ed spent 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ hours doing his math homework and 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hours doing his science project. Altogether, how much time did Ed spend doing homework over the weekend?
Options:
a. 3 hours
b. 2 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hours
c. 2 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ hours
d. 2 hours

Explanation:
Given,
Over the weekend, Ed spent 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ hours doing his math homework and 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hours doing his science project.
5/4 + 7/4 = 12/4 = 3 hours
Thus the correct answer is option a.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 165

Problem Solving Comparison

Problems with Fractions

Question 1.
A shrub is 1 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ feet tall. A small tree is 3 times as tall as the shrub. How tall is the tree?

Explanation:

Question 2.
You run 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ miles each day. Your friend runs 4 times as far as you do. How far does your friend run each day?
_________ miles

Explanation:
Given,
You run 1 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ miles each day.
Your friend runs 4 times as far as you do.
4 x 7/4 = 7 miles each day

Question 3.
At the grocery store, Ayla buys 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ pounds of ground turkey. Tasha buys 2 times as much ground turkey as Ayla. How much ground turkey does Tasha buy?
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ pounds

Explanation:
Given,
At the grocery store, Ayla buys 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ pounds of ground turkey.
Tasha buys 2 times as much ground turkey as Ayla.
2 x 4/3 = 8/3 = 2 and the remainder is 2.
The mixed fraction is 2 2/3 pounds.

Question 4.
When Nathan’s mother drives him to school, it takes $$\frac{1}{5}$$ hour. When Nathan walks to school, it takes him 4 times as long to get to school. How long does it take Nathan to walk to school?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ hours

Explanation:
Given,
When Nathan’s mother drives him to school, it takes $$\frac{1}{5}$$ hour.
When Nathan walks to school, it takes him 4 times as long to get to school.
4 x 1/5 = 4/5 hour
It takes 4/5 hour Nathan to walk to school.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 166

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A Wilson’s Storm Petrel is a small bird with a wingspan of 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet. A California Condor is a larger bird with a wingspan almost 7 times as wide as the wingspan of the petrel. About how wide is the wingspan of the California Condor?
Options:
a. $$\frac{4}{21}$$ foot
b. 2 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet
c. 7 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet
d. 9 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet

Explanation:
Given,
A Wilson’s Storm Petrel is a small bird with a wingspan of 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet.
A California Condor is a larger bird with a wingspan almost 7 times as wide as the wingspan of the petrel.
Convert from mixed fraction to the improper fraction.
1 1/3 = 4/3.
7 x 4/3 = 28/3 feet = 9 and the remainder is 1.
The mixed fraction is 9 1/3
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
The walking distance from the Empire State Building in New York City to Times Square is about $$\frac{9}{10}$$ mile. The walking distance from the Empire State Building to Sue’s hotel is about 8 times as far. About how far is Sue’s hotel from the Empire State Building?
Options:
a. $$\frac{9}{80}$$ mile
b. $$\frac{72}{80}$$ mile
c. 1 $$\frac{7}{10}$$ miles
d. 7 $$\frac{2}{10}$$ miles

Explanation:
Given,
The walking distance from the Empire State Building in New York City to Times Square is about $$\frac{9}{10}$$ mile.
The walking distance from the Empire State Building to Sue’s hotel is about 8 times as far.
8 x 9/10 mile = 72/10 mile = 7 and the remainder is 2.
The mixed fraction is 7 2/10 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which of the following expressions is NOT equal to 3 × 2 $$\frac{1}{4}$$?
Options:
a. $$3 \times \frac{9}{4}$$
b. (3 × 2) + (3 × $$\frac{1}{4}$$)
c. 6 $$\frac{3}{4}$$
d. 3 × 2 + $$\frac{1}{4}$$

Answer: d. 3 × 2 + 14

Explanation:
3 × 2 14 = 3 x 9/4 = 27/4
a. 3 × 94 = 27/4
b. (3 × 2) + (3 × 14) = 6 + 3/4 = 27/4
c. 6 3/4 = 27/4
d. 3 × 2 + 14 = 6 + 1/4 = 25/4
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 4.
At a bake sale, Ron sells $$\frac{7}{8}$$ of an apple pie and $$\frac{5}{8}$$ of a cherry pie. Altogether, how much pie does he sell at the bake sale?
Options:
a. $$\frac{2}{8}$$
b. $$\frac{12}{16}$$
c. $$\frac{12}{8}$$
d. $$\frac{35}{8}$$

Explanation:
Given,
At a bake sale, Ron sells $$\frac{7}{8}$$ of an apple pie and $$\frac{5}{8}$$ of a cherry pie.
7/8 + 5/8 = 12/8
The bake sale 12/8 pie.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 5.
On a ruler, which measurement is between $$\frac{3}{16}$$ inch and $$\frac{7}{8}$$ inch?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{16}$$ inch
b. $$\frac{1}{8}$$ inch
c. $$\frac{11}{16}$$ inch
d. $$\frac{15}{16}$$ inch

Explanation:
Subtract $$\frac{3}{16}$$ inch and $$\frac{7}{8}$$
Make denominators as common.
$$\frac{7}{8}$$ × $$\frac{2}{2}$$ = $$\frac{14}{16}$$
$$\frac{14}{16}$$ – $$\frac{3}{16}$$ = $$\frac{11}{16}$$ inch.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
Which of the following numbers is composite?
Options:
a. 4
b. 3
c. 2
d. 1

a. 4

Explanation:
A composite number is a positive integer that can be formed by multiplying two smaller positive integers. Equivalently, it is a positive integer that has at least one divisor other than 1 and itself.
The factors of 4 are 1, 2, 4.
4 has more than 2 factors.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 167

Lesson 8.1

Write the fraction as a product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 1.
$$\frac{5}{6}$$ =
Type below:
________

Explanation:
Given that 5/6 or 5 sixth-size parts.
Each sixth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/6.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
$$\frac{5}{6}$$ = 5 x 1/6.

Question 2.
$$\frac{7}{8}$$ =
Type below:
________

Explanation:
Given that 7/8 or 7 eighth-size parts.
Each eighth-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/8.
You can use unit fractions to show 7/8
$$\frac{7}{8}$$ = 7 x 1/8.

Question 3.
$$\frac{3}{5}$$ =
Type below:
________

Explanation:
Given that 5/3 or 5 third-size parts.
Each third-size part of the given fraction can be shown by the unit fraction 1/3.
You can use unit fractions to show 5/6
5/3 = 5 x 1/3.

List the next four multiples of the unit fraction

Question 4.
$$\frac{1}{2}$$,
Type below:
________

Explanation:
1 x 1/2 = 1/2.
2 x 1/2 = 2/2.
3 x 1/2 = 3/2.
4 x 1/2 = 4/2.
5 x 1/2 = 5/2.
The next four multiples of 1/2 are 2/2, 3/2, 4/2, 5/2.

Question 5.
$$\frac{1}{6}$$,
Type below:
________

Explanation:
1 x 1/6 = 1/6.
2 x 1/6 = 2/6.
3 x 1/6 = 3/6.
4 x 1/6 = 4/6.
5 x 1/6 = 5/6.
6 x 1/6 = 6/6.
The next four multiples of 1/6 are 2/6, 3/6, 4/6, 5/6,6/6.

Lesson 8.2

List the next four multiples of the fraction.

Question 6.
$$\frac{3}{10}$$,
Type below:
________

Explanation:
1 × 3/10 = 3/10
2 × 3/10 = 6/10
3 × 3/10 = 9/10
4 × 3/10 = 12/10
5 × 3/10 = 15/10

Question 7.
$$\frac{7}{12}$$,
Type below:
________

Answer: 7/12, 14/12, 21/12, 28/12, 35/12

Explanation:
1 × 7/12 = 7/12
2 × 7/12 = 14/12
3 × 7/12 = 21/12
4 × 7/12 = 28/12
5 × 7/12 = 35/12

Write the product as the product of a whole number and a unit fraction.

Question 8.

2 × $$\frac{3}{6}$$ =
Type below:
________

1 group of $$\frac{3}{6}$$ is $$\frac{3}{6}$$
2 groups of $$\frac{3}{6}$$ is $$\frac{6}{6}$$
2 × $$\frac{3}{6}$$ = $$\frac{6}{6}$$

Question 9.

3 × $$\frac{2}{8}$$ =
Type below:
________

Explanation:
1 group of $$\frac{2}{8}$$ is $$\frac{2}{8}$$
2 group of $$\frac{2}{8}$$ is $$\frac{4}{8}$$
3 group of $$\frac{2}{8}$$ is $$\frac{6}{8}$$
3 × $$\frac{2}{8}$$ = $$\frac{6}{8}$$

### Common Core – Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers – Page No. 168

Lesson 8.3

Multiply.

Question 1.
3 × $$\frac{7}{10}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{21}{10}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 7 and 3
3 × 7 = 21
3 × $$\frac{7}{10}$$ = $$\frac{21}{10}$$

Question 2.
5 × $$\frac{4}{8}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 5 and 4
5 × 4 = 20
5 × $$\frac{4}{8}$$ = $$\frac{20}{8}$$

Question 3.
4 × $$\frac{6}{12}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 4 and 6
4 × 6 = 24
4 × $$\frac{6}{12}$$ = $$\frac{24}{12}$$

Question 4.
2 × $$\frac{3}{4}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 2 and 3
2 × 3 = 6
2 × $$\frac{3}{4}$$ = $$\frac{6}{4}$$

Question 5.
6 × $$\frac{3}{5}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 6 and 3
6 × 3 =18
6 × $$\frac{3}{5}$$ = $$\frac{18}{5}$$

Question 6.
7 × $$\frac{2}{10}$$ =
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Multiply 7 and 2.
7 × 2 =14
7 × $$\frac{2}{10}$$ = $$\frac{14}{10}$$

Lesson 8.4

Multiply. Write the product as a mixed number.

Question 7.
4 × $$\frac{8}{10}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
4 × $$\frac{8}{10}$$
First multiply 4 and 8
4 × 8 = 32
4 × $$\frac{8}{10}$$ = 32/10
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
32/10 = 3 $$\frac{2}{10}$$

Question 8.
3 × $$\frac{5}{6}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
3 × $$\frac{5}{6}$$
First multiply 3 and 5.
3 × 5 =15
3 × $$\frac{5}{6}$$ = 15/6
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
15/6 = 2 3/6

Question 9.
2 × 3 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
2 × 3 $$\frac{1}{3}$$
3 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ = 10/3
2 × 10/3 = 20/3
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
20/3 = 6 2/3

Question 10.
4 × 2 $$\frac{2}{5}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
4 × 2 $$\frac{2}{5}$$
2 $$\frac{2}{5}$$ = 4/5
4 × 12/5 = 48/5
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
48/5 = 9 3/5

Question 11.
5 × 1 $$\frac{7}{8}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
5 × 1 $$\frac{7}{8}$$
5 × 15/5 = 75/5
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
75/5 = 9 3/8

Question 12.
3 × 3 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ =
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$

Explanation:
Given,
3 × 3 $$\frac{3}{4}$$
3 × 15/4 = 45/4
Now convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
45/4 = 11 1/4

Lesson 8.5

Question 13.
A shrub in Pam’s back yard is about 1 $$\frac{3}{8}$$ feet tall. A small tree in her back yard is 7 times as tall as the shrub. About how tall is the tree?
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ feet

Explanation:
Given,
A shrub in Pam’s back yard is about 1 $$\frac{3}{8}$$ feet tall.
A small tree in her back yard is 7 times as tall as the shrub.
9.625 ft because 1 3/8 × 7 is equal to 9 5/2 feet
Therefore the tree is 9 5/2 feet.

Question 14.
A puppy weighs $$\frac{9}{10}$$ pound. Its mother weighs 8 times as much. How much does the mother weigh?
_____ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ pounds

Answer: 7 $$\frac{2}{10}$$ pounds

Explanation:
Given,
A puppy weighs $$\frac{9}{10}$$ pound. Its mother weighs 8 times as much.
$$\frac{9}{10}$$ × 8 = 72/10
Convert from improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
72/10 = 7 $$\frac{2}{10}$$ pounds
Thus the mother weigh 7 $$\frac{2}{10}$$ pounds.

Conclusion:

Refer HMH Go Math Solution Key for Grade 4 Homework Practice FL Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers to secure good marks in the exams. Most of the students believe that fractions are difficult but it is easiest of all the chapters if you understand the logic and tricks to solve. Get more number of questions from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 8 Multiply Fractions by Whole Numbers.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles

You can succeed in your academics as well as sharpen your math skills by solving Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles. Practicing from HMH Grade 4 Go Math Solution Key you will have numerous benefits. Tap on the link and start solving the answers for the homework practice questions.

Lesson: 1 – Angles and Fractional Parts of a Circle

Lesson: 2 – Degrees

Lesson: 3 – Measure and Draw Angles

Lesson: 4 – Join and Separate Angles

Lesson: 5 – Problem Solving Unknown Angle Measures

Lesson: 11.1

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 207

Angles and Fractional Parts of a Circle

Tell what fraction of the circle the shaded angle represents.

Question 1.

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the fraction of the shaded part is $$\frac{1}{4}$$

Question 2.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$

Explanation:
Half of the circle is shaded in the above figure. The fraction of the shaded part is $$\frac{1}{2}$$.

Question 3.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{1}$$

Explanation:
The above circle is completely shaded. So, the fraction of the shaded part is $$\frac{1}{1}$$.

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows a $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}$$, or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 4.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turns $$\frac{1}{2}$$ counterclockwise.

Question 5.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{3}{4}$$

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the circle turns $$\frac{3}{4}$$ counterclockwise.

Question 6.

__________

Answer: $$\frac{1}{1}$$

Explanation:
The above circle turns $$\frac{1}{1}$$ counterclockwise.

Problem Solving

Question 7.
Shelley exercised for 15 minutes. Describe the turn the minute hand made.

Type below:
__________

Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$ Clockwise
The minute hand is on 3 which means the minute hand made $$\frac{1}{4}$$ Clockwise.

Question 8.
Mark took 30 minutes to finish lunch. Describe the turn the minute hand made.

Type below:
__________

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ Clockwise
The minute hand is on 6 which means the minute hand made $$\frac{1}{2}$$ Clockwise.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 208

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What fraction of the circle does the shaded angle represent

Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{1}$$ or 1
b. $$\frac{3}{4}$$
c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$
d. $$\frac{1}{4}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the fraction of the shaded part is $$\frac{1}{4}$$
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
Which describes the turn shown below?

Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn clockwise
b. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise
c. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn counterclockwise
d. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn counterclockwise

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise

Explanation:
The circle made half turn. The fraction of the circle is $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which shows $$\frac{2}{3}$$ and $$\frac{3}{4}$$ written as a pair of fractions with a common denominator?
Options:
a. $$\frac{2}{3} \text { and } \frac{4}{3}$$
b. $$\frac{6}{9} \text { and } \frac{6}{8}$$
c. $$\frac{2}{12} \text { and } \frac{3}{12}$$
d. $$\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}$$

Answer: $$\frac{8}{12} \text { and } \frac{9}{12}$$

Explanation:
Given the fraction $$\frac{2}{3}$$ and $$\frac{3}{4}$$
LCM of 3 and 4 is 12
$$\frac{2}{3}$$ × $$\frac{4}{4}$$ = $$\frac{8}{12}$$
$$\frac{3}{4}$$ × $$\frac{3}{3}$$ = $$\frac{9}{12}$$
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Raymond bought $$\frac{3}{4}$$ of a dozen rolls. How many rolls did he buy?
Options:
a. 3
b. 6
c. 7
d. 9

Explanation:
Given that,
Raymond bought $$\frac{3}{4}$$ of a dozen rolls.
$$\frac{3}{4}$$ × 12 = 3 × 3 = 9
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Which of the following lists all the factors of 18?
Options:
a. 1, 2, 4, 9, 18
b. 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18
c. 2, 3, 6, 9
d. 1, 3, 5, 9, 18

Answer: 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18

Explanation:
The factors of 18 are
1 × 18 = 18
2 × 9 = 18
3 × 6 = 18
6 × 3 = 18
9 × 2 = 18
18 × 1 = 18
The factors are 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 18.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday. On which day did he ride the shortest distance?
Options:
a. Monday
b. Tuesday
c. Friday
d. Saturday

Explanation:
Given that,
Jonathan rode 1.05 miles on Friday, 1.5 miles on Saturday, 1.25 miles on Monday, and 1.1 miles on Tuesday.
1.05 < 1.1 < 1.5
Thus the shortest distance is 1.05 miles that is on Friday.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 209

Degrees

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 1.

60°

Question 2.

_____°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°
The above circle made half turn
1/2 × 360° = 180°

Question 3.

_____°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°
The above circle made 1/4 turn.
1/4 × 360° = 90°

Classify the angle. Write acute, obtuse, right, or straight.

Question 4.

__________

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 25° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Question 5.

__________

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 6.

__________

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 60° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Classify the triangle. Write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 7.

__________

Explanation:
In geometry and trigonometry, a right angle is an angle of exactly 90°, corresponding to a quarter turn.

Question 8.

__________

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 9.

__________

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above triangle is less than 90 degrees. Thus the above triangle is acute.

Problem Solving

Ann started reading at 4:00 P.M. and finished at 4:20 P.M.

Question 10.
Through what fraction of a circle did the minute hand turn?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{3}$$

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°.
The minute hand is on 4. That means the clock turn 1/3 clockwise.

Question 11.
How many degrees did the minute hand turn?
_____°

Explanation:
1/3 × 360° = 120°
Thus the minute hand turn 120°.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 210

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What kind of angle is shown?

Options:
a. acute
b. obtuse
c. right
d. straight

Explanation:
180° is nothing but a straight angle.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through $$\frac{1}{4}$$ of a circle?
Options:
a. 45°
b. 90°
c. 180°
d. 270°

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle is 360°.
$$\frac{1}{4}$$ × 360° = 90°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards. She separated them into 3 equal groups. How many sports cards are in each group?
Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 11
d. 12

Explanation:
Given that,
Mae bought 15 football cards and 18 baseball cards. She separated them into 3 equal groups.
The total cards = 15 + 18 = 33 cards
Divide 33 cards into 3 equal groups
33/3 = 11
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Each part of a race is $$\frac{1}{10}$$ mile long. Marsha finished 5 parts of the race. How far did Marsha race?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{10}$$ mile
b. $$\frac{5}{12}$$ mile
c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile
d. 5 $$\frac{1}{10}$$ miles

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile

Explanation:
Each part of a race is $$\frac{1}{10}$$ mile long. Marsha finished 5 parts of the race.
We have to divide $$\frac{1}{10}$$ into 5 parts.
$$\frac{1}{10}$$ ÷ 5 = $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Jeff said his city got $$\frac{11}{3}$$ inches of snow. Which shows this fraction written as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 3 $$\frac{2}{3}$$
b. 3 $$\frac{1}{3}$$
c. 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$
d. 1 $$\frac{2}{3}$$

Answer: 3 $$\frac{2}{3}$$

Explanation:
Jeff said his city got $$\frac{11}{3}$$ inches of snow.
Convert from improper fraction into the mixed fraction.
$$\frac{11}{3}$$ = 3 $$\frac{2}{3}$$
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
Amy ran $$\frac{3}{4}$$ mile. Which decimal shows how many miles she ran?
Options:
a. 0.25 mile
b. 0.34 mile
c. 0.5 mile
d. 0.75 mile

Explanation:
Given,
Amy ran $$\frac{3}{4}$$ mile.
The decimal form of $$\frac{3}{4}$$ is 0.75
She ran 0.75 miles.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 211

Measure and Draw Angles

Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Question 1.

m∠ABC= 120°

Question 2.

m∠MNP = _____°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle. m∠MNP = 90°

Question 3.

m∠RST = _____°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle m∠RST is 55°

Use a protractor to draw the angle.

Question 4.
40°

Question 5.
170°

Draw an example of each. Label the angle with its measure.

Question 6.
a right angle

Question 7.
an acute angle

Problem Solving

The drawing shows the angles a stair tread makes with a support board along a wall. Use your protractor to measure the angles.

Question 8.
What is the measure of ∠A?
_____°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle ∠A = 45°

Question 9.
What is the measure of ∠B?
_____°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle ∠B = 135°

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 212

Lesson Check

Question 1.
What is the measure of ∠ABC?

Options:
a. 15°
b. 25°
c. 155°
d. 165°

With the help of the protractor, we can measure the ∠ABC = 15°
The correct answer is option A.

Question 2.
What is the measure of ∠XYZ?

Options:
a. 20°
b. 30°
c. 150°
d. 160°

With the help of the protractor, we can measure the ∠XYZ = 150°
The correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Derrick earned $1,472 during the 4 weeks he had his summer job. If he earned the same amount each week, how much did he earn each week? Options: a.$360
b. $368 c.$3,680
d. $5,888 Answer:$368

Explanation:
Derrick earned $1,472 during the 4 weeks he had his summer job. Divide 1472 by 4 1472/4 =$368
Therefore he earned $368 each week. Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 4. Arthur baked 1 $$\frac{7}{12}$$ dozen muffins. Nina baked 1 $$\frac{1}{12}$$ dozen muffins. How many dozen muffins did they bake in all? Options: a. 3 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ b. 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ c. 2 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ d. $$\frac{6}{12}$$ Answer: 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ Explanation: Arthur baked 1 $$\frac{7}{12}$$ dozen muffins. Nina baked 1 $$\frac{1}{12}$$ dozen muffins. Add both the fraction 1 $$\frac{7}{12}$$ + 1 $$\frac{1}{12}$$ First add the whole numbers 1 + 1 = 2 $$\frac{7}{12}$$ + $$\frac{1}{12}$$ = $$\frac{8}{12}$$ 2 $$\frac{8}{12}$$ = 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 5. Trisha drew the figure below. What figure did she draw? Options: a. line segment ST b. ray ST c. ray TS d. line TS Answer: ray TS The name of the figure Trisha drew is ray TS. The correct answer is option C. Question 6. Which describes the turn shown by the angle? Options: a. 1 full turn clockwise b. $$\frac{3}{4}$$ turn clockwise c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise d. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn clockwise Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn clockwise Explanation: The circle made a turn clockwise with a fraction $$\frac{1}{4}$$. Thus the correct answer is option D. ### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 213 Join and Separate Angles Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work. Question 1. 50°+75°=125° m∠ABD=125° Question 2. _____° + _____° = _____° ; m∠FGJ = _____° Answer: 160° Explanation: m∠FGH = 140° m∠HGJ = 20° m∠FGJ = 140° + 20° = 160° Question 3. _____° + _____° + _____° = _____° ; m∠KLN = _____° Answer: 165° Explanation: m∠KLM = 30° m∠MLP = 90° m∠PLN = 45° m∠KLN = 30° + 90° + 45° = 165° Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle in the circle. Question 4. m∠ABC = _____° Answer: 115° By using the protractor we can measure m∠ABC = 115° Question 5. m∠DBE = _____° Answer: 90° By using the protractor we can measure m∠DBE = 90° Question 6. m∠CBD = _____° Answer: 75° By using the protractor we can measure m∠CBD = 75° Question 7. m∠EBA = _____° Answer: 80° By using the protractor we can measure m∠EBA = 80° Question 8. Write the sum of the angle measures as an equation. _____° + _____° + _____° + _____° = _____° Answer: 115° + 75° + 90° + 80° = 360° Explanation: m∠ABC + m∠DBE + m∠CBD + m∠EBA 115° + 75° + 90° + 80° = 360° Problem Solving Question 9. Ned made the design at the right. Use a protractor. Find and write the measure of each of the 3 angles. _____° ; _____° ; _____° ; Answer: 50°; 60°; 70° By using the protractor we can measure each of the 3 angles i.e, 50°; 60°; 70° Question 10. Write an equation to find the measure of the total angle. _____° + _____° + _____° = _____° Answer: 50° + 60° + 70° =180° Explanation: Add all the three angles = 50° + 60° + 70° =180° ### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 214 Lesson Check Question 1. What is the measure of m∠WXZ? Options: a. 32° b. 83° c. 88° d. 97° Answer: 83° Explanation: m∠WXY = 58° m∠ZXY = 25° m∠WXZ = m∠WXY + m∠ZXY m∠WXZ = 58° + 25° m∠WXZ = 83° Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 2. Which equation can you use to find the m∠MNQ? Options: a. 148° – 24° = ■ b. 148° × 24° = ■ c. 148° ÷ 24° = ■ d. 148° + 24° = ■ Answer: 148° + 24° = ■ Explanation: m∠MNQ = m∠MNP + m∠PNQ m∠MNP + m∠PNQ = 148° + 24° m∠MNQ = ■ 148° + 24° = ■ Thus the correct answer is option D. Spiral Review Question 3. Joe bought 6 packages of envelopes. Each package contains 125 envelopes. How many envelopes did he buy? Options: a. 750 b. 723 c. 720 d. 650 Answer: 750 Explanation: Given, Joe bought 6 packages of envelopes. Each package contains 125 envelopes. Multiply the number of packages and number of envelopes = 6 × 125 = 750 Thus the correct answer is option A. Question 4. The Lake Trail is $$\frac{3}{10}$$ mile long and the Rock Trail is $$\frac{5}{10}$$ long. Bill hiked each trail once. How many miles did he hike in all? Options: a. $$\frac{1}{5}$$ mile b. $$\frac{4}{10}$$ mile c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile d. $$\frac{8}{10}$$ mile Answer: $$\frac{8}{10}$$ mile Explanation: The Lake Trail is $$\frac{3}{10}$$ mile long and the Rock Trail is $$\frac{5}{10}$$ long. $$\frac{3}{10}$$ + $$\frac{5}{10}$$ = $$\frac{8}{10}$$ mile Thus the correct answer is option D. Question 5. Ron drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides with the same length. Which best describes the figure he drew? Options: a. square b. rhombus c. trapezoid d. parallelogram Answer: square Explanation: A quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides with the same length is known as a square. Question 6. How many degrees are in an angle that turns through $$\frac{3}{4}$$ of a circle? Options: a. 45° b. 90° c. 180° d. 270° Answer: 270° Explanation: $$\frac{3}{4}$$ of a circle is 3/4 × 360° = 3 × 90° = 270° Thus the correct answer is option D. ### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 215 Problem Solving Unknown Angle Measures Solve each problem. Draw a diagram to help. Question 1. Question 2. An artist is cutting a piece of metal as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over? x = _____° Answer: 95° Explanation: x + 130° = 225 x = 225° – 130° x = 95° Question 3. Joan has a piece of material for making a costume. She needs to cut it as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over? x = _____° Answer: 50° Explanation: x + 40° = 90° x = 90° – 40° x = 50° ### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 216 Lesson Check Question 1. Angelo cuts a triangle from a sheet of paper as shown. What is the measure of ∠x in the triangle? Options: a. 15° b. 25° c. 75° d. 105° Answer: 15° Explanation: The above figure is a right triangle. x + 75° = 90° x = 90° – 75° x = 15° Thus the correct answer is option A. Question 2. Cindy cuts a piece of wood as shown. What is the angle measure of the piece left over? Options: a. 30° b. 90° c. 120° d. 150° Answer: 120° Explanation: x + 90° = 210° x = 210° – 90 x = 120° Thus the correct answer is option C. Spiral Review Question 3. Tyronne worked 21 days last month. He earned$79 each day. How much did Tyronne earn last month?
Options:
a. $869 b.$948
c. $1,659 d.$2,169

Answer: $1,659 Explanation: Given that, Tyronne worked 21 days last month. He earned$79 each day.
21 × $79 =$1659
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Meg inline skated for $$\frac{7}{10}$$ mile. Which shows this distance written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 0.07 mile
b. 0.1 mile
c. 0.7 mile
d. 7.1 miles

Explanation:
Meg inline skated for $$\frac{7}{10}$$ mile.
The decimal form of $$\frac{7}{10}$$ is 0.7 mile.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Kerry ran $$\frac{3}{4}$$ mile. Sherrie ran $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile. Marcie ran $$\frac{2}{3}$$ mile. Which list orders the friends from least to greatest distance
run?
Options:
a. Kerry, Sherrie, Marcie
b. Kerry, Marcie, Sherrie
c. Sherrie, Kerry, Marcie
d. Sherrie, Marcie, Kerry

Explanation:
Kerry ran $$\frac{3}{4}$$ mile. Sherrie ran $$\frac{1}{2}$$ mile. Marcie ran $$\frac{2}{3}$$ mile.
Put the fractions from least to greatest.
$$\frac{1}{2}$$, $$\frac{2}{3}$$, $$\frac{3}{4}$$
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the measure of m∠ABC?

Options:
a. 32°
b. 84°
c. 88°
d. 94°

Explanation:
m∠ABC = m∠ABD + m∠DBC
m∠ABC = 58° + 26°
m∠ABC = 84°
Thus the correct answer is option B.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 217

Lesson 11.1

Tell whether the angle on the circle shows $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{2}, \frac{3}{4}$$, or 1 full turn clockwise or counterclockwise.

Question 1.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$

Explanation:
The angle on the above circle shows $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn counterclockwise.

Question 2.

_____

The angle on the above circle shows 1 full turn clockwise.

Question 3.

$$\frac{□}{□}$$

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$
The angle on the above circle shows $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise.

Lesson 11.2

Tell the measure of the angle in degrees.

Question 4.

_____

The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 1/4
1/4 × 360° = 90°

Question 5.

_____

The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 130/360
130/360 × 360 = 130°

Question 6.

_____

Explanation:
The complete angle of the circle = 360°
The fraction of the shaded part is 3/4
3/4 × 360° = 270°

Classify the triangle. Write acute, obtuse, or right.

Question 7.

_____

Explanation:
An obtuse angle has a measurement greater than 90 degrees but less than 180 degrees. The above angle is 110° which is greater than 90° and less than 180°. Thus the angle of the above figure is an obtuse angle.

Question 8.

_____

Explanation:
The acute angle is the small angle which is less than 90°. The above angle is 60° which is less than 90°. Thus the above angle is an acute angle.

Question 9.

_____

Explanation:
In geometry and trigonometry, a right angle is an angle of exactly 90°, corresponding to a quarter turn.

### Common Core – Angles – Page No. 218

Lesson 11.3

Question 1.
Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

m ∠PQR = _____°

By using the protractor we can measure the angle m ∠PQR = 15°

Question 2.
Use a protractor to draw an angle with the measure 72º.

Lesson 11.4

Add to find the measure of the angle. Write an equation to record your work.

Question 3.

m ∠NML = _____°

Explanation:
m ∠NML = m ∠LMX + m ∠NMX
m ∠NML = 50° + 90°
m ∠NML = 140°

Question 4.

m ∠UTS = _____°

Explanation:
m ∠UTS = m ∠STX + m ∠UTX
m ∠UTS = 25° + 30°
m ∠UTS = 55°

Question 5.

m ∠HGF = _____°

Explanation:
m ∠HGF = m ∠HGX + m ∠HGY + m ∠FGY
m ∠HGF = 45° + 50° + 70° = 165°
m ∠HGF = 165°

Lesson 11.5

Use the diagram for 1–2.

Question 6.
Luke is cutting a board to make a trapezoid for a project. What is the angle measure of the piece left over after Cut A?
x = _____°

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can find Cut A.
x + 55° = 90°
x = 90° – 55°
x = 35°

Question 7.
What is the angle measure of the piece left over after Cut B?
y = _____°

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can find Cut B.
70° + y = 130°
y = 130° – 70°
y = 60°

Conclusion:

All the concepts are explained in a simple and concise manner. So, all the students of Grade 4 can get the chapterwise answers with step by step explanation for all Homework Practice FL. Also, you can find the related questions of angles in Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 11 Angles. Start preparation now and score the highest marks in the exams.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

Students of 4th Grade can get the Go Math Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units here. In addition to the exercise problems, students can Download Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units for free of cost. Get step by step explanation of all the Homework Practice Question from our Go Math Answer Key.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units

Go through the topics before you start your preparation. We have provided the Question and Answer according to the topics seen in the Chapter. Click on the below links and check the solution from Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units. Learn the concepts from here and apply it in the real world.

Lesson 1: Measurement Benchmarks

Lesson 2: Customary Units of Length

Lesson 3: Customary Units of Weight

Lesson 4: Customary Units of Liquid Volume

Lesson 5: Line Plots

Lesson 6: Metric Units of Length

Lesson 7: Metric Units of Mass and Liquid Volume

Lesson 8: Units of Time

Lesson 9: Problem Solving Elapsed Time

Lesson 10: Mixed Measures

Lesson 11:

Lesson 12:

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 221

Measurement Benchmarks

Use benchmarks to choose the customary unit you would use to measure each.

Question 1.
height of a computer
foot

Question 2.
weight of a table
_________

The customary unit to measure the weight of a table is the pound.

Question 3.
length of a semi-truck
_________

The customary unit to measure the length of a semi-truck is foot

Question 4.
the amount of liquid a bathtub holds
_________

Explanation:
To start, the standard bathtub will hold roughly around 80 gallons of water. Much smaller bathtubs can only hold around 40 gallons of water, which typically are more suited for smaller children or function more as a shower space.
The customary unit to measure the amount of liquid a bathtub holds is a gallon.

Use benchmarks to choose the metric unit you would use to measure each.

Question 5.
mass of a grasshopper
_________

The metric unit to measure the mass of a grasshopper is the gram.

Question 6.
the amount of liquid a water bottle holds
_________

Liquid volume is the amount of liquid in a container. You can measure liquid volume using metric units such as milliliter (mL) and liter (L). A dropper holds about 1 milliliter. A water bottle holds about 1 liter.

Question 7.
length of a soccer field
_________

The metric unit to measure the length of a soccer field is meter.

Question 8.
length of a pencil
_________

The metric unit to measure the length of a pencil is centimeter.

Circle the better estimate.

Question 9.
mass of a chicken egg
Options:
a. 50 grams
b. 50 kilograms

Explanation:
The estimated mass of the chicken egg is 50 grams.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 10.
length of a car
Options:
a. 12 miles
b. 12 feet

Explanation:
The length of the car will be measured in feet. So the estimated length of a car is 12 feet.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 11.
amount of liquid a drinking glass holds
Options:
a. 8 ounces
b. 8 quarts

Explanation:
A small glass holds about 8 fluid ounces. The amount of liquid a drinking glass holds is 8 ounces.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Complete the sentence. Write more or less.

Question 12.
A camera has a length of ____ than one centimeter.

A camera has a length of more than one centimeter.

Question 13.
A bowling ball weighs ____ than one pound.

A bowling ball weighs more than one pound.

Problem Solving

Question 14.
What is the better estimate for the mass of a textbook, 1 gram or 1 kilogram?
1 _________

The mass of the textbook will more than a gram. So, the better estimate for the mass of a textbook is 1 kilogram.

Question 15.
What is the better estimate for the height of a desk, 1 meter or 1 kilometer?
1 _________

The height of the desk will be less than a kilometer. So, the better estimate for the height of a desk is 1 meter.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 222

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which is the best estimate for the weight of a stapler?
Options:
a. 4 ounces
b. 4 pounds
c. 4 inches
d. 4 feet

Explanation:
Ounces are the way to light for a stapler. Four ounces would be a small cup paper cup filled with water, thus making it four pounds.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Which is the best estimate for the length of a car?
Options:
a. 4 kilometers
b. 4 tons
c. 4 kilograms
d. 4 meters

Explanation:
The metric unit to measure the length of the car is meter.
The best estimate for the length of a car is 4 meters.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bart practices his trumpet 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ hours each day. How many hours will he practice in 6 days?
Options:
a. 8 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours
b. 7 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours
c. 7 hours
d. 6 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours

Answer: 7 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours

Explanation:
Given that,
Bart practices his trumpet 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ hours each day.
We have to find the number of hours he practices in 6 days.
Multiply the number of hours he practices per day with the number of days.
= 6 × 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ hours
= 7 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours
Bart practices his trumpet 7 $$\frac{2}{4}$$ hours in 6 days.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Millie collected 100 stamps from different countries. Thirty-two of the stamps are from countries in Africa. What is $$\frac{32}{100}$$ written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 32
b. 3.2
c. 0.32
d. 0.032

Explanation:
Given,
Millie collected 100 stamps from different countries. Thirty-two of the stamps are from countries in Africa.
The decimal form of $$\frac{32}{100}$$ is 0.32
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Diedre drew a quadrilateral with 4 right angles and 4 sides of the same length. What kind of polygon did Diedre draw?
Options:
a. square
b. trapezoid
c. hexagon
d. pentagon

Explanation:
A square contains 4 congruent sides. 4 right angles (90°). Opposite sides are parallel. All angles are congruent.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
How many degrees are in an angle that turns through $$\frac{1}{2}$$ of a circle?
Options:
a. 60°
b. 90°
c. 120°
d. 180°

Explanation:
The angle of a circle is 360°. The degrees are in an angle that turns through $$\frac{1}{2}$$ of a circle is 180°
Thus the correct answer is option D.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 223

Customary Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
3 feet = 36 inches
Think: 1 foot = 12 inches,
so 3 feet = 3 × 12 inches, or 36 inches

Question 2.
2 yards = _____ feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
2 yards = 2 × 3 ft
= 6 feet
Thus 2 yards = 6 feet.

Question 3.
8 feet = _____ inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
We know that
1 feet = 12 inches
8 feet = 8 × 12 inches = 96 inches
Thus 8 feet = 96 inches

Question 4.
7 yards = _____ feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
7 yards = 7 × 3 ft = 21 feet
Thus 7 yards = 21 feet

Question 5.
4 feet = _____ inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
4 feet = 4 × 12 inches = 48 inches
Thus 4 feet = 48 inches

Question 6.
15 yards = _____ feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
15 yards = 15 × 3ft = 45 feet
Thus 15 yards = 45 feet

Question 7.
10 feet = _____ inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
10 feet = 10 × 12 in. = 120 inches
Thus 10 feet = 120 inches

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
3 yards _____ 10 feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 ft = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 10 feet
3 yards < 10 feet

Question 9.
5 feet _____ 60 inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
5 feet = 60 inches

Question 10.
8 yards _____ 20 feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
8 yards = 8 × 3 feet = 24 feet
24 feet is greater than 20 feet
8 yards > 20 feet

Question 11.
3 feet _____ 10 inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
3 feet = 3 × 12 inches = 36 inches
3 feet is greater than 10 inches
3 feet > 10 inches

Question 12.
3 yards _____ 21 feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
3 yards = 3 × 3 feet = 9 feet
9 feet is less than 21 feet
3 yards < 21 feet

Question 13.
6 feet _____ 72 inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches
6 feet = 72 inches

Problem Solving

Question 14.
Carla has two lengths of ribbon. One ribbon is 2 feet long. The other ribbon is 30 inches long. Which length of ribbon is longer?
2 feet _____ 30 inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
2 feet = 2 × 12 inches = 24 inches
24 inches is less than 30 inches
2 feet < 30 inches

Question 15.
A football player gained 2 yards on one play. On the next play, he gained 5 feet. Was his gain greater on the first play or the second play?
2 yards _____ 5 feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet.
1 yard = 3 feet
2 yards = 2 × 3 feet = 6 feet
2 yards > 5 feet

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 224

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces. She needs to know the length in inches so she can determine how many necklaces to make. How many inches of wire does Marta have?
Options:
a. 42 inches
b. 84 inches
c. 168 inches
d. 504 inches

Explanation:
Marta has 14 feet of wire to use to make necklaces.
We have to convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
14 feet = 14 × 12 inches = 168 inches
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains. How many inches of ribbon does he have?
Options:
a. 8 inches
b. 80 inches
c. 96 inches
d. 288 inches

Explanation:
Jarod bought 8 yards of ribbon. He needs 200 inches to use to make curtains.
Convert from yards to inches
1 yard = 36 inches
8 yards = 8 × 36 inches = 288 inches
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which describes the turn shown below?

Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn counterclockwise
b. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn clockwise
c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn clockwise
d. $$\frac{3}{4}$$ turn counterclockwise

Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn counterclockwise

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we can say that the shaded part turn $$\frac{1}{4}$$ counterclockwise.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 4.
Which decimal represents the shaded part of the model below?

Options:
a. 0.03
b. 0.3
c. 0.33
d. 0.7

Explanation:
The figure shows that there are 10 blocks in which 3 of them are shaded.
The decimal form of the shaded part is 3/10 = 0.3
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Three sisters shared $3.60 equally. How much did each sister get? Options: a.$1.00
b. $1.20 c.$1.80
d. $10.80 Answer:$1.20

Explanation:
Given,
Three sisters shared $3.60 equally. 3.60/3 = 1.20 Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 6. Which is the best estimate for the width of your index finger? Options: a. 1 millimeter b. 1 gram c. 1 centimeter d. 1 liter Answer: 1 millimeter Explanation: The best estimate to measure the width of the index finger is 1 millimeter. Thus the correct answer is option A. ### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 225 Customary Units of Weight Complete. Question 1. 5 pounds = 80 ounces Think: 1 pound = 16 ounces, so 5 pounds = 5 × 16 ounces, or 80 ounces Question 2. 7 tons = _____ pounds Answer: 14000 Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds. 1 ton = 2000 pounds 7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds = 14,000 pounds Thus 7 tons = 14,000 pounds Question 3. 2 pounds = _____ ounces Answer: 32 Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces. 1 pound = 16 ounces 2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces Thus 2 pounds = 32 ounces Question 4. 3 tons = _____ pounds Answer: 6000 Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6000 pounds Thus 3 tons = 6000 pounds Question 5. 10 pounds = _____ ounces Answer: 160 Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 10 pounds = 10 × 16 ounces = 160 ounces Thus 10 pounds = 160 ounces Question 6. 5 tons = _____ pounds Answer: 10000 Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10,000 piunds Thus 5 tons = 10,000 pounds Question 7. 7 pounds = _____ ounces Answer: 112 ounces Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces Thus 7 ounces = 112 ounces Compare using <, >, or =. Question 8. 8 pounds _____ 80 ounces Answer: > Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces = 128 ounces 8 pounds > 80 ounces Question 9. 1 ton _____ 100 pounds Answer: > Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 1 ton > 100 pounds Question 10. 3 pounds _____ 50 ounces Answer: < Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces 3 pounds < 50 ounces Question 11. 5 tons _____ 1,000 pounds Answer: > Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 5 tons = 5 × 2000 pounds = 10000 5 tons > 1,000 pounds Question 12. 16 pounds _____ 256 ounces Answer: = Explanation: Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 16 pounds = 16 × 16 ounces = 256 ounces 16 pounds = 256 ounces Question 13. 8 tons _____ 16,000 pounds Answer: = Explanation: Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 8 tons = 8 × 2000 pounds = 16000 8 tons = 16,000 pounds Problem Solving Question 14. A company that makes steel girders can produce 6 tons of girders in one day. How many pounds is this? 6 tons = _____ pounds Answer: 12000 Explanation: A company that makes steel girders can produce 6 tons of girders in one day. Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 6 tons = 6 × 2000 pounds = 12000 6 tons = 12,000 pounds Question 15. Larry’s baby sister weighed 6 pounds at birth. How many ounces did the baby weigh? 6 pounds = _____ ounces Answer: 96 Explanation: Larry’s baby sister weighed 6 pounds at birth. Convert from pounds to ounces 1 pound = 16 ounces 6 pounds = 6 × 16 ounces = 96 ounces ### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 226 Lesson Check Question 1. Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna. The recipe gives the amount of cheese needed in ounces. How many ounces of cheese did she buy? Options: a. 20 ounces b. 32 ounces c. 40 ounces d. 64 ounces Answer: 32 ounces Explanation: Given, Ann bought 2 pounds of cheese to make lasagna. The recipe gives the amount of cheese needed in ounces. Convert from pounds to ounces. 1 pound = 16 ounces 2 pounds = 2 × 16 ounces = 32 ounces Thus the correct answer is option B. Question 2. A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds. What is this weight of the bus in pounds? Options: a. 700 pounds b. 1,400 pounds c. 7,000 pounds d. 14,000 pounds Answer: 14,000 pounds Explanation: Given, A school bus weighs 7 tons. The weight limit for a bridge is given in pounds. Convert from tons to pounds 1 ton = 2000 pounds 7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds = 14,000 pounds Thus the correct answer is option D. Spiral Review Question 3. What is the measure of m∠EHG? Options: a. 60° b. 100° c. 120° d. 130° Answer: 120° Explanation: From the above diagram, we can see that there is one right angle and one 30° angle. 90° + 30° = 120° Thus the correct answer is option C. Question 4. How many lines of symmetry does the square below have? Options: a. 0 b. 2 c. 4 d. 6 Answer: 4 The above figure consists of 4 symmetric lines. The correct answer is option C. Question 5. To make dough, Reba needs 2 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups of flour. How much flour does she need to make 5 batches of dough? Options: a. 14 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups b. 12 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups c. 11 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups d. 10 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups Answer: 12 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ cups Question 6. Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches. How many inches tall is Judi’s father? Options: a. 60 inches b. 66 inches c. 72 inches d. 216 inches Answer: 72 inches Explanation: Given, Judi’s father is 6 feet tall. The minimum height to ride a rollercoaster is given in inches. Convert from feet to inches 1 feet = 12 inches 6 feet = 6 × 12 inches = 72 inches Thus the correct answer is option C. ### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 227 Customary Units of Liquid Volume Complete. Question 1. 6 gallons = 24 quarts Think: 1 gallon = 4 quarts, so 6 gallons = 6 × 4 quarts, or 24 quarts Question 2. 12 quarts = ______ pints Answer: 24 Explanation: Convert from quarts to pints. 1 quart = 2 pints 12 quarts = 12 × 2 pints = 24 pints 12 quarts = 24 pints Question 3. 6 cups = ______ fluid ounces Answer: 48 Explanation: Convert from cups to fluid cups 1 cup = 8 fluid ounces 6 cups = 6 × 8 fluid ounces = 48 fluid ounces Thus 6 cups = 48 fluid ounces Question 4. 9 pints = ______ cups Answer: 18 Explanation: Convert from pints to cups. 1 pint = 2 cups 9 pints = 9 × 2 cups = 18 cups Thus 9 pints = 18 cups Question 5. 10 quarts = ______ cups Answer: 40 Explanation: Convert from quarts to cups. 1 quart = 4 cups 10 quarts = 10 × 4 cups = 40 cups Thus 10 quarts = 40 cups Question 6. 5 gallons = ______ pints Answer: 40 Explanation: Convert from gallons to pints. 1 gallon = 8 pints 5 gallons = 5 × 8 pints = 40 pints Thus 5 gallons = 40 pints Question 7. 3 gallons = ______ cups Answer: 48 Explanation: Convert from gallons from cups. 1 gallon = 16 cups 3 gallons = 3 × 16 cups = 48 cups 3 gallons = 48 cups Compare using <, >, or =. Question 8. 6 pints ______ 60 fluid ounces Answer: > Explanation: Convert from pints to fluid ounces. 1 pint = 16 fluid ounces 6 pints = 6 × 16 fluid ounces = 96 fluid ounces 6 pints = 96 fluid ounces 6 pints > 60 fluid ounces Question 9. 3 gallons ______ 30 quarts Answer: < Explanation: Convert from gallons to quarts. 1 gallon = 4 quarts 3 gallons = 3 × 4 quarts = 12 quarts Question 10. 5 quarts ______ 20 cups Answer: = Explanation: Convert from quarts to cups. 1 quart = 4 cups 5 quarts = 5 × 4 cups = 20 cups 5 quarts = 20 cups Question 11. 6 cups ______ 12 pints Answer: < Explanation: Convert from cups to pints. 1 cup = 1/2 pint 6 cups = 6 × 1/2 pint = 3 cups 6 cups < 12 pints Question 12. 8 quarts ______ 16 pints Answer: = Explanation: Convert from quarts to pints. 1 quart = 2 pints 8 quarts = 8 × 2 pints = 16 pints 8 quarts = 16 pints Question 13. 6 gallons ______ 96 pints Answer: < Explanation: Convert gallons to pints. 1 gallon = 8 pints 6 gallons = 6 × 8 pints = 48 pints 6 gallons < 96 pints Problem Solving Question 14. A chef makes 1 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ gallons of soup in a large pot. How many 1-cup servings can the chef get from this large pot of soup? ______ 1-cup servings Answer: 24 Explanation: A chef makes 1 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ gallons of soup in a large pot. 1 gallon = 16 cups 1/2 gallon = 8 cups 16 + 8 = 24 cups Question 15. Kendra’s water bottle contains 2 quarts of water. She wants to add drink mix to it, but the directions for the drink mix give the amount of water in fluid ounces. How many fluid ounces are in her bottle? ______ fluid ounces Answer: 64 Explanation: Kendra’s water bottle contains 2 quarts of water. She wants to add drink mix to it, but the directions for the drink mix give the amount of water in fluid ounces. 1 quart = 32 fluid ounces 2 quarts = 2 × 32 fluid ounces = 64 fluid ounces. Thus there are 64 fluid ounces in her bottle. ### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 228 Lesson Check Question 1. Joshua drinks 8 cups of water a day. The recommended daily amount is given in fluid ounces. How many fluid ounces of water does he drink each day? Options: a. 16 fluid ounces b. 32 fluid ounces c. 64 fluid ounces d. 128 fluid ounces Answer: 64 fluid ounces Explanation: Given, Joshua drinks 8 cups of water a day. The recommended daily amount is given in fluid ounces. 1 cup = 8 fluid ounces 8 cups = 8 × 8 fluid ounces = 64 fluid ounces Thus the correct answer is option C. Question 2. A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch. How many 1-quart containers of milk did the cafeteria use? Options: a. 10 b. 20 c. 40 d. 80 Answer: 20 Explanation: A cafeteria used 5 gallons of milk in preparing lunch. Convert from gallons to quarts 1 gallon = 4 quarts 5 gallons = 5 × 4 quarts = 20 quarts Thus the correct answer is option B. Spiral Review Question 3. Roy uses $$\frac{1}{4}$$ cup of batter for each muffin. Which list shows the amounts of batter he will use depending on the number of muffins he makes? Options: a. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{5}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{1}{7}, \frac{1}{8}$$ b. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}$$ c. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{5}{20}$$ d. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{6}{24}, \frac{8}{32}$$ Answer: $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{6}{24}, \frac{8}{32}$$ Explanation: All fractions must be equal to $$\frac{1}{4}$$ a. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{1}{5}, \frac{1}{6}, \frac{1}{7}, \frac{1}{8}$$ In this all fractions are not equal to $$\frac{1}{4}$$ b. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{4}, \frac{3}{4}, \frac{4}{4}, \frac{5}{4}$$ $$\frac{2}{4}$$ = $$\frac{1}{2}$$ $$\frac{4}{4}$$ = 1 In this all fractions are not equal to $$\frac{1}{4}$$ c. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{3}{12}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{5}{20}$$ $$\frac{2}{8}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{3}{12}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{4}{16}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{5}{20}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ d. $$\frac{1}{4}, \frac{2}{8}, \frac{4}{16}, \frac{6}{24}, \frac{8}{32}$$ $$\frac{2}{8}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{4}{16}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{6}{24}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ $$\frac{8}{32}$$ = $$\frac{1}{4}$$ Thus the correct answer is option D. Question 4. Beth has $$\frac{7}{100}$$ of a dollar. Which shows the amount of money Beth has? Options: a.$7.00
b. $0.70 c.$0.07
d. $0.007 Answer:$0.07

Explanation:
Beth has $$\frac{7}{100}$$ of a dollar.
The decimal form of $$\frac{7}{100}$$ = 0.07
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Name the figure that Enrico drew below.

Options:
a. a ray
b. a line
c. a line segment
d. an octagon

Explanation:
In geometry, a ray can be defined as a part of a line that has a fixed starting point but no endpoint. It can extend infinitely in one direction. On its way to infinity, a ray may pass through more than one point. When naming a ray, it is denoted by drawing a small ray on top of the name of the ray.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds. How many pounds does the hippopotamus weigh?
Options:
a. 4,000 pounds
b. 6,000 pounds
c. 8,000 pounds
d. 12,000 pounds

Explanation:
A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. Feeding instructions are given for weights in pounds.
Convert from tons to pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
4 tons = 2 × 2000 pounds = 4000 pounds.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 229

Line Plots

Question 1.
Some students compared the time they spend riding the school bus. Complete the tally table and line plot to show the data.

 Time Spent on School Bus Time (in hour) Tally $$\frac{1}{6}$$ || $$\frac{2}{6}$$ $$\frac{3}{6}$$ $$\frac{4}{6}$$

 Time Spent on School Bus Time (in hour) Tally $$\frac{1}{6}$$ || $$\frac{2}{6}$$ | $$\frac{3}{6}$$ |||| $$\frac{4}{6}$$ |

Use your line plot for 2 and 3.

Question 2.
How many students compared times?
______ students

By seeing the above line plot we can say that there is 8 number of students.

Question 3.
What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time students spent riding the bus?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ hour

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ hour

Explanation:
$$\frac{4}{6}$$ – $$\frac{1}{6}$$ = $$\frac{3}{6}$$ = $$\frac{1}{2}$$ hour

Problem Solving

For 4–5, make a tally table on a separate sheet of paper.

Make a line plot in the space below the problem.

Question 4.

Question 5.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 230

Lesson Check

Use the line plot for 1 and 2.

Question 1.
How many students were reading during study time?

Options:
a. 5
b. 6
c. 7
d. 8

Explanation:
By seeing the above line plot we can say that there are 8 students.
The correct answer is option D.

Question 2.
What is the difference between the longest time and the shortest time spent reading?
Options:
a. $$\frac{4}{8}$$ hour
b. $$\frac{3}{8}$$ hour
c. $$\frac{2}{8}$$ hour
d. $$\frac{1}{8}$$ hour

Answer: $$\frac{3}{8}$$ hour

Explanation:
$$\frac{4}{8}$$ hour – $$\frac{1}{8}$$ hour
(4 – 1)/8 = $$\frac{3}{8}$$ hour
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bridget is allowed to play on-line games for $$\frac{75}{100}$$ of an hour each day. Which shows that fraction as a decimal?
Options:
a. 75.0
b. 7.50
c. 0.75
d. 0.075

Explanation:
The decimal form of $$\frac{75}{100}$$ is 0.75
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Bobby’s collection of sports cards has $$\frac{3}{10}$$ baseball cards and $$\frac{39}{100}$$ football cards. The rest are soccer cards. What fraction of Bobby’s sports cards are baseball or football cards?
Options:
a. $$\frac{9}{100}$$
b. $$\frac{42}{100}$$
c. $$\frac{52}{100}$$
d. $$\frac{69}{100}$$

Answer: $$\frac{42}{100}$$

Question 5.
Jeremy gives his horse 12 gallons of water each day. How many 1-quart pails of water is that?
Options:
a. 24
b. 48
c. 72
d. 96

Explanation:
Convert from gallons to quarts
1 gallon = 4 quarts
12 gallons = 12 × 4 quarts = 48 quarts
12 gallons = 48 quarts
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 6.
An iguana at a pet store is 5 feet long. Measurements for iguana cages are given in inches. How many inches long is the iguana?
Options:
a. 45 inches
b. 50 inches
c. 60 inches
d. 72 inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches.
1 feet = 12 inches
5 feet = 5 × 12 inches = 60 inches
Thus the correct answer is option C.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 231

Metric Units of Length

Complete.

Question 1.
4 meters = 400 centimeters
Think: 1 meter = 100 centimeters,
so 4 meters = 4 × 100 centimeters, or 400 centimeters

Question 2.
8 centimeters = ______ millimeters

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeter
8 centimeters = 8 × 10 millimeters = 80 millimeters

Question 3.
5 meters = ______ decimeters

Explanation:
Converting from meters to decimeters
We know that,
1 meter = 10 decimeters
5 meters = 5 × 10 decimeters = 50 decimeters

Question 4.
9 meters = ______ millimeters

Explanation:
Convert from meters to millimeters
1 meter = 10 millimeters
9 meters = 9 × 10 millimeters = 90 millimeters

Question 5.
7 meters = ______ centimeters

Explanation:
Convert from meters to centimeters
We know that
1 meter = 100 centimeters
7 meters = 7 × 100 centimeters
7 meters = 700 centimeters

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 6.
8 meters ______ 80 centimeters

Explanation:
Convert from meters to centimeters
We know that
1 meter = 100 centimeters
8 meters = 800 centimeters
8 meters is less than 80 centimeters
8 meters < 80 centimeters

Question 7.
3 decimeters ______ 30 centimeters

Explanation:
Convert from decimeters to centimeters
We know that
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
3 decimeters = 30 centimeters

Question 8.
4 meters ______ 450 centimeters

Explanation:
Convert from meters to centimeters
We know that
1 meter = 100 centimeters
4 meters = 400 centimeters
4 meters < 450 centimeters

Question 9.
90 centimeters ______ 9 millimeters

Explanation:
Converting from centimeters to millimeters
1 centimeter = 10 millimeter
90 centimeters = 900 millimeters
90 centimeters > 9 millimeters

Describe the length in meters. Write your answer as a fraction and as a decimal.

Question 10.
43 centimeters =
Type below:
_________

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to meters
1 centimeter = 1/100 meter
43 centimeters = 43 × 1/100 = 0.43 meters

Question 11.
6 decimeters =
Type below:
_________

Explanation:
Convert from decimeter to meter
1 decimeter = 1/10 meter
6 decimeters = 6 × 1/10 meter = 0.6 meter

Question 12.
8 centimeters =
Type below:
_________

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to meters
1 centimeter = 1/100 meter
8 centimeters = 8 × 1/100 meter = 0.08 meter

Question 13.
3 decimeters =
Type below:
_________

Explanation:
Convert from decimeter to meter
1 decimeter = 1/10 meter
3 decimeter = 3 × 1/10 meter = 0.3 meter

Problem Solving

Question 14.
A flagpole is 4 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is the flagpole?
_____ centimeters

Explanation:
Given that,
A flagpole is 4 meters tall
We have to convert the meters to centimeters.
1 meter = 100 centimeter
4 meters = 4 × 100 cm = 400 centimeters
Thus the flagpole is 400 centimeters tall.

Question 15.
A new building is 25 meters tall. How many decimeters tall is the building?
_____ decimeters

Explanation:
A new building is 25 meters tall.
Convert from meters to decimeters.
1 meter = 10 decimeters
25 meters = 25 × 10 decimeters = 250 decimeters
Thus the building is 250 decimeters tall.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 232

Lesson Check

Question 1.
A pencil is 15 centimeters long. How many millimeters long is that pencil?
Options:
a. 1.5 millimeters
b. 15 millimeters
c. 150 millimeters
d. 1,500 millimeters

Explanation:
Convert from centimeters to millimeters.
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeters = 15 × 10 = 150 millimeters
Thus the correct answer is 150 millimeters.

Question 2.
John’s father is 2 meters tall. How many centimeters tall is John’s father?
Options:
a. 2,000 centimeters
b. 200 centimeters
c. 20 centimeters
d. 2 centimeters

Explanation:
Convert from meters to centimeters.
1 meter = 100 centimeters
2 meters = 2 × 100 centimeters
= 200 centimeters
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bruce reads for $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hour each night. How long will he read in 4 nights?
Options:
a. $$\frac{3}{16}$$ hours
b. $$\frac{7}{4}$$ hours
c. $$\frac{9}{4}$$ hours
d. $$\frac{12}{4}$$ hours

Answer: $$\frac{12}{4}$$ hours

Explanation:
Given that,
Bruce reads for $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hour each night.
$$\frac{3}{4}$$ × 4 = $$\frac{12}{4}$$ hours
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 4.
Mark jogged 0.6 mile. Caroline jogged 0.49 mile. Which inequality correctly compares the distances they jogged?
Options:
a. 0.6 = 0.49
b. 0.6 > 0.49
c. 0.6 < 0.49
d. 0.6 + 0.49 = 1.09

Explanation:
0.6=Mark
>
0.49= Caroline
This is because 0.6 equals 0.60 so 0.60>0.49
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Use the line plot for 5 and 6.

Question 5.
How many lawns were mowed?
Options:
a. 8
b. 9
c. 10
d. 11

Explanation:
By seeing the above line plot we can say that 11 lawns were mowed.
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
What is the difference between the greatest amount and least amount of gasoline used to mow lawns?
Options:
a. $$\frac{6}{8}$$ gallon
b. $$\frac{5}{8}$$ gallon
c. $$\frac{4}{8}$$ gallon
d. $$\frac{3}{8}$$ gallon

Answer: $$\frac{4}{8}$$ gallon

Explanation:
$$\frac{5}{8}$$ – $$\frac{1}{8}$$ = $$\frac{4}{8}$$ gallon
Thus the correct answer is option C.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 233

Metric Units of Mass and Liquid Volume

Complete.

Question 1.
5 liters = 5,000 milliliters
Think: 1 liter 5 1,000 milliliters,
so 5 liters 5 5 × 1,000 milliliters, or 5,000 milliliters

Question 2.
3 kilograms = ______ grams

Explanation:
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
3 kilograms = 3 × 1000 grams = 3000 grams
3 kilograms = 3000 grams

Question 3.
8 liters = ______ milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters = 8000 milliliters
8 liters = 8000 milliliters

Question 4.
7 kilograms = ______ grams

Explanation:
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
7 kilograms = 7 × 1000 grams = 7000 grams

Question 5.
9 liters = ______ milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
9 liters = 9 × 1000 milliliters = 9000 milliliters
9 liters = 9000 milliliters

Question 6.
2 liters = ______ milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
2 liters = 2000 milliliters

Question 7.
6 kilograms = ______ grams

Explanation:
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
6 kilograms = 6000 grams

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
8 kilograms ______ 850 grams

Explanation:
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
8 kilograms = 8000 grams
8 kilograms > 850 grams

Question 9.
3 liters ______ 3,500 milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3000 milliliters
3 liters < 3,500 milliliters

Question 10.
1 kilogram ______ 1,000 grams

Explanation:
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams

Question 11.
5 liters ______ 520 milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
5 liter = 5000 milliliters
5 liters > 520 milliliters

Problem Solving

Question 12.
Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water. How many milliliters of water does Kenny buy?
______ milliliters

Explanation:
Given that,
Kenny buys four 1-liter bottles of water.
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liter = 4000 milliliters
Thus Kenny can buy 4000 milliliters.

Question 13.
Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour. How many grams of flour did she buy?
______ grams

Explanation:
Mrs. Jones bought three 2-kilogram packages of flour.
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
6 kilograms = 6 × 1000 grams = 6000 grams
Thus she can buy 6000 grams of flour.

Question 14.
Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears. How many more grams of apples than pears did she buy?
______ grams

Explanation:
Colleen bought 8 kilograms of apples and 2.5 kilograms of pears.
8 kilograms – 2.5 kilograms = 5.5 kilograms
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
5.5 kilograms = 5500 grams

Question 15.
Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale. How many milliliters of punch does he make?
______ milliliters

Explanation:
Dave uses 500 milliliters of juice for a punch recipe. He mixes it with 2 liters of ginger ale.
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liter = 2000 milliliters
2000 milliliters + 500 milliters = 2500 milliters.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 234

Lesson Check

Question 1.
During his hike, Milt drank 1 liter of water and 1 liter of sports drink. How many milliliters of liquid did he drink in all?
Options:
a. 20 milliliters
b. 200 milliliters
c. 2,000 milliliters
d. 20,000 milliliters

Explanation:
Convert from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
2 liters = 2 × 1000 milliliters = 2000 milliliters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast. The roast left over after the meal weighed 3 kilograms. How many grams of roast were eaten during that meal?
Options:
a. 7,000 grams
b. 1,000 grams
c. 700 grams
d. 100 grams

Explanation:
Given,
Larinda cooked a 4-kilogram roast. The roast left over after the meal weighed 3 kilograms.
So subtract the amount Larinda cooked and left over roast
That means 4 kilograms – 3 kilograms = 1 kilogram
Now convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Use a protractor to find the angle measure.

Options:
a. 15°
b. 35°
c. 135°
d. 145°

By measuring with the help of the protractor we can say that the angle measure is 135°
Thus the correct answer is option is C.

Question 4.
Which of the following shows parallel lines?
Options:
a.
b.
c.
d.

By seeing the above figures we can say that option c is parallel.
So, the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Carly bought 3 pounds of birdseed. How many ounces of birdseed did she buy?
Options:
a. 30 ounces
b. 36 ounces
c. 42 ounces
d. 48 ounces

Explanation:
Convert from pounds to ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
A door is 8 decimeters wide. How wide is the door in centimeters?
Options:
a. 8 centimeters
b. 80 centimeters
c. 800 centimeters
d. 8,000 centimeters

Explanation:
Given that,
A door is 8 decimeters wide.
Convert from decimeter to centimeter.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeter
8 decimeter = 8 × 10 cm = 80 centimeters
Thus the correct answer is option B.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 235

Units of Time

Complete.

Question 1.
6 minutes = 360 seconds
Think: 1 minute = 60 seconds,
so 6 minutes = 6 × 60 seconds, or 360 seconds

Question 2.
5 weeks = ______ days

Explanation:
Convert from weeks to days
1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days

Question 3.
3 years = ______ weeks

Explanation:
Convert from years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 weeks = 156 weeks

Question 4.
9 hours = ______ minutes

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
9 hours = 9 × 60 minutes = 540 minutes

Question 5.
9 minutes = ______ seconds

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
9 minutes = 9 × 60 seconds = 540 seconds

Question 6.
5 years = ______ months

Explanation:
Convert from years to months.
1 year = 12 minutes
5 years = 5 × 12 minutes = 60 minutes

Question 7.
7 days = ______ hours

Explanation:
Convert days to hours
1 day = 24 hours
7 days = 7 × 24 hours = 168 hours

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 8.
2 years ______ 14 months

Explanation:
Convert from years to months.
1 year = 12 months
2 years = 24 months
2 years > 14 months

Question 9.
3 hours ______ 300 minutes

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
3 hours = 3 × 60 minutes = 180 minutes
3 hours < 300 minutes

Question 10.
2 days ______ 48 hours

Explanation:
Convert from days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 48 hours

Question 11.
6 years ______ 300 weeks

Explanation:
Convert from years to weeks.
1 year = 52 weeks
6 years = 6 × 52 weeks = 312 weeks
312 weeks > 300 weeks

Question 12.
4 hours ______ 400 minutes

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
4 hours = 4 × 60 minutes = 240 minutes

Question 13.
5 minutes ______ 300 seconds

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
5 minutes = 5 × 60 seconds = 300 seconds
5 minutes = 300 seconds

Problem Solving

Question 14.
Jody practiced a piano piece for 500 seconds. Bill practiced a piano piece for 8 minutes. Who practiced longer?
_________

Explanation:
Given that,
Jody practiced a piano piece for 500 seconds. Bill practiced a piano piece for 8 minutes.
Convert from minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
8 minutes = 8 × 60 seconds = 480 seconds
By this, we can say that Jody practiced longer.

Question 15.
Yvette’s younger brother just turned 3 years old. Fred’s brother is now 30 months old. Whose brother is older?
_________ ‘s brother

Explanation:
Given,
Yvette’s younger brother just turned 3 years old.
Fred’s brother is now 30 months old.
Convert years to months.
1 year = 12 months
3 years = 36 months
By this, we can say that Yvette’s brother is older.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 236

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Glen rode his bike for 2 hours. For how many minutes did Glen ride his bike?
Options:
a. 60 minutes
b. 100 minutes
c. 120 minutes
d. 150 minutes

Explanation:
Glen rode his bike for 2 hours.
Convert from hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 minutes
2 hours = 2 × 60 minutes = 120 minutes
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks. In how many days does vacation start?
Options:
a. 28 days
b. 35 days
c. 42 days
d. 48 days

Explanation:
Tina says that vacation starts in exactly 4 weeks.
Convert from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
4 weeks = 4 × 7 days = 28 days
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Kayla bought $$\frac{9}{4}$$ pounds of apples. What is that weight as a mixed number?
Options:
a. 1 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pounds
b. 1 $$\frac{4}{9}$$ pounds
c. 2 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pounds
d. 2 $$\frac{3}{4}$$ pounds

Answer: 2 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pounds

Explanation:
Kayla bought $$\frac{9}{4}$$ pounds of apples.
Convert the improper fraction to the mixed fraction.
$$\frac{9}{4}$$ = 2 $$\frac{1}{4}$$ pounds
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves. How much did they earn in all? Options: a.$1.60
b. $10.80 c.$15.20
d. $16.20 Answer:$16.20

Explanation:
Judy, Jeff, and Jim each earned $5.40 raking leaves. 5.40 + 5.40 + 5.40 = 16.20 The amount earned in total is$16.20
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 5.
Melinda rode her bike $$\frac{54}{100}$$mile to the library. Then she rode $$\frac{4}{10}$$ mile to the store. How far did Melinda ride her bike in all?
Options:
a. 0.14 mile
b. 0.58 mile
c. 0.94 mile
d. 1.04 miles

Explanation:
Melinda rode her bike $$\frac{54}{100}$$ mile to the library.
Then she rode $$\frac{4}{10}$$ mile to the store.
Convert from fraction to decimal form.
$$\frac{54}{100}$$ = 0.54 mile
$$\frac{4}{10}$$ = 0.4 mile
0.54 + 0.4 = 0.94 mile
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch. How many pints of milk did the students drink?
Options:
a. 30 pints
b. 120 pints
c. 240 pints
d. 480 pints

Explanation:
One day, the students drank 60 quarts of milk at lunch.
Convert from quarts to pints.
We know that 1 quart = 2 pints
60 quarts = 60 × 2 pints = 120 pints
Thus the correct answer is option B.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 237

Problem Solving Elapsed Time

Question 1.
Molly started her piano lesson at 3:45 P.M. The lesson lasted 20 minutes. What time did the piano lesson end?
Think: What do I need to find?
How can I draw a diagram to help?
4:05 P.M.

Question 2.
Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game. He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike. What time did he start playing the computer game?
_____ P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Brendan spent 24 minutes playing a computer game.
He stopped playing at 3:55 P.M and went outside to ride his bike.
To find at what time did he start playing the computer game,
we have to subtract 24 minutes from 3:55 P.M
3 hr 55 min
0 hr 24 min
3 hr 31 min
He started playing the computer game at 3: 31 P.M.

Question 3.
Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M. What time does Aimee’s karate class start?
_____ P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Aimee’s karate class lasts 1 hour and 15 minutes and is over at 5:00 P.M.
Subtract 1 hour and 15 minutes from 5:00 P.M
5 hr 00 min
1 hr 15 min
3 hr 45 min
Therefore, Aimee’s karate class start at 3:45 P.M.

Question 4.
Mr. Giarmo left for work at 7:15 A.M. Twenty-five minutes later, he arrived at his work. What time did Mr. Giarmo arrive at his work?
_____ A.M.

Explanation:
Mr. Giarmo left for work at 7:15 A.M. Twenty-five minutes later, he arrived at his work.
7 hr 15 min
+ 0 hr 25 min
7 hr 40 min
Mr. Giarmo arrive at his work at 7: 40 A.M

Question 5.
Ms. Brown’s flight left at 9:20 A.M. Her plane landed 1 hour and 23 minutes later. What time did her plane land?
_____ A.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Ms. Brown’s flight left at 9:20 A.M. Her plane landed 1 hour and 23 minutes later.
9 hr 20 min
1 hr 23 min
10 hr 43 min
Thus plane land at 10:43 A.M.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 238

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M. They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes, and then stopped to eat lunch. What time did they stop for lunch?
Options:
a. 8:27 A.M.
b. 10:53 A.M.
c. 11:53 A.M.
d. 12:53 A.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Bobbie went snowboarding with friends at 10:10 A.M.
They snowboarded for 1 hour and 43 minutes and then stopped to eat lunch.
10 hr 10 min
+ 1 hr 43 min
11 hr 53 min
They stop for lunch at 11:53 A.M.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M. What time did the Cain family start driving?
Options:
a. 4:59 P.M.
b. 2:44 P.M.
c. 2:39 P.M.
d. 2:29 P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
The Cain family drove for 1 hour and 15 minutes and arrived at their camping spot at 3:44 P.M.
3 hr 44 min
-1 hr 15 min
2 hr 29 min
Thus the Cain family start driving at 2:29 P.M
The correct answer is option D.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long. How long is this in millimeters?
Options:
a. 15 millimeters
b. 150 millimeters
c. 1,500 millimeters
d. 15,000 millimeters

Explanation:
A praying mantis can grow up to 15 centimeters long.
Convert from centimeters to millimeters.
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
15 centimeter = 15 × 10 millimeter = 150 millimeters
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 4.
Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup. How many milliliters of soup is this?
Options:
a. 30 milliliters
b. 300 milliliters
c. 3,000 milliliters
d. 30,000 milliliters

Explanation:
Given,
Thom’s minestrone soup recipe makes 3 liters of soup.
Converting from liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
3 liters = 3 × 1000 milliliters = 3000 milliliters
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 5.
Stewart walks $$\frac{2}{3}$$ mile each day. Which is a multiple of $$\frac{2}{3}$$ ?
Options:
a. $$\frac{4}{3}$$
b. $$\frac{4}{6}$$
c. $$\frac{8}{10}$$
d. $$\frac{2}{12}$$

Answer: $$\frac{4}{3}$$

Explanation:
$$\frac{2}{3}$$ × 2 = $$\frac{4}{3}$$
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Question 6.
Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid. Which of the following expresses 0.60 as tenths in fraction form?
Options:
a. $$\frac{60}{100}$$
b. $$\frac{60}{10}$$
c. $$\frac{6}{100}$$
d. $$\frac{6}{10}$$

Answer: $$\frac{6}{10}$$

Explanation:
Given,
Angelica colored in 0.60 of the squares on her grid.
The fraction form of $$\frac{6}{10}$$ is 0.60
Thus the correct answer is option D.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 239

Mixed Measures

Complete.

Question 1.
8 pounds 4 ounces = 132 ounces
Think: 8 pounds = 8 × 16 ounces, or 128 ounces.
128 ounces + 4 ounces = 132 ounces

Question 2.
5 weeks 3 days = _____ days

Explanation:
Given,
Convert from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
35 days + 3 days = 38 days

Question 3.
4 minutes 45 seconds = _____ seconds

Explanation:
Convert from minutes to seconds.
1 minute = 60 seconds
4 minutes = 4 × 60 seconds = 240 seconds
240 seconds + 45 seconds = 285 seconds

Question 4.
4 hours 30 minutes = _____ minutes

Explanation:
Convert from hours to minutes.
1 hour = 60 min
4 hours = 4 × 60 mins = 240 mins
240 mins + 30 mins = 270 mins

Question 5.
3 tons 600 pounds = _____ pounds

Explanation:
1 ton = 2000 pounds
3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6000 pounds
6000 pounds + 600 pounds = 6600 pounds

Question 6.
6 pints 1 cup = _____ cups

Explanation:
Convert from pints to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
6 pints = 6 × 2 cups = 12 cups
12 cups + 1 cup = 13 cups

Question 7.
7 pounds 12 ounces = _____ ounces

Explanation:
Convert from pounds to ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
7 pounds = 7 × 16 ounces = 112 ounces
112 ounces + 12 ounces = 124 ounces

Question 8.
9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
—————
_____ gal _____ qt

Explanation:
9 gal 1 qt
+ 6 gal 1 qt
15 gal 2 qt

Question 9.
12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
—————
_____ lb _____ oz

Explanation:
We subtract
12 lb 5 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
Borrow 1 lb and then convert it into ounces
we know that
1 lb = 16 ounces
11 lb 21 oz
– 7 lb 10 oz
4 lb 11 oz

Question 10.
8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
—————
_____ hr _____ min

Explanation:
8 hr 3 min
+ 4 hr 12 min
12 hr 15 min

Problem Solving

Question 11.
Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today. How much longer did the team practice today than yesterday?
_____ minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Michael’s basketball team practiced for 2 hours 40 minutes yesterday and 3 hours 15 minutes today.
Subtract
3 hours 15 minutes
-2 hours 40 minutes
0 hour 35 minutes

Question 12.
Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project. What is the length of the piece of ribbon now?
_____ feet _____ inches

Explanation:
Rhonda had a piece of ribbon that was 5 feet 3 inches long. She removed a 5-inch piece to use in her art project.
We subtract
5 feet 3 inches
– 0 feet 5 inches
Borrow one feet and then convert it into the inches
1 foot = 12 inches
4 feet 15 inches
-0 feet 5 inches
4 feet 10 inches

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 240

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef. How much more corned beef did she buy than roast beef?
Options:
a. 16 ounces
b. 10 ounces
c. 7 ounces
d. 6 ounces

Explanation:
Given,
Marsha bought 1 pound 11 ounces of roast beef and 2 pounds 5 ounces of corned beef.
Subtract roast beef from corned beef.
2 pounds 5 ounces  – 1 pound 11 ounces
Borrow 1 pound and convert it into the ounces.
1 pound 21 ounces
– 1 pound 11 ounces
0 pound 10 ounces
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 2.
Theodore says there are 2 weeks 5 days left in the year. How many days are left in the year?
Options:
a. 14 days
b. 15 days
c. 19 days
d. 25 days

Explanation:
Convert from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
2 weeks = 14 days
14 + 5 = 19 days
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded. On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded. Which statement is true?
Options:
a. 0.05 > 0.5
b. 0.05 = 0.5
c. 0.05 < 0.5
d. 0.05 + 0.5 = 1.0

Explanation:
On one grid, 0.5 of the squares are shaded. On another grid, 0.05 of the squares are shaded.
0.5 is greater than 0.05
0.05 < 0.5
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
Classify the triangle shown below.

Options:
a. right
b. acute
c. equilateral
d. obtuse

By seeing the above figure we can say that the figure is right-angle triangle.
Thus the answer is option A.

Question 5.
Sahil’s brother is 3 years old. How many weeks old is his brother?
Options:
a. 30 weeks
b. 36 weeks
c. 90 weeks
d. 156 weeks

Explanation:
Convert from years to weeks
1 year = 52 weeks
3 years = 3 × 52 weeks = 156 weeks
Thus the correct answer is option D.

Question 6.
Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes. She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M. At what time did her lesson start?
Options:
a. 9:30 A.M.
b. 9:50 A.M.
c. 10:30 A.M.
d. 12:10 A.M.

Explanation:
Sierra’s swimming lessons last 1 hour 20 minutes.
She finished her lesson at 10:50 A.M.
10 hr 50 min
– 1 hr 20 min
9 hr 30 min
Thus Sierra’s swimming lesson starts at 9:30 A.M
Thus the correct answer is option A.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 241

Patterns in Measurement Units

Each table shows a pattern for two customary units of time or volume. Label the columns of the table.

Question 1.

Question 2.

 _________ _________ 1 12 2 24 3 36 4 48 5 60

The label for the columns of the table is shown below:

 Feet Inches 1 12 2 24 3 36 4 48 5 60

Question 3.

 _________ _________ 1 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10

The label for the columns of the table is shown below:

 Quart Pints 1 2 2 4 3 6 4 8 5 10

Question 4.

 _________ _________ 1 7 2 14 3 21 4 28 5 35

The label for the columns of the table is shown below:

 Week Days 1 7 2 14 3 21 4 28 5 35

Problem Solving

Use the table for 5 and 6.

Question 5.
Marguerite made the table to compare two metric measures of length. Name a pair of units Marguerite could be comparing.
1 ________
= 10 ________

1 = centimeter
10 = millimeters

Question 6.
Name another pair of metric units of length that have the same relationship.
1 ________
= 10 ________

1 = meter
10 = decimeters

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 242

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64. Which are the best labels for
Joanne’s table?
Options:
a. Cups, Fluid Ounces
b. Gallons, Quarts
c. Pounds, Ounces
d. Yards, Inches

Explanation:
Joanne made a table to relate two units of measure. The number pairs in her table are 1 and 16, 2 and 32, 3 and 48, 4 and 64.
By seeing the pairs we can say that the units of the measure are pounds, ounces.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 2.
Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96. Which are the best labels for Cade’s table?
Options:
a. Days, Hours
b. Days, Weeks
c. Years, Months
d. Years, Weeks

Explanation:
Cade made a table to relate two units of time. The number pairs in his table are 1 and 24, 2 and 48, 3 and 72, 4 and 96.
By seeing the above pairs we can say that the unit of measure is Days, Hours.
Thus the correct answer is option A.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Anita has 2 quarters, 1 nickel, and 4 pennies. Write Anita’s total amount as a fraction of a dollar
Options:
a. $$\frac{39}{100}$$
b. $$\frac{54}{100}$$
c. $$\frac{59}{100}$$
d. $$\frac{84}{100}$$

Answer: $$\frac{59}{100}$$

Explanation:

Well, first off, you should know that the denominator of the fraction will be $1.00, since we’re putting it in a fraction as a dollar. 2 quarters =$0.50
1 nickel = $0.05 4 pennies =$0.04
$0.50 +$0.05 + $0.04 =$0.59
The fraction of 0.59 is $$\frac{59}{100}$$
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 4.
The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6. Which describes the turn the minute hand makes?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$ turn
b. $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn
c. $$\frac{3}{4}$$ turn
d. 1 full turn

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn

Explanation:
The minute hand of a clock moves from 12 to 6.
If we observe the clock we can say that the minute hand makes $$\frac{1}{2}$$ turn.
Thus the correct answer is option B.

Question 5.
Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms. What is the mass of the dog in grams?
Options:
a. 9 grams
b. 900 grams
c. 9,000 grams
d. 90,000 grams

Explanation:
Given,
Roderick has a dog that has a mass of 9 kilograms.
Convert from 9 kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
9 kilograms = 9000 grams
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 6.
Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemonlime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch. How much more lemon-lime drink did Kari use than pink lemonade?
Options:
a. 3 quarts
b. 4 quarts
c. 1 gallon 1 quart
d. 1 gallon 2 quarts

Explanation:
Given,
Kari mixed 3 gallons 2 quarts of lemonlime drink with 2 gallons 3 quarts of pink lemonade to make punch.
Subtract
3 gallons 2 quarts
2 gallons 3 quarts
Borrow 1 gallon and then convert it to the quarts.
2 gallons 6 quarts
-2 gallons 3 quarts
0 gallons 3 quarts
Thus the correct answer is option A.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 243

Lesson 12.1

Use benchmarks to choose the unit you would use to measure each.

Question 1.
length of a car
customary unit: ________
metric unit: ________

The customary units of the length of a car are a foot.
The metric unit to measure the length of a car is meter.

Question 2.
liquid volume of a sink
customary unit: ________
metric unit: ________

The customary unit to measure the liquid volume of a sink is a gallon.
The metric unit to find the liquid volume of a sink is a liter.

Question 3.
weight or mass of a parakeet
customary unit: ________
metric unit: ________

The customary unit to measure the weight or mass of a parakeet is an ounce.
The metric unit to find the weight or mass of a parakeet is a gram.

Question 4.
customary unit: ________
metric unit: ________

The customary unit to measure the length of your thumb is inch.
The metric unit to find the length of your thumb is centimeter.

Lessons 12.2—12.4

Complete.

Question 5.
6 yards = _____ feet

Explanation:
Convert from yards to feet
1 yard = 3 feet
6 yards = 6 × 3 feet = 18 feet

Question 6.
2 feet = _____ inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
2 feet = 2 × 12 inches = 24 inches

Question 7.
3 pounds = _____ ounces

Explanation:
Convert from pounds to ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
3 pounds = 3 × 16 ounces = 48 ounces

Question 8.
2 tons = _____ pounds

Explanation:
Convert from Tons to pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
2 tons = 4000 pounds

Question 9.
5 gallons = _____ quarts

Explanation:
Convert from gallons to quarts
1 gallon = 4 quarts
5 gallons = 5 × 4 quarts = 20 quarts

Question 10.
4 quarts = _____ cups

Explanation:
Convert from quarts to cups.
1 quart = 4 cups
4 quarts = 4 × 4 cups = 16 cups

Lesson 12.5

Use the line plot for 1–2.

Question 11.
What is the difference in height between the tallest plant and the shortest plant?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ foot

Answer: $$\frac{1}{2}$$ foot

Explanation:
By seeing the line plot we can say that the tallest plant is $$\frac{5}{6}$$ foot.
the tallest plant is $$\frac{2}{6}$$ foot
$$\frac{5}{6}$$ foot – $$\frac{2}{6}$$ = $$\frac{3}{6}$$
= $$\frac{1}{2}$$ foot

Question 12.
How many plants are in Box A?
_____ plants

Explanation:
By seeing the line plot we can say that there are 10 plants in Box A.

### Common Core – Relative Sizes of Measurement Units – Page No. 244

Lessons 12.6—12.8

Complete.

Question 1.
9 centimeters = _____ millimeters

Explanation:
Converting from centimeters to millimeters.
We know that,
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters
9 centimeters = 9 × 10 millimeters = 90 millimeters

Question 2.
7 meters = _____ decimeters

Explanation:
Converting from meters to decimeters
1 meter = 10 decimeter
7 meters = 7 × 10 decimeter = 70 decimeters

Question 3.
5 decimeters = _____ centimeters

Explanation:
Converting from decimeters to centimeters.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters
5 decimeters = 5 × 10 centimeters = 50 centimeters

Question 4.
4 liters = _____ milliliters

Explanation:
Converting from liters to milliliters
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
4 liters = 4 × 1000 milliliters = 4000 milliliters

Question 5.
3 kilograms = _____ grams

Explanation:
Converting from kilograms to grams
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
3 kilograms = 3 × 1000 grams = 3000 grams

Question 6.
3 weeks = _____ days

Explanation:
Converting from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
3 weeks = 3 × 7 days = 21 days

Question 7.
6 hours = _____ minutes

Explanation:
Converting from hours to minutes
1 hour = 60 minutes
6 hours = 6 × 60 minutes = 360 minutes

Question 8.
2 days = _____ hours

Explanation:
Converting from days to hours.
1 day = 24 hours
2 days = 2 × 24 hours = 48 hours

Lesson 12.10

Question 9.
3 ft 8 in.
+ 1 ft 2 in.
————–
_____ ft _____ in.

Explanation:
3 ft 8 in.
+ 1 ft 2 in.
4 ft 10 in

Question 10.
9 lb 6 oz
– 4 lb 2 oz
————–
_____ lb _____ oz

Explanation:
9 lb 6 oz
– 4 lb 2 oz
5 lb 4 oz

Question 11.
5 gal 2 qt
– 1 gal 3 qt
————–
_____ gal _____ qt

Explanation:
Borrow one gallon and convert it into quarts.
4 gal 6 qt
– 1 gal 3 qt
3 gal 3 qt

Question 12.
7 hr 10 min
– 3 hr 40 min
————–
_____ hr _____ min

Explanation:
Borrow one hour and convert it into minutes.
6 hr 70 min
– 3 hr 40 min
3 hr 30 min

Lessons 12.9 and 12.11

Question 13.
Rick needs to be at school at 8:15 A.M. It takes him 20 minutes to walk to school. At what time does he need to leave to get to school on time?
_____ : _____ A.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Rick needs to be at school at 8:15 A.M. It takes him 20 minutes to walk to school.
Subtract 20 mins from 8:15 A.M
8 hr 15 min
– 0 hr 20 min
Borrow 1 hour and convert it to minutes
7 hr 75 min
– 0 hr 20 min
7 : 55 A.M

Question 14.
Sunny’s gymnastics class lasts 1 hour 20 minutes. The class starts at 3:50 P.M. At what time does the gymnastics class end?
_____ : _____ P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Sunny’s gymnastics class lasts 1 hour 20 minutes. The class starts at 3:50 P.M.
3 hr 50 min
+1 hr 20 min
5 hr 10 min
Thus the gymnastics class ends at 5:10 P.M.

Question 15.
David made a table to relate two customary units. Label the columns of the table.

Question 15.

 _________ _________ 1 16 2 32 3 48 4 64 5 80

The label for the columns of the table is shown below:

 Pounds Ounces 1 16 2 32 3 48 4 64 5 80

Conclusion:

I wish the solutions provided in this article are clear and simple. Feel free to clarify your doubts by posting your comments in the below comment section. Also, get the link of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units here. All the best!!!

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals contains the topics like Relate Tenths and Decimals, Hundredths and Decimals, Equivalent Fractions, and Decimals, Relate Fractions, Decimals, and Money, Add Fractional Parts of 10 and 100, etc. We have provided solutions for each and every question in an easy manner.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals

I know it is tough for the parents to teach maths to 4th-grade students. So, Download our Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework Practice FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals pdf and start your homework. Tap the link to get the solutions according to the topics. This online learning helps the students to enhance their math skills.

Browse Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals on Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key. Students of 4th grade can understand the notation of fractions and decimals with the help of our HMH Go Math Answer Key Grade 4 Homework Practice FL Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals.

Lesson: 1 – Relate Tenths and Decimals

Lesson: 2 – Relate Hundredths and Decimals

Lesson: 3 – Equivalent Fractions and Decimals

Lesson: 4 – Relate Fractions, Decimals, and Money

Lesson: 5 – Problem Solving Money

Lesson: 6 – Add Fractional Parts of 10 and 100

Lesson: 7 – Compare Decimals

Lesson: 8

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 171

Relate Tenths and Decimals

Write the fraction or mixed number and the decimal shown by the model.

Question 1.

Question 2.

Type below:
_________
1 2/10

Explanation:
The model is divided into 10 equal parts. Each part represents one-tenth.
1 2/10 is 1 whole and 2 tenths.

Question 3.

Type below:
_________

2 3/10 = 2.3

Explanation:

By seeing the above number line we can say that the decimal is 2.3

Question 4.

Type below:
_________

4810 = 4.8

Explanation:

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 5.
$$\frac{4}{10}$$
_____

0.4

Explanation:
Write down 4 with the decimal point 1 space from the right (because 10 has 1 zero)
0.4
The decimal form for the fraction $$\frac{4}{10}$$ is 0.4

Question 6.
3 $$\frac{1}{10}$$
_____

3.1

Explanation:
Multiply 3 x 10 = 30.
Add 30 + 1 = 31.
So, 31/10.
Write down 31 with the decimal point 1 space from the right (because 10 has 1 zero)
3.1

Question 7.
$$\frac{7}{10}$$
_____

0.7

Explanation:
Write down 7 with the decimal point 1 space from the right (because 10 has 1 zero)
0.7
The decimal form for the fraction $$\frac{7}{10}$$ is 0.7

Question 8.
6 $$\frac{5}{10}$$
_____

6.5

Explanation:
Multiply 6 x 10 = 60.
Add 60 + 5 = 65.
So, 65/10.
Write down 35 with the decimal point 1 space from the right (because 10 has 1 zero)
6.5

Question 9.
$$\frac{9}{10}$$
_____

0.9

Explanation:
Write down 9 with the decimal point 1 space from the right (because 10 has 1 zero)
0.9
The decimal form for the fraction $$\frac{9}{10}$$ is 0.9

Problem Solving

Question 10.
There are 10 sports balls in the equipment closet. Three are kickballs. Write the portion of the balls that are kickballs as a fraction, as a decimal, and in word form.
Type below:
_________

3/10 = 0.3 = three tenths

Explanation:
Given,
There are 10 sports balls in the equipment closet.
Three are kickballs.
So, 3/10 kickballs are available.

Question 11.
Peyton has 2 pizzas. Each pizza is cut into 10 equal slices. She and her friends eat 14 slices. What part of the pizzas did they eat? Write your answer as a decimal.
_________

1.4 pizzas

Explanation:
Peyton has 2 pizzas. Each pizza is cut into 10 equal slices.
So, total number of slices = 2 x 10 = 20.
She and her friends eat 14 slices.
So, they ate 1 whole pizza and 4 parts out of 10 slices in the second pizza.
1 4/10 = 14/10 = 1.4 pizzas.
Therefore the decimal form of the part of the pizzas they eat is 1.4 pizzas.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 172

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Valerie has 10 CDs in her music case. Seven of the CDs are pop music CDs. What is this amount written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 70.0
b. 7.0
c. 0.7
d. 0.07

c. 0.7

Explanation:
Valerie has 10 CDs in her music case. Seven of the CDs are pop music CDs.
Seven CDs out of 10 CDs = 7/10 =0.7
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 2.
Which decimal amount is modeled below?

Options:
a. 140.0
b. 14.0
c. 1.4
d. 0.14

c. 1.4

Explanation:
1 4/10
Multiply 10 x 1 = 10.
Add 10 + 4 = 14.
So, 14/10 = 1.4.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which number is a factor of 13?
Options:
a. 1
b. 3
c. 4
d. 7

a. 1

Explanation:
13 has 1 and 13 as its factors.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
An art gallery has 18 paintings and 4 photographs displayed in equal rows on a wall, with the same number of each type of art in each row. Which of the following could be the number of rows?
Options:
a. 2 rows
b. 3 rows
c. 4 rows
d. 6 rows

a. 2 rows

Explanation:
An art gallery has 18 paintings and 4 photographs displayed in equal rows on a wall, with the same number of each type of art in each row. So, 18 paintings and 4 photographs need to be divided into equal parts.
18/2 = 9; 4/2 = 2.
2 rows can be possible with 9 pictures and 2 pictures in each row.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 5.
How do you write the mixed number shown as a fraction greater than 1?

Options:
a. $$\frac{32}{5}$$
b. $$\frac{14}{4}$$
c. $$\frac{6}{4}$$
d. $$\frac{4}{4}$$

b. 14/4
Explanation:
324 = 14/4. 14 divided by 4 is equal to 3 with a remainder of 2. The 3 is greater than 1. So, 14/4 > 1.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Which of the following models has an amount shaded that is equivalent to the fraction $$\frac{1}{5}$$?
Options:
a.
b.
c.
d.

c.

Explanation:
a. 2/3
b. 5/10 = 1/2
c. 2/10 = 1/5
d. 1/10
Thus the correct answer is option c.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 173

Relate Hundredths and Decimals

Write the fraction or mixed number and the decimal shown by the model.

Question 1.

Question 2.

Type below:
_________

29/100 = 0.29

Explanation:
0.20 names the same amount as 20/100.
So, the given point is at 29/100 = 0.29

Question 3.

Type below:
_________

1 54/100 = 1.54

Explanation:
From the given image, one model is one whole and another model 54 boxes shaded out of 100. So, the answer is 1 54/100 = 1.54

Question 4.

Type below:
_________

4 62/100 = 4.62

Explanation:
4.60 names the same amount as 460100. So, the given point is at 4 62/100 = 4.62

Write the fraction or mixed number as a decimal.

Question 5.
$$\frac{37}{100}$$
_____

0.37

Explanation:
Write down 37 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). 0.37

Question 6.
8 $$\frac{11}{100}$$
_____

8.11

Explanation:
8 11/100 = 811/100
Write down 811 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). So, 8.11 is the answer.

Question 7.
$$\frac{98}{100}$$
_____

0.98

Explanation:
Write down 98 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). 0.98

Question 8.
25 $$\frac{50}{100}$$
_____

25.50

Explanation:
25 50/100 = 2550/100
Write down 2550 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). So, 25.50 is the answer.

Question 9.
$$\frac{6}{100}$$
_____

0.06

Explanation:
Write down 6 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). 0.06

Problem Solving

Question 10.
There are 100 pennies in a dollar. What fraction of a dollar is 61 pennies? Write it as a fraction, as a decimal, and in word form.
Type below:
_________

61/100 pennies = 0.61 = sixty-one hundredths

Explanation:
There are 100 pennies in a dollar. So, for 61 pennies, there are 61100 pennies = 0.61 = sixty-one hundredths.

Question 11.
Kylee has collected 100 souvenir thimbles from different places she has visited with her family. Twenty of the thimbles are carved from wood. Write the fraction of thimbles that are wooden as a decimal.
_________

It is easier to work with decimals then fractions because it is like adding whole numbers in a normal way.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 174

Lesson Check

Question 1.
Which decimal represents the shaded section of the model below?

Options:
a. 830.0
b. 83.0
c. 8.30
d. 0.83

d. 0.83

Explanation:
The model is divided into 100 equal parts. Each part represents one hundredth. 83 boxes are shaded out of 100.
So, the answer is 83/100 = 0.83
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 2.
There were 100 questions on the unit test. Alondra answered 97 of the questions correctly. What decimal represents the fraction of questions Alondra answered correctly?
Options:
a. 0.97
b. 9.70
c. 90.70
d. 970.0

a. 0.97

Explanation:
There were 100 questions on the unit test. Alondra answered 97 of the questions correctly. So, 97/100 questions answered correctly. = 0.97
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Which is equivalent to $$\frac{7}{8}$$ ?
Options:
a. $$\frac{5}{8}+\frac{3}{8}$$
b. $$\frac{4}{8}+\frac{1}{8}+\frac{1}{8}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{8}+\frac{2}{8}+\frac{2}{8}$$
d. $$\frac{2}{8}+\frac{2}{8}+\frac{1}{8}+\frac{1}{8}$$

c. 3/8+2/8+2/8
Explanation:
c. 3/8+2/8+2/8 = 7/8
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 4.
What is $$\frac{9}{10}-\frac{6}{10}$$?

Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{10}$$
b. $$\frac{3}{10}$$
c. $$\frac{4}{10}$$
d. $$\frac{6}{10}$$

b. 3/10
Explanation:
9/10−6/10. From 9 parts, 6 parts are removed. So, remaining parts are 3.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 5.
Misha used 14 of a carton of 12 eggs to make an omelet. How many eggs did she use?
Options:
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 6

b. 3

Explanation:
Misha used 14 of a carton of 12 eggs to make an omelet. 14 x 12 = 3 eggs.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 6.
Kurt used the rule add 4, subtract 1 to generate a pattern. The first term in his pattern is 5. Which number could be in Kurt’s pattern?
Options:
a. 4
b. 6
c. 10
d. 14

d. 14

Explanation:
Kurt used the rule add 4, subtract 1 to generate a pattern.
The first term in his pattern is 5.
The pattern numbers are 5, 8, 11, 14, 17, 20, etc.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 175

Equivalent Fractions and Decimals

Write the number as hundredths in fraction form and decimal form.

Question 1.
$$\frac{5}{10}$$
$$\frac{5}{10}$$ = $$\frac{5 \times 10}{10 \times 10}=\frac{50}{100}$$

Think: 5 tenths is the same as 5 tenths and 0 hundredths. Write 0.50.

Question 2.
$$\frac{9}{10}$$
Type below:
_________

90/100; 0.90

Explanation:
9/10 = 9×10/10×10 = 90/100
9 tenths is the same as 9 tenths and 0 hundredths. Write 0.90

Question 3.
0.2
Type below:
_________

20100
0.20

Explanation:
2 tenths is the same as 2 tenths and 0 hundredths. Write 0.20.

2/10 = 2×10/10×10 = 20/100

Question 4.
0.8
Type below:
_________

80100 = 0.80

Explanation:
8 tenths is the same as 8 tenths and 0 hundredths. Write 0.80.

8/10 = 8×10/10×10 = 80/100

Write the number as tenths in fraction form and decimal form.

Question 5.
$$\frac{40}{100}$$
Type below:
_________

4/10 = 0.4

Explanation:
10 is a common factor of the numerator and the denominator.
40/100 = 40÷10/100÷10 = 4/10
= 0.4

Question 6.
$$\frac{10}{100}$$
Type below:
_________

1/10 = 0.1

Explanation:
10 is a common factor of the numerator and the denominator.
10/100 = 10÷10/100÷10 = 1/10
= 0.1

Question 7.
0.60
Type below:
_________

6/10 = 0.6

Explanation:
0.60 is 60 hundredths.
60/100.
10 is a common factor of the numerator and the denominator.
60/100 = 60÷10/100÷10 = 6/10
= 0.6

Problem Solving

Question 8.
Billy walks $$\frac{6}{10}$$ mile to school each day. Write $$\frac{6}{10}$$ as hundredths in fraction form and in decimal form.
Type below:
_________

60100
0.60

Explanation:
Billy walks 6/10 mile to school each day.
6/10 = 6×10/10×10 = 60/100

Question 9.
Four states have names that begin with the letter A. This represents 0.08 of all the states. Write 0.08 as a fraction.
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

8/100
Explanation:
0.08 is 8 hundredths. So, the fraction is 8/100

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 176

Lesson Check

Question 1.
The fourth-grade students at Harvest School make up 0.3 of all students at the school. Which fraction is equivalent to 0.3?
Options:
a. $$\frac{3}{10}$$
b. $$\frac{30}{10}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{100}$$
d. $$\frac{33}{100}$$

a. 3/10
Explanation:
0.3 is same as the 3 tenths.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 2.
Kyle and his brother have a marble set. Of the marbles, 12 are blue. This represents $$\frac{50}{100}$$ of all the marbles. Which decimal is equivalent to $$\frac{50}{100}$$?
Options:
a. 50
b. 5.0
c. 0.50
d. 5,000

c. 0.50

Explanation:

Write down 50 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros).
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Jesse won his race by 3 $$\frac{45}{100}$$ seconds. What is this number written as a decimal?
Options:
a. 0.345
b. 3.45
c. 34.5
d. 345

b. 3.45

Explanation:
3 45/100 = 345/100. Write down 345 with the decimal point 2 spaces from the right (because 100 has 2 zeros). So, 3.45 is the answer.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 4.
Marge cut 16 pieces of tape for mounting pictures on poster board. Each piece of tape was $$\frac{3}{8}$$ inch long. How much tape did Marge use?
Options:
a. 2 inches
b. 4 inches
c. 5 inches
d. 6 inches

d. 6 inches

Explanation:
3/8 x 16 = 6 inches
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
Of Katie’s pattern blocks, $$\frac{9}{12}$$ are triangles. What is $$\frac{9}{12}$$ in simplest form?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$
b. $$\frac{2}{3}$$
c. $$\frac{3}{4}$$
d. $$\frac{9}{12}$$

c. 3/4
Explanation:
9/12 is divided by 3. So, 3/4 is the answer.
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 6.
A number pattern has 75 as its first term. The rule for the pattern is subtract 6. What is the sixth term?
Options:
a. 39
b. 45
c. 51
d. 69

b. 45

Explanation:
75 is the first term.
75 – 6 =69
69 – 6 = 63
63 – 6 = 57
57 – 6 = 51
51 – 6 = 45.
The sixth term is 45.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 177

Relate Fractions, Decimals, and Money

Write the total money amount. Then write the amount as a fraction or a mixed number and as a decimal in terms of dollars.

Question 1.

$0.18 = 18/100 = 0.18 Explanation: Given that 3 Pennies + 3 Nickels = 3/100 + 15/100 = 18/100 Question 2. Type below: _________ Answer:$0.56 = 56/100 = 0.56

Explanation:
Given that 1 Quarter + 3 dime + 1 Pennies = 25/100 + 30/100 + 1/100 = 56/100

Write as a money amount and as a decimal in terms of dollars.

Question 3.
$$\frac{25}{100}$$
Dollars: _____ Decimal: _____

Dollars: 1 quarter = $0.25; Decimal: 0.25 Explanation: 25 our of 100 dollars = 1 quarter. So, 25/100 = 0.25 Question 4. $$\frac{79}{100}$$ Dollars: _____ Decimal: _____ Answer: amount:$0.79 decimal: 0.79 of a dollar

Explanation:
79/100 = 0.79

Question 5.
$$\frac{31}{100}$$
Dollars: _____ Decimal: _____

amount: $0.31 decimal: 0.31 of a dollar Explanation: 31/100 = 0.31 Question 6. $$\frac{8}{100}$$ Dollars: _____ Decimal: _____ Answer: amount:$0.08 decimal: 0.08 of a dollar

Explanation:
81/00 = 0.08

Question 7.
$$\frac{42}{100}$$
Dollars: _____ Decimal: _____

amount: $0.42 decimal: 0.42 of a dollar Explanation: 42/100 = 0.42 Write the money amount as a fraction in terms of dollars. Question 8.$0.87
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

87/100 of a dollar

Explanation:

$0.87 = 87 pennies There are 100 pennies in 1 dollar. So,$0.87 = 87/100 of a dollar.

Question 9.
$0.03 $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 3/100 Explanation:$0.03 = 3 pennies
There are 100 pennies in 1 dollar.
So, $0.03 = 3/100. Question 10.$0.66
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

66/100

Explanation:

$0.66 = 66 pennies There are 100 pennies in 1 dollar. So,$0.66 = 66/100.

Question 11.
$0.95 $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 95/100 Explanation:$0.95 = 95 pennies
There are 100 pennies in 1 dollar.
So, $0.95 = 95/100. Question 12.$1.00
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

100/100

Explanation:

$1.00 = 1 dollar There are 100 pennies in 1 dollar. So,$1.00 = 100/100.

Write the total money amount. Then write the amount as a fraction and as a decimal in terms of dollars.

Question 13.
2 quarters 2 dimes
Type below:
_________

money amount: $0.70; fraction: 70/100; decimal: 0.70 Explanation: Given that 2 quarters 2 dimes = (2 x 25/100) + (2 x 10/100) = 50/100 + 20/100 = 70/100 Question 14. 3 dimes 4 pennies Type below: _________ Answer: money amount:$0.34; fraction: 34/100; decimal: 0.34

Explanation:
Given that 3 dimes 4 pennies = (3 x 10/100) + (4 x 1/100) = 30/100 + 4/100 = 34/100

Question 15.
8 nickels 12 pennies
Type below:
_________

money amount: $0.57; fraction: 57/100; decimal: 0.57 Explanation: Given that 8 nickels 12 pennies = (8 x 5/100) + (12 x 1/100) = 45/100 + 12/100 = 57/100 Problem Solving Question 16. Kate has 1 dime, 4 nickels, and 8 pennies. Write Kate’s total amount as a fraction in terms of a dollar. $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: fraction: 38/100 Explanation: Kate has 1 dime, 4 nickels, and 8 pennies. 10/100 + (4 x 5/100) + (8/100) = 10/100 + 20/100 + 8/100 = 38/100 Question 17. Nolan says he has $$\frac{75}{100}$$ of a dollar. If he only has 3 coins, what are the coins? __________ Answer: 3 quarters Explanation: 3 quarters = 25/100 + 25/100 + 25/100 = 75/100 ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 178 Lesson Check Question 1. Which of the following names the total money amount shown as a fraction in terms of a dollar? Options: a. $$\frac{43}{1}$$ b. $$\frac{43}{10}$$ c. $$\frac{43}{57}$$ d. $$\frac{43}{100}$$ Answer: d. 43/100 Explanation: Given that 1 quarter + 1 nickel + 1 dime + 3 pennies = 25/100 + 5/100 + 10/100 + 3/100 = 43/100 Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 2. Crystal has $$\frac{81}{100}$$ of a dollar. Which of the following could be the coins Crystal has? Options: a. 3 quarters, 1 dime, 1 penny b. 2 quarters, 6 nickels, 1 penny c. 2 quarters, 21 pennies d. 1 quarter, 4 dimes, 1 nickel, 1 penny Answer: b. 2 quarters, 6 nickels, 1 penny Explanation: 2 quarters, 6 nickels, 1 penny = (2 x 25/100) + (6 x 5/100) + 1/100 = 50/100 + 30/100 + 1/100 = 81/100 Thus the correct answer is option b. Spiral Review Question 3. Joel gives $$\frac{1}{3}$$ of his baseball cards to his sister. Which fraction is equivalent to $$\frac{1}{3}$$? Options: a. $$\frac{3}{5}$$ b. $$\frac{2}{6}$$ c. $$\frac{8}{9}$$ d. $$\frac{4}{10}$$ Answer: b. 2/6 Explanation: 2/6 is divided by 2. The remaining answer after the dividion is 1/3. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 4. Penelope bakes pretzels. She salts $$\frac{3}{8}$$ of the pretzels. Which fraction is equivalent to $$\frac{3}{8}$$ ? Options: a. $$\frac{9}{24}$$ b. $$\frac{15}{20}$$ c. $$\frac{3}{16}$$ d. $$\frac{1}{5}$$ Answer: a. 9/24 Explanation: a. 9/24 is divided by 3. The remaining fraction after the division is 3/8. Thus the correct answer is option a. Question 5. Which decimal is shown by the model? Options: a. 10.0 b. 1.0 c. 0.1 d. 0.01 Answer: d. 0.01 Explanation: 1 box is shaded out of 100. So, the fraction is 1/100 = 0.01. Thus the correct answer is option d. Question 6. Mr. Guzman has 100 cows on his dairy farm. Of the cows, 57 are Holstein. What decimal represents the portion of cows that are Holstein? Options: a. 0.43 b. 0.57 c. 5.7 d. 57.0 Answer: b. 0.57 Explanation: Mr. Guzman has 100 cows on his dairy farm. Of the cows, 57 are Holstein. So, 57/100 Holstein cows are available. 57/100 = 0.57 Thus the correct answer is option b. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 179 Problem Solving Money Use the act it out strategy to solve. Question 1. Carl wants to buy a bicycle bell that costs$4.50. Carl has saved $2.75 so far. How much more money does he need to buy the bell? Use 4$1 bills and 2 quarters to model $4.50. Remove bills and coins that have a value of$2.75. First, remove 2 $1 bills and 2 quarters. Next, exchange one$1 bill for 4 quarters and remove 1 quarter.
Count the amount that is left. So, Carl needs to save $1.75 more. Answer: Question 2. Together, Xavier, Yolanda, and Zachary have$4.44. If each person has the same amount, how much money does each person have?
$_________ Answer:$1.11

Explanation:
Together, Xavier, Yolanda, and Zachary have $4.44. If each person has the same amount,$4.44/4 = $1.11 Question 3. Marcus, Nan, and Olive each have$1.65 in their pockets. They decide to combine the money. How much money do they have altogether?
$_________ Answer:$4.95

Explanation:
Marcus, Nan, and Olive each have $1.65 in their pockets. They decide to combine the money. So,$1.65 + $1.65 +$1.65 = $4.95 Question 4. Jessie saves$6 each week. In how many weeks will she have saved at least $50? _________ weeks Answer: 9 weeks Explanation: Jessie saves$6 each week. To save $50,$50/$6 = 9 weeks (approximately) Question 5. Becca has$12 more than Cece. Dave has $3 less than Cece. Cece has$10. How much money do they have altogether?
$_________ Answer:$39

Explanation:
Cece has $10. Becca has$12 more than Cece = $10 +$12 = $22. Dave has$3 less than Cece = $10 –$3 = $7. All together =$10 + $22 +$7 = $39. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 180 Lesson Check Question 1. Four friends earned$5.20 for washing a car. They shared the money equally. How much did each friend get?
Options:
a. $1.05 b.$1.30
c. $1.60 d.$20.80

b. $1.30 Explanation: Four friends earned$5.20 for washing a car. They shared the money equally.
$5.20/4 =$1.30
Thus the correct answer is option b.

Question 2.
Which represents the value of one $1 bill and 5 quarters? Options: a.$1.05
b. $1.25 c.$1.50
d. $2.25 Answer: d.$2.25

Explanation:
one $1 bill and 5 quarters. 5 quarters = 5 x 0.25 = 1.25.$1 + $1.25 =$2.25
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Spiral Review

Question 3.
Bethany has 9 pennies. What fraction of a dollar is this?
Options:
a. $$\frac{9}{100}$$
b. $$\frac{9}{10}$$
c. $$\frac{90}{100}$$
d. $$\frac{99}{100}$$

a. 9/100

Explanation:
1 dollar = 100 pennies.
So, 9 pennies = 9/100 of a dollar
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 4.
Michael made $$\frac{9}{12}$$ of his free throws at practice. What is $$\frac{9}{12}$$ in simplest form?
Options:
a. $$\frac{1}{4}$$
b. $$\frac{3}{9}$$
c. $$\frac{1}{2}$$
d. $$\frac{3}{4}$$

d. 3/4

Explanation:
9/12 is divided by 3 that is equal to d. 3/4.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 5.
I am a prime number between 30 and 40. Which number could I be?
Options:
a. 31
b. 33
c. 36
d. 39

a. 31

Explanation:
31 has fractions 1 and 31.
Thus the correct answer is option a.

Question 6.
Georgette is using the benchmark $$\frac{1}{2}$$ to compare fractions. Which statement is correct?
Options:
a. $$\frac{3}{8}>\frac{1}{2}$$
b. $$\frac{2}{5}<\frac{1}{2}$$
c. $$\frac{7}{12}<\frac{1}{2}$$
d. $$\frac{9}{10}=\frac{1}{2}$$

b. 2/5<1/2

Explanation:
From the given details, 2/5<1/2 is the correct answer.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 181

Add Fractional Parts of 10 and 100

Find the sum.

Question 1.
$$\frac{2}{10}+\frac{43}{100}$$ Think: Write $$\frac{2}{10}$$ as a fraction with a denominator of 100:
$$\frac{2 \times 10}{10 \times 10}=\frac{20}{100}$$

63/100

Explanation:
Think: Write 2/10 as a fraction with a denominator of 100:  2×10/10×10=20/100

Question 2.
$$\frac{17}{100}+\frac{6}{10}$$
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

77/100

Explanation:
17/100+6/10.
6×10/10×10=60/100
17/100+60/100 = 77/100

Question 3.
$$\frac{9}{100}+\frac{4}{10}$$
$$\frac{□}{□}$$
49/100
Explanation:
9/100+4/10.
4×10/10×10=40/100
9/100+40/100 = 49/100

Question 4.
$$\frac{7}{10}+\frac{23}{100}$$
$$\frac{□}{□}$$

93/100

Explanation:
7/10+23/100.
7×10/10×10=70/100
70/100+23/100 = 93/100

Question 5.
$0.48 +$0.30
$_____ Answer:$0.78

Explanation:
Think $0.48 as 48/100. Think$0.30 as 30/100.
48/100+30/100 = 78/100 = $0.78 Question 6.$0.25 + $0.34$ _____

$0.59 Explanation: Think$0.25 as 25/100.
Think $0.34 as 34/100. 25/100+34/100 = 59/100 =$0.59

Question 7.
$0.66 +$0.06
$_____ Answer:$0.72

Explanation:
Think $0.66 as 66/100. Think$0.06 as 6/100.
66/100+6/100 = 72/100 = $0.72 Problem Solving Question 8. Ned’s frog jumped $$\frac{38}{100}$$ meter. Then his frog jumped $$\frac{4}{10}$$ meter. How far did Ned’s frog jump in all? $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 78/100 meter Explanation: Ned’s frog jumped 38/100 meter. Then his frog jumped 4/10 meter. So, together 38/100 + 4/10 jumped. 4/10 = 4×10/10×10=40/100. 38/100 + 40/100 = 78/100. Question 9. Keiko walks $$\frac{5}{10}$$ kilometer from school to the park. Then she walks $$\frac{19}{100}$$ kilometer from the park to her home. How far does Keiko walk in all? $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 69/100 kilometer Explanation: Keiko walks 5/10 kilometer from school to the park. Then she walks 19/100 kilometer from the park to her home. Total = 5/10 + 19/100 kilometer. 5/10 = 5×10/10×10=50/100. 50/100 + 19/100 = 69/100. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 182 Lesson Check Question 1. In a fish tank, $$\frac{2}{10}$$ of the fish were orange and $$\frac{5}{100}$$ of the fish were striped. What fraction of the fish were orange or striped? Options: a. $$\frac{7}{10}$$ b. $$\frac{52}{100}$$ c. $$\frac{25}{100}$$ d. $$\frac{7}{100}$$ Answer: c. 25/100 Explanation: In a fish tank, 2/10 of the fish were orange and 5/100 of the fish were striped. To find the raction of the fish were orange or striped Add 2/10 and 5/100. 2/10 = 2×10/10×10=20/100. 20/100 + 5/100 = 25/100. Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 2. Greg spends$0.45 on an eraser and $0.30 on a pen. How much money does Greg spend in all? Options: a.$3.45
b. $0.75 c.$0.48
d. $0.15 Answer: b.$0.75

Explanation:
Think $0.45 as 45/100. Think$0.30 as 30/100.
45/100+30/100 = 75/100 = $0.75. Thus the correct answer is option b. Spiral Review Question 3. Phillip saves$8 each month. How many months will it take him to save at least $60? Options: a. 6 months b. 7 months c. 8 months d. 9 months Answer: c. 8 months Explanation: Phillip saves$8 each month.
To save at least $60, 60/8 = 8 months (approximately). Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 4. Ursula and Yi share a submarine sandwich. Ursula eats $$\frac{2}{8}$$ of the sandwich. Yi eats $$\frac{3}{8}$$ of the sandwich. How much of the sandwich do the two friends eat? Options: a. $$\frac{1}{8}$$ b. $$\frac{4}{8}$$ c. $$\frac{5}{8}$$ d. $$\frac{6}{8}$$ Answer: c. 5/8 Explanation: Ursula and Yi share a submarine sandwich. Ursula eats 2/8 of the sandwich. Yi eats 3/8 of the sandwich. Two friends eat 2/8 + 3/8 = 5/8 Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 5. A carpenter has a board that is 8 feet long. He cuts off two pieces. One piece is 3 $$\frac{1}{2}$$ feet long and the other is 2 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet long. How much of the board is left? Options: a. 2 $$\frac{1}{6}$$ feet b. 2 $$\frac{5}{6}$$ feet c. 3 $$\frac{1}{6}$$ feet d. 3 $$\frac{5}{6}$$ feet Answer: a. 2 1/6 Explanation: 3 1/2 = 7/2. 2 1/3 = 7/3. A carpenter has a board that is 8 feet long. He cuts off two pieces. One piece is 3 1/2 feet long and the other is 2 1/3 feet long. 7/2 + 7/3 = 7×3/2×3+$$7×2/3×2=[latex]2/16 + 14/6 = 35/6 = 5 5/6. He left 8 – 55/6. 7 6/6 – 5 5/6 = 2 1/6 Thus the correct answer is option a. Question 6. Jeff drinks [latex]\frac{2}{3}$$ of a glass of juice. Which fraction is equivalent to $$\frac{2}{3}$$ ? Options: a. $$\frac{1}{3}$$ b. $$\frac{3}{2}$$ c. $$\frac{3}{6}$$ d. $$\frac{8}{12}$$ Answer: d. 8/12 Explanation: 8/12 is divided by 4. So, 8/12 = 2/3. Thus the correct answer is option d. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 183 Compare Decimals Compare. Write <. >, or =. Question 1. Think: 3 tenths is less than 5 tenths. So, 0.35 < 0.53 Answer: 0.35 < 0.53 Explanation: 3 tenths is less than 5 tenths. So, 0.35 < 0.53 Question 2. 0.6 ____ 0.60 Answer: 0.6 = 0.60 Explanation: 0.6 is 6 tenths can write as 6 tenths and 0 hundredths. So, 0.6 = 0.60. Question 3. 0.24 ____ 0.31 Answer: 0.24 < 0.31 Explanation: 2 tenths is less than 3 tenths. So, 0.24 < 0.31. Question 4. 0.94 ____ 0.9 Answer: 0.94 > 0.9 Explanation: The digits of tenths are equal. So, compare hundredths. 4 hundredths is greater than 0 hundredths. So, 0.94 > 0.9. Question 5. 0.3 ____ 0.32 Answer: 0.3 < 0.32 Explanation: The digits of tenths are equal. So, compare hundredths. 0 hundredths is less than 2 hundredths. So, 0.3 < 0.32. Question 6. 0.45 ____ 0.28 Answer: 0.45 > 0.28 Explanation: 4 tenths is greater than 2 tenths. So, 0.45 > 0.28. Question 7. 0.39 ____ 0.93 Answer: 0.39 < 0.93 Explanation: 3 tenths is less than 9 tenths. So, 0.39 < 0.93. Use the number line to compare. Write true or false. Question 8. 0.8 > 0.78 _____ Answer: true Explanation: 0.78 is in between 0.7 and 0.8 that is less than 0.8. So, 0.8 > 0.78. Question 9. 0.4 > 0.84 _____ Answer: false Explanation: 0.4 is less than 0.84 and the left side of the number line. So, 0.4 < 0.84. The answer is false. Question 10. 0.7 < 0.70 _____ Answer: false Explanation: 0.7 is 7 tenths and 70 hundredths. 0.7 = 0.70. So, the answer is false. Question 11. 0.4 > 0.04 _____ Answer: true Explanation: 0.04 is less than 0.4 and it is left side of the 0.1 on the number line. 0.1 is less than 0.4. So, the given answer is true. Compare. Write true or false. Question 12. 0.09 > 0.1 _____ Answer: false Explanation: 0 tenths is less than 1 tenths. So, 0.09 < 0.1. So, the answer is false. Question 13. 0.24 = 0.42 _____ Answer: false Explanation: 2 tenths is less than 4 tenths. So, 0.24 < 0.42. So, the answer is false. Question 14. 0.17 < 0.32 _____ Answer: true Explanation: 1 tenth is less than 3 tenths. So, 0.17 < 0.32. So, the answer is true. Question 15. 0.85 > 0.82 _____ Answer: true Explanation: The digits of tenths are equal. So, compare hundredths. 5 hundredths is greater than 2 hundredths. So, 0.85 > 0.82. Question 16. Kelly walks 0.7 mile to school. Mary walks 0.49 mile to school. Write an inequality using <, > or = to compare the distances they walk to school. 0.7 _____ 0.49 Answer: 0.7 > 0.49 Explanation: 7 tenths is greater than 4 tenths. So, 0.7 > 0.49. Question 17. Tyrone shades two decimal grids. He shades 0.03 of the squares on one grid blue. He shades 0.3 of another grid red. Which grid has the greater part shaded? 0.03 _____ 0.3 Answer: 0.03 < 0.3 Explanation: 0.03 is 3 hundredths. 0.3 is 3 tenths, which is equal to 30 hundredths. 3 hundredths < 30 hundredths. So, 0.03 < 0.3. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 184 Lesson Check Question 1. Bob, Cal, and Pete each made a stack of baseball cards. Bob’s stack was 0.2 meter high. Cal’s stack was 0.24 meter high. Pete’s stack was 0.18 meter high. Which statement is true? Options: a. 0.02 > 0.24 b. 0.24 > 0.18 c. 0.18 > 0.2 d. 0.24 = 0.2 Answer: b. 0.24 > 0.18 Explanation: 2 tenths is greater than 1 tenth. So, 0.24 > 0.18. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 2. Three classmates spent money at the school supplies store. Mark spent 0.5 dollar, Andre spent 0.45 dollar, and Raquel spent 0.52 dollar. Which statement is true? Options: a. 0.45 > 0.5 b. 0.52 < 0.45 c. 0.5 = 0.52 d. 0.45 < 0.5 Answer: d. 0.45 < 0.5 Explanation: 4 tenths is less than 5 tenth. So, 0.45 > 0.5. Thus the correct answer is option d. Spiral Review Question 3. Pedro has$0.35 in his pocket. Alice has $0.40 in her pocket. How much money do Pedro and Alice have in their pockets altogether? Options: a.$0.05
b. $0.39 c.$0.75
d. $0.79 Answer: c.$0.75

Explanation:
Pedro has $0.35 in his pocket. Alice has$0.40 in her pocket.
Together = $0.35 +$0.40 = $0.75. Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 4. The measure 62 centimeters is equivalent to $$\frac{62}{100}$$ meter. What is this measure written as a decimal? Options: a. 62.0 meters b. 6.2 meters c. 0.62 meter d. 0.6 meter Answer: c. 0.62 meter Explanation: The decimal form of 62/100 = 0.62 meter. Thus the correct answer is option c. Question 5. Joel has 24 sports trophies. Of the trophies, $$\frac{1}{8}$$ are soccer trophies. How many soccer trophies does Joel have? Options: a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 6 Answer: b. 3 Explanation: Joel has 24 sports trophies. Of the trophies, 18 are soccer trophies. So, 18 × 24 = 3 soccer trophies. Thus the correct answer is option b. Question 6. Molly’s jump rope is 6 $$\frac{1}{3}$$feet long. Gail’s jump rope is 4 $$\frac{2}{3}$$feet long. How much longer is Molly’s jump rope? Options: a. 1 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet b. 1 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ feet c. 2 $$\frac{1}{3}$$ feet d. 2 $$\frac{2}{3}$$ feet Answer: b. 1 2/3 feet Explanation: 6 1/3 feet = 193 feet. 4 2/3 feet = 143 feet. 19/3 – 14/3 = 5/3 feet = b. 1 2/3 feet. Thus the correct answer is option b. ### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 185 Lessons 9.1 –9.2 Write the fraction or mixed number and the decimal shown by the model. Question 1. Type below: _________ Answer: Question 2. Type below: _________ Answer: 1 2/10 Explanation: The model is divided into 10 equal parts. Each part represents one-tenth. 1 2/10 is 1 whole and 2 tenths. Question 3. Type below: _________ Answer: 2 3/10 = 2.3 Explanation: Lesson 9.3 Write the number as hundredths in fraction form and decimal form. Question 4. $$\frac{8}{10}$$ Type below: _________ Answer: 80/100 0.8 Explanation: Write 8/10 as an equivalent fraction. 8/10 =8×10/10×10 = 80/100 8 tenths is the same as 8 tenths 0 hundredths. So the decimal form = 0.8 Question 5. 0.1 Type below: _________ Answer: 50/100 0.50 Explanation: Write 0.1 = 1/10 as an equivalent fraction. 1/10 =1×10/10×10 = 10/100 1 tenth is the same as 1 tenth 0 hundredths and also 0.1 Question 6. $$\frac{3}{10}$$ Type below: _________ Answer: Write 0.1 = 1/10 as an equivalent fraction. 3/10 =3×10/10×10 = 30/100 3 tenth is the same as 3 tenth 0 hundredths and also 0.3 Write the number as tenths in fraction form and decimal form. Question 7. $$\frac{60}{100}$$ Type below: _________ Answer: 6/10 0.6 Explanation: 10 is a common factor of the numerator and the denominator. 60/100 = 60÷10/100÷10 = 6/10 0.6 Thus the decimal form of the fraction $$\frac{60}{100}$$ is 0.6 Question 8. $$\frac{70}{100}$$ Type below: _________ Answer: Explanation: 10 is a common factor of the numerator and the denominator. 70/100 = 70÷10/100÷10 = 7/10 0.7 Thus the decimal form of the fraction $$\frac{70}{100}$$ is 0.7 Question 9. 0.20 Type below: _________ Answer: $$\frac{20}{100}$$ Explanation: The fraction form of 0.20 is $$\frac{20}{100}$$ Lesson 9.4 Write as a money amount and as a decimal in terms of dollars. Question 10. $$\frac{30}{100}$$ Dollars:$ _____ Decimal: _____

amount: $0.3 decimal: 0.3 of a dollar Explanation: 30/100 = 0.3 Thus the decimal form of the fraction $$\frac{30}{100}$$ is 0.3 Question 11. $$\frac{91}{100}$$ Dollars:$ _____ Decimal: _____

amount: $0.91 decimal: 0.91 of a dollar Explanation: 91/100 = 0.91 Thus the decimal form of the fraction $$\frac{91}{100}$$ is 0.91 Question 12. $$\frac{5}{100}$$ Dollars:$ _____ Decimal: _____

amount: $0.05 decimal: 0.05 of a dollar Explanation: 5/100 = 0.05 Thus the decimal form of the fraction $$\frac{5}{100}$$ is 0.05 Write the total money amount. Then write the amount as a fraction and as a decimal in terms of dollars. Question 13. 4 dimes, 9 pennies Answer: money amount:$0.49; fraction: 49/100; decimal: 0.49

Explanation:
Given that 4 dimes 9 pennies = (4 x 10/100) + (9 x 1/100) = 40/100 + 9/100 = 49/100

Question 14.
3 quarters, 1 dime

money amount: $0.85; fraction: 85/100; decimal: 0.85 Explanation: Given that 3 quarters 1 dime = (3 x 25/100) + (1 x 10/100) = 75/100 + 10/100 = 85/100 Question 15. 7 nickels, 2 pennies Answer: money amount:$0.37; fraction: 37100; decimal: 0.37

Explanation:
Given that 7 nickels 2 pennies = (7 x 5/100) + (2 x 1/100) = 35/100 + 2/100 = 37/100

### Common Core – Relate Fractions and Decimals – Page No. 186

Lesson 9.5

Question 1.
Camila, Jocelyn, and Audrey each earned $2.55. How much did the three girls earn altogether?$ _____

Answer: $7.65 Explanation: Given Camila, Jocelyn, and Audrey each earned$2.55
so Multiply $2.55 with 3 = 3 ×$2.55
we get three girls to earn altogether is $7.65 Question 2. Elijah, Xavier, and Adrian earned a total of$8.34. The boys shared the earnings equally. How much did each boy get?
$_____ Answer:$2.78

Explanation:
Given Elijah, Xavier, and Adrian earned a total of $8.34 so divide the total of$8.34 by 3 = 8.34/3
then we get the boys shared the earnings equally is $2.78 Question 3. Anthony saves$7 each week. In how many weeks will he have saved at least $40? _____ weeks Answer: 6 weeks Explanation: Given that, Anthony saves$7 each week.
We have to find how many weeks will he have saved at least $40$40/$7 = 6 (approx). Thus it takes 6 weeks to save at least$40.

Question 4.
Brianna has $2 less than Victoria. Victoria has$11 more than Damian. Damian has $6. How much money do they have in all?$ _____

Answer: $38 Explanation: Given, Brianna has$2 less than Victoria. Victoria has $11 more than Damian. This means that Victoria has 11 more than Damian, and since Damian has 6, Victoria has 17. Plug this into the fact that Brianna has 2 less than Victoria, or 15, to get 6 + 17 + 15 = 38 dollars. Lesson 9.6 Find the sum. Question 5. $$\frac{6}{10}+\frac{39}{100}$$ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 99/100 Explanation: 6/10+39/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 6/10 = 6X10/10X10 = 60/100. 60/100+39/100 = 99/100 Question 6. $$\frac{14}{100}+\frac{8}{10}$$ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 94/100 Explanation: 14/100+8/10. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 8/10 = 8X10/10X10 = 80/100. 14/100+80/100 = 94/100. Question 7. $$\frac{4}{10}+\frac{18}{100}$$ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 58/100 Explanation: 4/10+18/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 4/10 = 4X10/10X10 = 40/100. 18/100+40/100 = 58/100 Question 8. $$\frac{5}{10}+\frac{16}{100}$$ $$\frac{□}{□}$$ Answer: 58/100 Explanation: 5/10+16/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 5/10 = 5X10/10X10 = 50/100. 16/100+50/100 = 66/100 Question 9.$0.43 + $0.20$ _____

$0.63 Explanation: Think 0.43 as 43 hundredths = 43/100. Think 0.20 as 20 hundredths = 20/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 43/100 + 20/100 = 63/100 = 0.63 Question 10.$0.07 + $0.35$ _____

$0.42 Explanation: Think 0.07 as 07 hundredths = 7/100. Think 0.35 as 35 hundredths = 35/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 7/100 + 35/100 = 42/100 = 0.42 Question 11.$0.80 + $0.15 =$ _____

$0.95 Explanation: Think 0.80 as 80 hundredths = 80/100. Think 0.15 as 15 hundredths = 15/100. Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator 80/100 + 15/100 = 95/100 = 0.95 Question 12.$0.52 + $0.28$ _____

\$0.80

Explanation:
Think 0.52 as 52 hundredths = 52/100.
Think 0.28 as 28 hundredths = 28/100.
Write the addends as fractions with a common denominator
52/100 + 28/100 = 80/100 = 0.80

Lesson 9.7

Compare. Write<, >, or =.

Question 13.
0.3 _____ 0.39

0.3 < 0.39.

Explanation:
0.3 is 3 tenths, which is equivalent to 30 hundredths.
0.39 is 39 hundredths.
30 hundredths < 39 hundredths. So, 0.3 < 0.39.

Question 14.
0.9 _____ 0.90

0.9 = 0.90

Explanation:
0.9 is 9 tenths, which is equivalent to 90 hundredths.
0.90 is 90 hundredths.
90 hundredths = 90 hundredths. So, 0.9 = 0.90.

Question 15.
0.54 _____ 0.45

0.54 > 0.45

Explanation:
0.54 is 5.4 tenths, which is equivalent to 54 hundredths.
0.45 is 45 hundredths.
54 hundredths > 45 hundredths. So, 0.54 > 0.45.

Question 16.
0.04 _____ 0.06

0.04 < 0.06

Explanation:
0.04 is 0.4 tenths, which is equivalent to 4 hundredths.
0.06 is 0.6 hundredths.
0.4 hundredths < 0.6 hundredths. So, 0.04 < 0.06

Question 17.
0.7 _____ 0.70

0.7 = 0.70

Explanation:
0.7 is 7 tenths, which is equivalent to 70 hundredths.
0.70 is 70 hundredths.
70 hundredths = 70 hundredths. So, 0.7 = 0.70.

Question 18.
0.36 _____ 0.51

0.36 < 0.51.

Explanation:
0.36 is 3.6 tenths, which is equivalent to 36 hundredths.
0.51 is 51 hundredths.
36 hundredths < 51 hundredths. So, 0.36 < 0.51.

Question 19.
0.8 _____ 0.67

0.8 > 0.67.

Explanation:
0.8 is 8.0 tenths, which is equivalent to 80 hundredths.
0.67 is 67 hundredths.
80 hundredths > 67 hundredths. So, 0.80 > 0.67.

Question 20.
0.63 _____ 0.48

0.63 > 0.48.

Explanation:
0.63 is 6.3 tenths, which is equivalent to 63 hundredths.
0.48 is 48 hundredths.
63 hundredths > 48 hundredths. So,0.63 > 0.48.

Compare. Write true or false.

Question 21.
0.32 > 0.23
_____

True

Explanation:
0.32 is Greater than 0.23 and the left side of the number line. So, 0.32 < 0.23. The answer is True.

Question 22.
0.86 = 0.9
_____

false

Explanation:
86 tenths is less than 90 tenths. So, 0.86 < 0.9. So, the answer is false.

Question 23.
0.68 < 0.83
_____

true

Explanation:
6 tenths is less than 8 tenths. So, 0.68 < 0.83. So, the answer is true.

Question 24.
0.97 > 0.94
_____

Explanation:
The digits of tenths are equal. So, compare hundredths. 7 hundredths is greater than 4 hundredths.
So, the answer is 0.97 > 0.94.

Conclusion:

The best outcomes come to your fingertips with Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key. Make use of the links for easy solving with the help of Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 9 Relate Fractions and Decimals. Students can learn the best tricks to solve the questions and become a master in maths. Best Of Luck!!!!

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Review/Test

Enhance your math skills by referring to the Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Review/Test. With the help of this HMH Go Math Grade 4 Review/Test Answer Key you score good marks in the exam.

## Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Review/Test

Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Homework FL Review/Test covers all the topics in Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units. Test the knowledge of your child by giving the question from Review/Test. Just click on the link and Download Go Math Grade 4 Solution Key Homework FL Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units Review/Test pdf.

Chapter 12 – Review/Test

### Review/Test – Page No. 491

Choose the best term from the box to complete the sentence.

Question 1.
A ___________ is a metric unit for measuring length or distance.
________

A millimeter is a metric unit for measuring length or distance.

Question 2.
A ___________ is a metric unit for measuring liquid volume.
________

A milliliter is a metric unit for measuring liquid volume.

Question 3.
A ___________ is a graph that shows the frequency of data along a number line.
________

A line plot is a graph that shows the frequency of data along a number line.

Question 4.
A ___________ is a customary unit for measuring liquid volume.
________

A quart is a customary unit for measuring liquid volume.

Complete.

Question 5.
9 feet = _____ inches

Explanation:
Convert from feet to inches
1 feet = 12 inches
9 feet = 9 × 12 inches = 108 inches
Thus 9 feet = 108 inches

Question 6.
7 tons = _____ pounds

Explanation:
Converting from tons to pounds
1 ton = 2000 pounds
7 tons = 7 × 2000 pounds = 14,000 pounds
Thus 7 tons = 14,000 pounds

Question 7.
10 pints = _____ cups

Explanation:
Converting from pints to cups.
1 pint = 2 cups
10 pints = 10 × 2 cups = 20 cups
Thus 10 pints = 20 cups

Question 8.
4 decimeters = _____ centimeters

Explanation:
Converting from decimeters to centimeters.
1 decimeter = 10 centimeter
4 decimeters = 4 × 10 centimeter = 40 centimeters
Thus 4 decimeters = 40 centimeters

Question 9.
8 liters = _____ milliliters

Explanation:
Converting from liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
8 liters = 8 × 1000 milliliters
= 8000 milliliters
Thus 8 liters = 8000 milliliters

Question 10.
5 weeks = _____ days

Explanation:
Converting from weeks to days.
1 week = 7 days
5 weeks = 5 × 7 days = 35 days
Thus 5 weeks = 35 days

Compare using <, >, or =.

Question 11.
3 yards _____ 36 inches

Explanation:
Converting from yards to inches.
1 yard = 36 inches
3 yards = 108 inches
Thus 3 yards > 36 inches

Question 12.
10 cups _____ 80 fluid ounces

Explanation:
Converting from cups to fluid ounces.
1 cup = 8 fluid ounces
10 cups = 8 × 10 = 80 fluid oiunces
Thus 10 cups = 80 fluid ounces

Question 13.
4 pounds _____ 96 ounces

Explanation:
Converting from pounds to ounces.
1 pound = 16 ounces
4 pounds = 4 × 16 ounces = 64 ounces
64 ounces is less than 96 ounces
Thus, 4 pounds < 96 ounces

Question 14.
8 meters _____ 700 centimeters

Explanation:
Converting from meters to centimeters.
1 meter = 100 centimeters
8 meters = 8 × 100 centimeters = 800 centimeters
800 centimeters is greater than 700 centimeters.
Thus, 8 meters > 700 centimeters

Question 15.
6 liters _____ 6,500 milliliters

Explanation:
Converting from liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
6 liters = 6 × 1000 milliliters
6000 milliliters is less than 6500 milliliters.
Thus, 6 liters < 6,500 milliliters.

Question 16.
9 kilograms _____ 9,000 grams

Explanation:
Converting from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
9 kilograms = 9 × 1000 grams = 9000 grams
9 kilograms = 9,000 grams

Question 17.
8 hr 30 min
− 6 hr 25 min
————————–
_____ hr _____ min

Explanation:
8 hr 30 min
-6 hr 25 min
2 hr 5 min

Question 18.
7 c 4 fl oz
+4 c 3 fl oz
———————–
_____ c _____ fl oz

Explanation:
7 c 4 fl oz
+4 c 3 fl oz
11 c 7 fl oz.

Question 19.
9 yd 1 ft
−5 yd 2 ft
———————–
_____ yd _____ ft

Explanation:
First, convert from the yard to feet.
1 yard = 3 ft
9 yd 1 ft = 8 yd 4 ft
8 yd 4 ft
-5 yd 2 ft
3 yd 2 ft

### Review/Test – Page No. 492

Question 20.
Maya’s band rehearsal started at 10:30 A.M. It ended 1 hour and 40 minutes later. At what time did Maya’s band rehearsal end?
Options:
a. 12:10 A.M.
b. 8:50 A.M.
c. 12:10 P.M.
d. 11:10 P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Maya’s band rehearsal started at 10:30 A.M. It ended 1 hour and 40 minutes later.
10 hr 30 min
+1 hr 40 min
11 hr 70 min
Now convert 70 min to hours.
70 min = 1 hr 10 min
11 hr 70 min = 12:10 P.M.
Thus the correct answer is option C.

Question 21.
Darlene is making punch. She pours 4 quarts 2 cups of apple juice into a bowl. Then she pours 3 quarts 1 cup of grape juice into the bowl. How much juice is in the bowl now?
Options:
a. 1 quart 1 cup
b. 7 quarts 1 cup
c. 7 quarts 3 cups
d. 8 quarts 1 cup

Explanation:
Given,
Darlene is making punch. She pours 4 quarts 2 cups of apple juice into a bowl.
Then she pours 3 quarts 1 cup of grape juice into the bowl.
4 quarts 2 cups
+3 quarts 1 cup
7 quarts 3 cups
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 22.
Kainoa bought a brick of modeling clay that was labeled 2 kilograms. He needs to separate the clay into balls that are measured in grams. How many grams does he have?
Options:
a. 20 grams
b. 200 grams
c. 2,000 grams
d. 20,000 grams

Explanation:
Given,
Kainoa bought a brick of modeling clay that was labeled 2 kilograms.
He needs to separate the clay into balls that are measured in grams.
Convert from kilograms to grams.
1 kilogram = 1000 grams
2 kilograms = 2 × 1000 grams = 2000 grams
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 23.
A truck driver’s truck weighs 3 tons. A weigh station measures the weight in pounds. How many pounds does the truck weigh?
Options:
a. 600 pounds
b. 2,000 pounds
c. 3,000 pounds
d. 6,000 pounds

Explanation:
Given,
A truck driver’s truck weighs 3 tons. A weigh station measures the weight in pounds.
Convert from tons to pounds.
1 ton = 2000 pounds
3 tons = 3 × 2000 pounds = 6000 pounds
Thus the correct answer is option d.

### Review/Test – Page No. 493

Question 24.
Brody and Amanda canoed for 1 hour and 20 minutes before stopping to fish at 1:15 P.M. At what time did they start canoeing?
Options:
a. 11:55 A.M.
b. 12:05 P.M.
c. 2:35 P.M.
d. 11:55 P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Brody and Amanda canoed for 1 hour and 20 minutes before stopping to fish at 1:15 P.M.
13 hr 15 min
-1 hr 20 min
11 hr 55 min
Thus they start canoeing at 11:55 A.M.
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 25.
Lewis fills his thermos with 2 liters of water. Garret fills his thermos with 1 liter of water. How many more milliliters of water does Lewis have than Garret?
Options:
a. 1 more milliliter
b. 100 more milliliters
c. 1,000 more milliliters
d. 2,000 more milliliters

Explanation:
Given,
Lewis fills his thermos with 2 liters of water. Garret fills his thermos with 1 liter of water.
2 liters
-1 liters
1 liter
Convert from liters to milliliters.
1 liter = 1000 milliliters
Thus the correct answer is option c.

Question 26.
Lola won the 100-meter freestyle event at her swim meet. How many decimeters did Lola swim?
Options:
a. 1 decimeter
b. 10 decimeter
c. 100 decimeter
d. 1,000 decimeter

Explanation:
Given,
Lola won the 100-meter freestyle event at her swim meet.
Convert from meter to decimeter.
1 meter = 10 decimeter
100 meter = 100 × 10 decimeter = 1000 decimeter
Thus the correct answer is option d.

Question 27.
What is the best estimate for the length of an ant’s leg?
Options:
a. 2 millimeters
b. 2 centimeters
c. 2 decimeters
d. 2 meters

Explanation:
The best estimation for the length of an ant’s leg is 2 centimeters.
Thus the correct answer is option b.

### Review/Test – Page No. 494

Question 28.
Sabita made this table to relate two customary units of liquid volume. List the number pairs for the table. Describe the relationship between the numbers in each pair.

Type below:
________

Answer: The relationship between the numbers in each pair is pints and cups.

Question 29.
Type below:
________

Question 30.
Landon borrowed a book from the library. The data show the lengths of time Landon read the book each day until he finished it.

A. Make a tally table and a line plot to show the data.

Type below:
________

Question 30.
B. Explain how you used the tally table to label the numbers and plot the Xs on the line plot.
Type below:
________

I used the number of tallys to the plot the Xs on the line plot.

Question 30.
C. What is the difference between the longest time and shortest time Landon spent reading the book?
$$\frac{□}{□}$$ hour

Answer: $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hour

Explanation:
The shortest time Landon spent reading the book is 1/4
The longest time Landon spent reading the book is 1
1 – 1/4 = 3/4
Thus the difference between the longest time and shortest time Landon spent reading the book is $$\frac{3}{4}$$ hour.

Conclusion:

The students of 4th grade can avail all chapters Go Math Grade Answer Key in pdf format so that your learning will kick start in an effective manner. We have given a brief explanation of each and every question on our Go Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 12 Relative Sizes of Measurement Units. We suggest the students understand the concepts and apply them in the real world.

## Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Contains Data collections, Dot plots, frequency tables, Histograms, etc. Which helps students solve assignments and also for preparing in exams. Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key was explained by the professionals in a unique and simple way so that students can easily understand the solution. Students, Teachers, and Parents can easily understand the solutions and help to explain the concept to other people easily.

### Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center

Go Math Grade 6 Answer Key Chapter 12 Data Displays and Measures of Center This chapter also provides a Review test that helps students practice more on the concepts. Each question was explained with a step-by-step procedure which helped the students to understand easily and not face any difficulty in learning. Check the below links and learn quickly.

Lesson 1: Recognize Statistical Questions

Lesson 2: Describe Data Collection

Lesson 3: